2009 HUMMER H3/H3T Owner Manual M

Seats and Restraint Universal Home Four-Wheel Drive ...... 5-38 System ...... 1-1 Remote System ...... 2-42 Front Axle ...... 5-39 Head Restraints ...... 1-2 Storage Areas ...... 2-47 Headlamp Aiming ...... 5-39 Front Seats ...... 1-3 Sunroof ...... 2-50 Bulb Replacement ...... 5-41 Rear Seats ...... 1-7 ...... 3-1 Windshield Wiper Blade Safety Belts Instrument Panel ...... 1-11 Instrument Panel Replacement ...... 5-44 Child Restraints ...... 1-25 Overview ...... 3-4 Tires ...... 5-44 Airbag System ...... 1-46 Climate Controls ...... 3-19 Appearance Care ...... 5-83 Restraint System Warning Lights, Gages, Vehicle Identiﬁcation ...... 5-90 Check ...... 1-60 and Indicators ...... 3-22 Electrical System ...... 5-91 Features and Controls ...... 2-1 Driver Information Capacities and Keys ...... 2-2 Center (DIC) ...... 3-34 Speciﬁcations ...... 5-96 Doors and Locks ...... 2-5 Audio System(s) ...... 3-41 Maintenance Schedule ...... 6-1 Windows ...... 2-9 Driving Your Vehicle ...... 4-1 Maintenance Schedule ..... 6-1 Theft-Deterrent Your Driving, the Road, Systems ...... 2-11 and the Vehicle Customer Assistance ...... 4-1 ...... 7-1 Starting and Operating Your Towing ...... 4-40 Information Vehicle ...... 2-15 Customer Assistance and Information ...... 7-1 Mirrors ...... 2-33 Service and Appearance Care ...... 5-1 Reporting Safety Object Detection Defects ...... 7-14 Systems ...... 2-36 Service ...... 5-3 Vehicle Data Recording OnStar® System ...... 2-39 Fuel ...... 5-5 Checking Things Under and Privacy ...... 7-16 the Hood ...... 5-9 Index ...... i-1 Rear Axle ...... 5-38 ii Preface

This manual describes features Propriétaires Canadiens that may or may not be on your On peut obtenir un exemplaire de speciﬁc vehicle. ce guide en français auprès de Read this manual from beginning to concessionnaire ou à l’adresse end to learn about the vehicle’s suivante: features and controls. Pictures, Helm Incorporated symbols, and words work together GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM P.O. Box 07130 to explain vehicle operation. Emblem, HUMMER, H3 and H3T Detroit, MI 48207 are trademarks of General Motors Keep this manual in the vehicle for 1-800-551-4123 Corporation. quick reference. helminc.com This manual includes the latest information at the time it was Canadian Owners Index printed. GM reserves the right to A French language copy of this To quickly locate information about make changes after that time manual can be obtained from your the vehicle use the Index in the without further notice. For vehicles dealer/retailer or from: back of the manual. It is an ﬁrst sold in Canada, substitute alphabetical list of what is in the the name “General Motors of Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 manual and the page number where Canada Limited” for HUMMER Detroit, MI 48207 it can be found. wherever it appears in this manual. 1-800-551-4123 helminc.com

Safety Warnings and Cautions tell what the hazard is and Vehicle Symbols what to do to avoid or reduce the Symbols hazard. Read these cautions. The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead A notice tells about something that of text. Symbols are shown along can damage the vehicle. with the text describing the operation Notice: These mean there is or information relating to a speciﬁc something that could damage component, control, message, your vehicle. gage, or indicator. A circle with a slash through it is a M safety symbol which means “Do Not,” Many times, this damage would : This symbol is shown when “Do not do this” or “Do not let this not be covered by the vehicle’s you need to see your owner manual happen.” warranty, and it could be costly. for additional instructions or The notice tells what to do to help information. A box with the word CAUTION is avoid the damage. used to tell about things that could * : This symbol is shown when hurt you or others if you were to There are also warning labels on you need to see a service manual ignore the warning. the vehicle which use the same for additional instructions or words, CAUTION or Notice. information. { CAUTION

These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people. iv Preface

Vehicle Symbol Chart # : Fog Lamps Here are some additional symbols . that may be found on the vehicle : Fuel Gage and what they mean. For more + information on the symbol, refer to : Fuses the index. i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam 9 : Airbag Readiness Light Changer j # : Air Conditioning : LATCH System Child Restraints * ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) : Malfunction Indicator Lamp : g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls : Oil Pressure or OnStar® } : Power $ : Brake System Warning Light / : Remote Vehicle Start " : Charging System > : Safety Belt Reminders I : Cruise Control 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor B : Engine Coolant Temperature F : Traction Control O : Exterior Lamps M : Windshield Washer Fluid Seats and Restraint System 1-1

Seats and Safety Belts Airbag System Safety Belts: They Are for Airbag System ...... 1-46 Restraint System Everyone ...... 1-11 Where Are the Airbags? ...1-49 How to Wear Safety Belts When Should an Airbag Properly ...... 1-14 Inflate? ...... 1-50 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 1-20 What Makes an Airbag Head Restraints Safety Belt Use During Inflate? ...... 1-52 Head Restraints ...... 1-2 Pregnancy ...... 1-25 How Does an Airbag Safety Belt Extender ...... 1-25 Restrain? ...... 1-52 Front Seats What Will You See After Manual Seats ...... 1-3 Child Restraints an Airbag Inflates? ...... 1-52 Power Seats ...... 1-3 Older Children ...... 1-25 Passenger Sensing Manual Lumbar ...... 1-4 Infants and Young System ...... 1-54 Power Lumbar ...... 1-4 Children ...... 1-28 Servicing Your Heated Seats ...... 1-4 Child Restraint Systems ....1-31 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..1-58 Reclining Seatbacks ...... 1-5 Where to Put the Adding Equipment to Restraint ...... 1-32 Your Airbag-Equipped Rear Seats Lower Anchors and Vehicle ...... 1-58 60/40 Split Bench Tethers for Children Seat (H3) ...... 1-7 (LATCH) ...... 1-34 Restraint System Check 60/40 Split Bench Securing a Child Checking the Restraint Seat (H3T) ...... 1-9 Restraint in a Rear Systems ...... 1-60 Outside Seat Position ...... 1-41 Replacing Restraint Securing a Child System Parts After a Restraint in the Center Crash ...... 1-60 Rear Seat Position ...... 1-43 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position ...... 1-43 1-2 Seats and Restraint System

Head Restraints The front seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions.

{ CAUTION

With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do not drive until Adjust the head restraint so that the Pull the head restraint up to raise it. the head restraints for all top of the restraint is at the same To lower the head restraint, press occupants are installed and height as the top of the occupant’s the button, located on the top of adjusted properly. head. This position reduces the the seatback, and push the chance of a neck injury in a crash. restraint down. Push down on the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place. The head restraints are not designed to be removed. Seats and Restraint System 1-3

Front Seats To move a manual seat forward or Power Seats rearward: Manual Seats

{ CAUTION

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and On a vehicle with power seats, the confuse you, or make you push a controls used to operate them are pedal when you do not want to. located on the outboard side of the Adjust the driver’s seat only when seats. the vehicle is not moving. 1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat. To adjust the seat: 2. Slide the seat to the desired • Move the seat forward or position and release the bar. rearward by sliding the control Try to move the seat with your body forward or rearward. to be sure the seat is locked in place. • Raise or lower the front or rear part of the seat cushion by moving the front or rear of the control up or down. • Raise or lower the entire seat cushion by moving the control up or down. 1-4 Seats and Restraint System

Manual Lumbar Power Lumbar Heated Seats This feature heats the cushion and seatbacks.

On vehicles with this feature, the On vehicles with this feature, the control is located on the outboard knob is located on the outboard side side of the seat(s). of the seat. To increase or decrease lumbar On vehicles with this feature the Turn the knob clockwise or support, press and hold the front or controls may be located on the counterclockwise to increase or rear of the control. outboard sides of the front seats. decrease the lumbar support. Press the top of the switch to turn the heat to the high setting. Press the bottom of the switch to turn the heat to the low setting. Put the switch in the center position to turn the heat off. Seats and Restraint System 1-5

The ignition must be on for the Reclining Seatbacks The seats have manual reclining heated seat feature to work. The seatbacks. The lever used to seat will heat to the last setting if the { operate them is located on the ignition has been turned off and then CAUTION outboard side of the seats. turned back on. You can lose control of the For the heated seat feature to work vehicle if you try to adjust a on the passenger seat the safety manual driver’s seat while the belt must be fastened. vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle is not moving.

If the controls are located on the { CAUTION To recline the seatback: center console, press the button to 1. Lift the recline lever and move the turn the heated seat and seatback If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden seatback to the desired position, on or off. then release the lever to lock the stop or crash. That could cause seatback in place. Each time the button is pressed, the injury to the person sitting there. temperature settings change from Always push and pull on the 2. Push and pull on the seatback to high, to low, to off. Indicator lights seatbacks to be sure they are make sure it is locked. on the button show the level of locked. heat selected: two for high, and one for low. 1-6 Seats and Restraint System

To return the seatback to an upright position: { CAUTION CAUTION (Continued) 1. Lift the lever fully without Sitting in a reclined position when The lap belt cannot do its job applying pressure to the the vehicle is in motion can be seatback. either. In a crash, the belt could dangerous. Even if when buckled go up over your abdomen. The 2. Push and pull on the seatback to up, the safety belts cannot do belt forces would be there, not at make sure it is locked. their job when reclined like this. your pelvic bones. This could The shoulder belt cannot do its job cause serious internal injuries. because it will not be against your For proper protection when the body. Instead, it will be in front of vehicle is in motion, have the you. In a crash, you could go into seatback upright. Then sit well it, receiving neck or other injuries. back in the seat and wear the (Continued) safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined when the vehicle is moving. Seats and Restraint System 1-7

Rear Seats 60/40 Split Bench Seat (H3) The 60/40 split bench seats can be folded for more cargo space. Folding the Seatbacks There should be nothing on, under, or in front of the seat, and the front seats should be moved forward. 2. Pull the seat cushion forward 3. Lift the latch on top of the until it rests in the footwell. seatback and pull the seatback To fold the rear seatback(s): forward. Fold the seatback Notice: Folding a rear seat with down until it is nearly ﬂat. the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the 4. If the seatback will not fold nearly safety belts. Always unbuckle the ﬂat, try moving the front seat safety belts and return them to forward and/or moving the front their normal stowed position seatback more upright. before folding a rear seat. 5. Repeat the steps for the other half of the 60/40 split bench seat.

1. Reach under the front of the seat and lift the cushion up while moving it forward. 1-8 Seats and Restraint System

Returning the Seatbacks to an To return the seatback(s) to the Upright Position { CAUTION upright position: A safety belt that is improperly 1. Lift the seatback up and push it { CAUTION routed, not properly attached, or all the way rearward. twisted will not provide the 2. Reach under the front seat and If either seatback is not locked, it protection needed in a crash. The lift the cushion while moving it could move forward in a sudden person wearing the belt could be rearward until it latches. stop or crash. That could cause seriously injured. After raising the injury to the person sitting there. 3. Pull forward on the seatback and rear seatback, always check to be push down on the seat cushion Always push and pull on the sure that the safety belts are to make sure the seat is seatbacks to be sure they are properly routed and attached, and securely in place. locked. are not twisted. Seats and Restraint System 1-9

60/40 Split Bench To fold the rear seatback(s) forward: Seat (H3T) Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat.

2. Pull the loop, located on the 1. Disconnect the rear center safety outboard side of the seatback, belt latch from the mini buckle by forward until you hear a click. inserting the tip of the safety belt into the slot on the buckle. Let the 3. Fold the seatback forward slightly belt retract. so that the headrest can be removed. 1-10 Seats and Restraint System

To return the seatback(s) to the upright position: { CAUTION

1. Lift the seatback partially and A safety belt that is improperly reinsert the headrest. routed, not properly attached, or 2. Lift the seatback completely and twisted will not provide the push it into place. protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could { CAUTION be seriously injured. After raising the rear seatback, always check If either seatback is not locked, it to be sure that the safety belts could move forward in a sudden are properly routed and attached, stop or crash. That could cause and are not twisted. 4. Remove the headrest by injury to the person sitting there. pressing the button on the Always push and pull on the 4. Reconnect the center safety belt headrest post, at the top of the seatbacks to be sure they are latch plate to the mini buckle. seatback, and lift to remove. locked. Make sure the safety belt is not 5. Lift the headrest off of the twisted. seatback and store on the back 3. Make sure the seatback is locked 5. Push and pull on the latch plate panel. by pushing and pulling on it. to be sure it is secure. When the seatback is not in use, it should be kept in the upright, locked position. Seats and Restraint System 1-11

Safety Belts This vehicle has indicators as a { CAUTION reminder to buckle the safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on Safety Belts: They Are It is extremely dangerous to ride page 3-24. for Everyone in a cargo area, inside or outside In most states and in all Canadian This section of the manual describes of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more provinces, the law requires how to use safety belts properly. wearing safety belts. Here is why: It also describes some things not to likely to be seriously injured or do with safety belts. killed. Do not allow people to ride You never know if you will be in a in any area of your vehicle that is crash. If you do have a crash, you do not equipped with seats and not know if it will be a serious one. { CAUTION safety belts. Be sure everyone in A few crashes are mild, and some your vehicle is in a seat and using Do not let anyone ride where a crashes can be so serious that even a safety belt properly. safety belt cannot be worn buckled up, a person would not properly. In a crash, if you or your survive. But most crashes are in passenger(s) are not wearing { between. In many of them, people safety belts, the injuries can be CAUTION who buckle up can survive and much worse. You can hit things sometimes walk away. Without People riding on the tailgate inside the vehicle harder or be safety belts they could have been (if equipped) can easily lose their badly hurt or killed. ejected from the vehicle. You and balance and fall even when the your passenger(s) can be seriously After more than 40 years of safety vehicle is operated at low speeds. injured or killed. In the same crash, belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. Falling from a moving vehicle may you might not be, if you are In most crashes buckling up does result in serious injuries or death. buckled up. Always fasten your matter... a lot! safety belt, and check that your passenger(s) are restrained properly too. 1-12 Seats and Restraint System

Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider does not stop.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on wheels. Seats and Restraint System 1-13

The person keeps going until or the instrument panel... or the safety belts! stopped by something. In a real With safety belts, you slow down as vehicle, it could be the windshield... the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why safety belts make such good sense. 1-14 Seats and Restraint System

Questions and Answers About Q: If I am a good driver, and I How to Wear Safety Belts Safety Belts never drive far from home, why Properly should I wear safety belts? Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle This section is only for people of after a crash if I am wearing a A: You may be an excellent driver, adult size. safety belt? but if you are in a crash — even one that is not your fault — you Be aware that there are special You could be — whether you are A: and your passenger(s) can be things to know about safety wearing a safety belt or not. But hurt. Being a good driver does not belts and children. And there are your chance of being conscious protect you from things beyond different rules for smaller children during and after an accident, so your control, such as bad drivers. and infants. If a child will be riding in you can unbuckle and get out, is the vehicle, see Older Children on much greater if you are belted. Most accidents occur within page 1-25 or Infants and Young And you can unbuckle a safety 25 miles (40 km) of home. And Children on page 1-28. Follow those belt, even if you are upside down. the greatest number of serious rules for everyone’s protection. injuries and deaths occur at It is very important for all occupants Q: If my vehicle has airbags, speeds of less than 40 mph to buckle up. Statistics show that why should I have to wear (65 km/h). safety belts? unbelted people are hurt more often Safety belts are for everyone. in crashes than those who are A: Airbags are supplemental wearing safety belts. systems only; so they work with safety belts — not instead of Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of the vehicle in a them. Whether or not an airbag is crash. And they can strike others provided, all occupants still have in the vehicle who are wearing to buckle up to get the most safety belts. protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions. Seats and Restraint System 1-15

First, before you or your touching the thighs. In a crash, this Q: What is wrong with this? passenger(s) wear a safety belt, applies force to the strong pelvic there is important information bones and you would be less likely to you should know. slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as much protection this way. Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the ﬂoor in front of you. The { lap part of the belt should be worn CAUTION low and snug on the hips, just You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should ﬁt snugly against your body. 1-16 Seats and Restraint System

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this? { CAUTION

You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.

A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not A: The belt is buckled in the wrong give nearly as much protection buckle. this way. Seats and Restraint System 1-17

Q: What is wrong with this? { CAUTION { CAUTION

You can be seriously injured if You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong your belt goes over an armrest place like this. In a crash, the belt like this. The belt would be much would go up over your abdomen. too high. In a crash, you can slide The belt forces would be there, under the belt. The belt force not on the pelvic bones. This would then be applied on the could cause serious internal abdomen, not on the pelvic injuries. Always buckle your belt bones, and that could cause into the buckle nearest you. serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.

A: The belt is over an armrest. 1-18 Seats and Restraint System

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this? { CAUTION

You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder A: The shoulder belt is worn under belt should go over the shoulder A: The belt is behind the body. the arm. It should be worn over and across the chest. the shoulder at all times. Seats and Restraint System 1-19

Q: What is wrong with this? { CAUTION { CAUTION

You can be seriously injured by not You can be seriously injured by a wearing the lap-shoulder belt twisted belt. In a crash, you would properly. In a crash, you would not not have the full width of the belt be restrained by the shoulder belt. to spread impact forces. If a belt Your body could move too far is twisted, make it straight so it forward increasing the chance of can work properly, or ask your head and neck injury. You might dealer/retailer to ﬁx it. also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should A: The belt is twisted across go over the shoulder and across the body. the chest. 1-20 Seats and Restraint System

Lap-Shoulder Belt If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled out all All seating positions in the vehicle the way, the child restraint have a lap-shoulder belt. locking feature may be engaged. If you are using a rear seating If this happens, let the belt go position with a detachable safety back all the way and start again. belt and the safety belt is not Engaging the child restraint attached, see 60/40 Split Bench locking feature in the right front Seat (H3) on page 1-7 or 60/40 Split seating position may affect Bench Seat (H3T) on page 1-9 for the passenger sensing system. instruction on reconnecting the See Passenger Sensing safety belt to the mini-buckle. System on page 1-54 for more information. The following instructions explain 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull how to wear a lap-shoulder belt the belt across you. Do not let properly. it get twisted. 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is The lap-shoulder belt may lock if adjustable, so you can sit up you pull the belt across you straight. To see how, see “Seats” very quickly. If this happens, in the Index. let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly. Seats and Restraint System 1-21

4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster, move it to the height that is right for you. See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this section for instructions on use and important safety information.

3. Push the latch plate into the To unlatch the belt, push the button buckle until it clicks. on the buckle. The belt should return Pull up on the latch plate to to its stowed position. Slide the latch make sure it is secure. If the belt plate up the safety belt webbing is not long enough, see Safety when the safety belt is not in use. Belt Extender on page 1-25. The latch plate should rest on the stitching on the safety belt, near the Position the release button on guide loop on the side wall. the buckle so that the safety belt 5. To make the lap part tight, pull could be quickly unbuckled if up on the shoulder belt. Before a door is closed, be sure the necessary. It may be necessary to pull safety belt is out of the way. If a stitching on the safety belt door is slammed against a safety through the latch plate to fully belt, damage can occur to both the tighten the lap belt on smaller safety belt and the vehicle. occupants. 1-22 Seats and Restraint System

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster Safety Belt Pretensioners The vehicle has a shoulder belt This vehicle has safety belt height adjuster for the driver and pretensioners for the front outboard right front passenger seating occupants. Although the safety belt positions. pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the safety belt assembly. Adjust the height so that the shoulder They can help tighten the safety belts portion of the belt is centered on the during the early stages of a moderate shoulder. The belt should be away to severe frontal, near frontal, or rear from the face and neck, but not crash if the threshold conditions for falling off of the shoulder. Improper pretensioner activation are met. And, shoulder belt height adjustment for vehicles with side impact airbags, could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt pretensioners can help safety belt in a crash. To move it down, press the release tighten the safety belts in a side button (A) and move the height crash or a rollover event. adjuster to the desired position. You can move the height adjuster up Pretensioners work only once. If the just by pushing up on the shoulder pretensioners activate in a crash, belt guide. they will need to be replaced, and probably other new parts for the After the adjuster is set to the desired vehicle’s safety belt system. See position, try to move it down without Replacing Restraint System Parts pushing the button to make sure it After a Crash on page 1-60. has locked into position. Seats and Restraint System 1-23

Rear Safety Belt Comfort There is one guide for each Guides outboard passenger position in the rear seat. Here is how to install Rear shoulder belt comfort guides a comfort guide to the safety belt: may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the shoulder belt away from the neck and head.

2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of the seatback and the interior body to remove the guide from its storage clip. 1-24 Seats and Restraint System

{ CAUTION

A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. 3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted 4. Buckle, position, and release and it lies ﬂat. The elastic cord the safety belt as described must be under the belt and the previously in this section. Make guide on top. sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder. To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the belt edges together so that the safety belt can be removed from the guide. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn the guide and clip inward and slide them in between the seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop of the elastic cord exposed. Seats and Restraint System 1-25

Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is to Child Restraints protect the mother. When a safety Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a Older Children including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for occupants, they are more likely to be anyone, the key to making safety seriously injured if they do not wear belts effective is wearing them safety belts. properly. Safety Belt Extender If the safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it. But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long Older children who have outgrown enough for you. To help avoid booster seats should wear the personal injury, do not let someone vehicle’s safety belts. else use it, and use it only for the A pregnant woman should wear a seat it is made to ﬁt. The extender lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion has been designed for adults. should be worn as low as possible, Never use it for securing child seats. below the rounding, throughout To wear it, attach it to the regular the pregnancy. safety belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender. 1-26 Seats and Restraint System

The manufacturer’s instructions that • Does the lap belt fit low and snug Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort come with the booster seat, state the on the hips, touching the thighs? Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt weight and height limitations for that If yes, continue. If no, return to the on page 1-20. booster. Use a booster seat with a booster seat. According to accident statistics, lap-shoulder belt until the child • Can proper safety belt fit be children and infants are safer when passes the below fit test: maintained for the length of the properly restrained in a child • Sit all the way back on the seat. trip? If yes, continue. If no, return restraint system or infant restraint Do the knees bend at the seat to the booster seat. system secured in a rear seating edge? If yes, continue. If no, position. return to the booster seat. Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts? In a crash, children who are not • Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. buckled up can strike other people Does the shoulder belt rest on the A: An older child should wear a who are buckled up, or can be shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, lap-shoulder belt and get the thrown out of the vehicle. Older try using the rear safety belt additional restraint a shoulder belt children need to use safety belts comfort guide. See “Rear Safety can provide. The shoulder belt properly. Belt Comfort Guides” under should not cross the face or neck. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-20 The lap belt should fit snugly for more information. If the below the hips, just touching the shoulder belt still does not rest on top of the thighs. This applies belt the shoulder, then return to the force to the child’s pelvic bones in booster seat. a crash. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash. Seats and Restraint System 1-27

{ CAUTION { CAUTION CAUTION (Continued)

Never do this. Never do this. The belt force would then be Never allow two children to wear Never allow a child to wear the applied right on the abdomen. the same safety belt. The safety safety belt with the shoulder belt That could cause serious or fatal belt can not properly spread the behind their back. A child can be injuries. The shoulder belt should impact forces. In a crash, the two seriously injured by not wearing go over the shoulder and across children can be crushed together the lap-shoulder belt properly. the chest. and seriously injured. A safety In a crash, the child would not be belt must be used by only one restrained by the shoulder belt. person at a time. The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. The child might also slide under the lap belt. (Continued) 1-28 Seats and Restraint System

Infants and Young Children who are not restrained { CAUTION properly can strike other people, or Children can be thrown out of the vehicle. Everyone in a vehicle needs Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is protection! This includes infants { CAUTION and all other children. Neither the wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to distance traveled nor the age and Never do this. size of the traveler changes the tighten. Never leave children need, for everyone, to use safety unattended in a vehicle and never Never hold an infant or a child restraints. In fact, the law in every allow children to play with the while riding in a vehicle. Due to state in the United States and in safety belts. crash forces, an infant or a child every Canadian province says will become so heavy it is not children up to some age must be Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer possible to hold it during a crash. restrained while in a vehicle. protection for adults and older For example, in a crash at only children, but not for young children 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) and infants. Neither the vehicle’s infant will suddenly become a safety belt system nor its airbag 240 lb (110 kg) force on a system is designed for them. person’s arms. An infant should Every time infants and young be secured in an appropriate children ride in vehicles, they should restraint. have the protection provided by appropriate child restraints. Seats and Restraint System 1-29

{ CAUTION

Never do this. Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inﬂates can be seriously injured or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. 1-30 Seats and Restraint System

Q: What are the different types of The restraint manufacturer’s add-on child restraints? instructions that come with the { CAUTION A: Add-on child restraints, which restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular A young child’s hip bones are still are purchased by the vehicle’s so small that the vehicle’s regular owner, are available in four basic child restraint. In addition, there are many kinds of restraints safety belt may not remain low on types. Selection of a particular the hip bones, as it should. restraint should take into available for children with special needs. Instead, it may settle up around consideration not only the child’s the child’s abdomen. In a crash, weight, height, and age but also the belt would apply force on a whether or not the restraint will be { CAUTION body area that is unprotected by compatible with the motor vehicle any bony structure. This alone in which it will be used. To reduce the risk of neck and could cause serious or fatal head injury during a crash, infants injuries. To reduce the risk of For most basic types of child need complete support. This is restraints, there are many serious or fatal injuries during a because an infant’s neck is not crash, young children should different models available. fully developed and its head When purchasing a child always be secured in appropriate weighs so much compared with child restraints. restraint, be sure it is designed the rest of its body. In a crash, an to be used in a motor vehicle. infant in a rear-facing child If it is, the restraint will have a restraint settles into the restraint, label saying that it meets federal so the crash forces can be motor vehicle safety standards. distributed across the strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants should always be secured in rear-facing child restraints. Seats and Restraint System 1-31

Child Restraint Systems

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats (A) Rear-Facing Infant Seat A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child provides restraint for the child’s body restraint designed to improve the ﬁt A rear-facing infant seat (A) provides with the harness. of the vehicle’s safety belt system. restraint with the seating surface A booster seat can also help a child against the back of the infant. to see out the window. The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint. 1-32 Seats and Restraint System

Securing an Add-On Child A child can be endangered in a crash Securing the Child Within the Restraint in the Vehicle if the child restraint is not properly Child Restraint secured in the vehicle. { CAUTION When securing an add-on child { CAUTION restraint, refer to the instructions that A child can be seriously injured or come with the restraint which may be A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint on the restraint itself or in a booklet, killed in a crash if the child is not is not properly secured in the or both, and to this manual. The child properly secured in the child vehicle. Secure the child restraint restraint instructions are important, restraint. Secure the child properly properly in the vehicle using the so if they are not available, obtain following the instructions that vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH a replacement copy from the came with that child restraint. system, following the instructions manufacturer. that came with that child restraint Keep in mind that an unsecured and the instructions in this manual. child restraint can move around in a Where to Put the collision or sudden stop and injure Restraint To help reduce the chance of injury, people in the vehicle. Be sure to According to accident statistics, the child restraint must be secured in properly secure any child restraint in children and infants are safer when the vehicle. Child restraint systems the vehicle — even when no child properly restrained in a child restraint must be secured in vehicle seats by is in it. system or infant restraint system lap belts or the lap belt portion of a secured in a rear seating position. lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchors and We recommend that children and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on child restraints be secured in a rear page 1-34 for more information. seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child Seats and Restraint System 1-33 seat; an older child riding in a booster When securing a child restraint in a seat; and children, who are large CAUTION (Continued) rear seating position, study the enough, using safety belts. instructions that came with the Even if the passenger sensing child restraint to make sure A label on the sun visor says, “Never system has turned off the right it is compatible with this vehicle. put a rear-facing child restraint in the front.” This is because the risk to the front passenger frontal airbag, no Wherever a child restraint is rear-facing child is so great, if the system is fail-safe. No one can installed, be sure to secure the airbag deploys. guarantee that an airbag will not child restraint properly. deploy under some unusual { circumstance, even though it is Keep in mind that an unsecured CAUTION turned off. child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints people in the vehicle. Be sure to restraint can be seriously injured or in a rear seat, even if the properly secure any child restraint in killed if the right front passenger airbag is off. If you secure a the vehicle — even when no child airbag inflates. This is because forward-facing child restraint in is in it. the back of the rear-facing child the right front seat, always move restraint would be very close to the front passenger seat as far the inflating airbag. A child in a back as it will go. It is better to forward-facing child restraint can secure the child restraint in a be seriously injured or killed if the rear seat. right front passenger airbag See Passenger Sensing System inflates and the passenger seat on page 1-54 for additional is in a forward position. information. (Continued) 1-34 Seats and Restraint System

Lower Anchors and In order to use the LATCH system in Top Tether Anchor Tethers for Children the vehicle, you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments. (LATCH) The child restraint manufacturer will The LATCH system holds a child provide you with instructions on how restraint during driving or in a crash. to use the child restraint and its This system is designed to make attachments. The following explains installation of a child restraint easier. how to attach a child restraint with The LATCH system uses anchors in these attachments in the vehicle. the vehicle and attachments on the Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraint that are made for use child restraints have lower anchors with the LATCH system. A top tether (A, C) anchors the and attachments or top tether top of the child restraint to the Make sure that a LATCH-compatible anchors and attachments. vehicle. A top tether anchor is built child restraint is properly installed Lower Anchors into the vehicle. The top tether using the anchors, or use the attachment (B) on the child restraint vehicle’s safety belts to secure the connects to the top tether anchor in restraint, following the instructions the vehicle in order to reduce the that came with that restraint, and forward movement and rotation of also the instructions in this manual. the child restraint during driving or When installing a child restraint with in a crash. a top tether, you must also use either the lower anchors or the safety belts The child restraint may have a to properly secure the child restraint. Lower anchors (A) are metal bars single tether (A) or a dual A child restraint must never be built into the vehicle. There are tether (C). Either will have a installed using only the top tether two lower anchors for each single attachment (B) to secure and anchor. LATCH seating position that will the top tether to the anchor. accommodate a child restraint with lower attachments (B). Seats and Restraint System 1-35

Some child restraints that have a top Lower Anchor and Top Tether Each outboard seating position in tether are designed for use with or Anchor Locations the rear seat has exposed metal without the top tether being attached. lower anchors in the crease between Others require the top tether always the seatback and the seat cushion. to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the child restraint. If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can be obtained, For H3T models, the top tether in kit form, for many child restraints. anchor symbol is located near the Ask the child restraint manufacturer top tether anchors to assist you in locating the top tether anchors. whether or not a kit is available. Rear Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors. j (Lower Anchor): Seating positions with two lower anchors. 1-36 Seats and Restraint System

According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-32 for additional information. Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System

{ CAUTION

H3T H3 If a LATCH-type child restraint is For H3T models, the top tether For H3 models, the top tether not attached to anchors, the child anchors are located on the back anchors are located on the back of restraint will not be able to protect panel behind each rear seating the rear seatbacks. Be sure to use the child correctly. In a crash, the position. Be sure to use an anchor an anchor located on the same side child could be seriously injured or located on the same side of the of the vehicle as the seating position killed. Install a LATCH-type child vehicle as the seating position where where the child restraint will be restraint properly using the the child restraint will be placed. placed. anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if restraint, following the instructions a national or local law requires that that came with the child restraint the top tether be attached, or if the and the instructions in this manual. instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached. Seats and Restraint System 1-37

the top tether to the top tether { CAUTION CAUTION (Continued) anchor (A), if equipped. Refer to the child restraint instructions and Do not attach more than one child belts behind the child restraint so the following steps: restraint to a single anchor. children cannot reach them. Pull Attaching more than one child the shoulder belt all the way out restraint to a single anchor could of the retractor to set the lock, if cause the anchor or attachment to your vehicle has one, after the come loose or even break during child restraint has been installed. a crash. A child or others could be injured. To reduce the risk of Notice: Do not let the LATCH serious or fatal injuries during a attachments rub against the crash, attach only one child vehicle’s safety belts. This may restraint per anchor. damage these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety belts to avoid { rubbing the LATCH attachments. CAUTION Do not fold the empty rear seat 1.1. Put the child restraint on with a safety belt buckled. This the seat. Children can be seriously injured could damage the safety belt or or strangled if a shoulder belt is the seat. Unbuckle and return the 1.2. Pull the seatback forward wrapped around their neck and safety belt to its stowed position, to access the top tether the safety belt continues to before folding the seat. anchors (A). See 60/40 Split tighten. Buckle any unused safety Bench Seat (H3) on page 1-7 H3T Models or 60/40 Split Bench (Continued) 1. If the child restraint manufacturer Seat (H3T) on page 1-9 recommends that the top tether for additional information. be attached, attach and tighten 1-38 Seats and Restraint System

1.3. Route the top tether according to the child restraint instructions and the following instructions:

If the position you are using If the position you are using does not have a headrest or has a ﬁxed headrest or head restraint and you are head restraint and you are using a dual tether, route the using a single tether, tether over the seatback. route the tether over the If the position you are using headrest or head restraint. does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether, route the tether over the seatback. Seats and Restraint System 1-39

2. Attach and tighten the lower 4. Push and pull the child restraint attachments to the lower in different directions to be sure anchors. If the child restraint it is secure. When removing does not have lower attachments the child restraint, reinsert or the desired seating position the headrest if it has been does not have lower anchors, removed from the seatback. secure the child restraint with the top tether and the safety belts. H3 Models Refer to the child restraint 1. Attach and tighten the lower manufacturer instructions and the attachments to the lower instructions in this manual. anchors. If the child restraint If the position you are using 2.1. Find the lower anchors for does not have lower attachments has a ﬁxed headrest or the desired seating position. or the desired seating position head restraint and you are does not have lower anchors, using a dual tether, 2.2. Attach and tighten the secure the child restraint with route the tether around the lower attachments on the top tether and the safety headrest or head restraint. the child restraint to the belts. Refer to the child restraint lower anchors. 1.4. Attach the top tether to the manufacturer instructions and anchor (A). Make sure that 3. Tighten the top tether. If the the instructions in this manual. you secure the top tether to headrest interferes with the 1.1. Find the lower anchors the top tether anchor and not installation of the child restraint, for the desired seating to the seatback latch (B). remove the headrest by position. pressing the button on the 1.5. Push rearward on the headrest post, at the top of the 1.2. Put the child restraint on seatback until it locks seatback and lift to remove. Store the seat. into its upright position. the headrest under the outboard 1.3. Attach and tighten the Push and pull on the side of the rear seat. lower attachments on seatback to make sure it is the child restraint to the secured properly. lower anchors. 1-40 Seats and Restraint System

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped. Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps: 2.1. Find the top tether anchor. 2.2. Route, attach and tighten the If the position you are using top tether according to the does not have a headrest or child restraint instructions head restraint and you are and the following using a dual tether, route the instructions: tether over the seatback. If the position you are using has a ﬁxed headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether, route the tether around the headrest or head restraint. 3. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. If the position you are using If the position you are using has a ﬁxed headrest or does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are head restraint and you are using a single tether, using a single tether, route route the tether over the the tether over the seatback. headrest or head restraint. Seats and Restraint System 1-41

Securing a Child Do not secure a child seat in a If more than one child restraint Restraint in a Rear position without a top tether anchor needs to be installed in the if a national or local law requires rear seat, be sure to read Where to Outside Seat Position that the top tether be anchored, or if Put the Restraint on page 1-32. When securing a child restraint the instructions that come with 1. Put the child restraint on the seat. in a rear seating position, study the the child restraint say that the top instructions that came with the strap must be anchored. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions child restraint to make sure In Canada, the law requires that it is compatible with this vehicle. of the vehicle’s safety belt forward-facing child restraints have through or around the restraint. If the child restraint has the LATCH a top tether, and that the tether The child restraint instructions system, see Lower Anchors and be attached. will show you how. Tethers for Children (LATCH) on If the child restraint does not have page 1-34 for how and where to the LATCH system, you will be using install the child restraint using the safety belt to secure the child LATCH. If a child restraint is secured restraint in this position. Be sure to in the vehicle using a safety belt and follow the instructions that came it uses a top tether, see Lower with the child restraint. Secure the Anchors and Tethers for Children child in the child restraint when (LATCH) on page 1-34 for top tether and as the instructions say. anchor locations.

3. For H3T models, tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed. 1-42 Seats and Restraint System

4. Push the latch plate into the 5. For H3 models, pull the rest of the 6. To tighten the belt, push down on buckle until it clicks. shoulder belt all the way out of the the child restraint, pull the Position the release button on retractor to set the lock. shoulder portion of the belt to the buckle so that the safety belt tighten the lap portion of the belt could be quickly unbuckled if and feed the shoulder belt back necessary. into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. Seats and Restraint System 1-43

7. If the child restraint has a top Securing a Child Securing a Child tether, follow the child restraint Restraint in the Center Restraint in the Right manufacturer’s instructions regarding the use of the top Rear Seat Position Front Seat Position tether. See Lower Anchors and Many child restraints are too wide to The vehicle has airbags. A rear Tethers for Children (LATCH) on be correctly secured in the center seat is a safer place to secure page 1-34 for more information. rear seat, although some of a forward-facing child restraint. For H3T models, if the headrest them will ﬁt there. If the center seat See Where to Put the Restraint interferes with the installation of position is too narrow for the on page 1-32. the child restraint, remove the child restraint, secure it in a rear In addition, the vehicle has a headrest by pressing the button outside seat position. on the headrest post, at the top of passenger sensing system which is the seatback and lift to remove. If a child restraint is secured in the designed to turn off the right Store the headrest under the center seat position, follow the front passenger frontal airbag under outboard side of the rear seat. instructions in Securing a Child certain conditions. See Passenger Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Sensing System on page 1-54 8. Push and pull the child restraint Position on page 1-41. and Passenger Airbag Status in different directions to be sure Indicator on page 3-26 for more it is secure. information, including important To remove the child restraint, safety information. unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it. If the headrest has been removed, reinsert in onto the seatback. 1-44 Seats and Restraint System

A label on the sun visor says, If the child restraint has the LATCH “Never put a rear-facing child seat CAUTION (Continued) system, see Lower Anchors and in the front.” This is because the risk Tethers for Children (LATCH) on to the rear-facing child is so great, Even if the passenger sensing page 1-34 for how and where to if the airbag deploys. system has turned off the right install the child restraint using front passenger frontal airbag, no LATCH. If a child restraint is secured { CAUTION system is fail-safe. No one can using a safety belt and it uses a top guarantee that an airbag will not tether, see Lower Anchors and A child in a rear-facing child deploy under some unusual Tethers for Children (LATCH) on restraint can be seriously injured or circumstance, even though it is page 1-34 for top tether anchor locations. killed if the right front passenger turned off. airbag inflates. This is because Secure rear-facing child restraints Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor the back of the rear-facing child in a rear seat, even if the airbag is if a national or local law requires restraint would be very close to off. If you secure a forward-facing that the top tether be anchored, or if the inflating airbag. A child in a child restraint in the right front seat, the instructions that come with forward-facing child restraint can always move the front passenger be seriously injured or killed if the the child restraint say that the top seat as far back as it will go. It is strap must be anchored. right front passenger airbag better to secure the child restraint inflates and the passenger seat is in a rear seat. In Canada, the law requires that in a forward position. forward-facing child restraints have See Passenger Sensing System a top tether, and that the tether (Continued) on page 1-54 for additional be attached. information. Seats and Restraint System 1-45

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. 1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward-facing child restraint. When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when 4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt the vehicle is started. See buckle until it clicks. all the way out of the retractor to Passenger Airbag Status Position the release button on set the lock. Indicator on page 3-26. the buckle so that the safety belt 2. Put the child restraint on could be quickly unbuckled if the seat. necessary. 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. 1-46 Seats and Restraint System

If the airbag is off, the off indicator Airbag System in the passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay on The vehicle has the following when the vehicle is started. airbags: If a child restraint has been installed • A frontal airbag for the driver. and the on indicator is lit, see • A frontal airbag for the right front “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child passenger. Restraint ” under Passenger Sensing System on page 1-54 for more • A roof-rail airbag for the driver information. and the passenger seated directly behind the driver. To remove the child restraint, • A roof-rail airbag for the right unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and front passenger and the 6. To tighten the belt, push down on let it return to the stowed position. the child restraint, pull the passenger seated directly behind shoulder portion of the belt to the right front passenger. tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. Seats and Restraint System 1-47

The vehicle may have the following With seat-mounted side impact Here are the most important things airbags: airbags, the word AIRBAG to know about the airbag system: • A seat-mounted side impact will appear on the side of the airbag for the driver. seatback closest to the door. { CAUTION • A seat-mounted side impact With roof-rail airbags, the word airbag for the right front AIRBAG will appear along the You can be severely injured or passenger. headliner or trim. killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt — even if Airbags are designed to supplement All of the airbags in the vehicle will you have airbags. Airbags are have the word AIRBAG embossed in the protection provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags designed to work with safety the trim or on an attached label near belts, but do not replace them. the deployment opening. are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an Also, airbags are not designed to For frontal airbags, the word inflating bag, all airbags must deploy in every crash. In some AIRBAG will appear on the middle inflate very quickly to do their job. crashes safety belts are your only part of the steering wheel for restraint. See When Should an the driver and on the instrument Airbag Inflate? on page 1-50. panel for the right front passenger. Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety belts. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that person. 1-48 Seats and Restraint System

{ CAUTION { CAUTION

Airbags inflate with great force, Children who are up against, or faster than the blink of an eye. very close to, any airbag when it Anyone who is up against, or very inflates can be seriously injured or There is an airbag readiness light close to, any airbag when it killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder on the instrument panel cluster, inflates can be seriously injured or belts offer protection for adults which shows the airbag symbol. killed. Do not sit unnecessarily and older children, but not for The system checks the airbag close to the airbag, as you would young children and infants. electrical system for malfunctions. be if you were sitting on the edge Neither the vehicle’s safety belt The light tells you if there is an of your seat or leaning forward. system nor its airbag system is electrical problem. See Airbag Safety belts help keep you in designed for them. Young children Readiness Light on page 3-25 for position before and during a and infants need the protection more information. crash. Always wear your safety that a child restraint system can belt, even with airbags. The driver provide. Always secure children should sit as far back as possible properly in your vehicle. To read while still maintaining control of how, see Older Children on the vehicle. page 1-25 or Infants and Young Occupants should not lean on or Children on page 1-28. sleep against the door or side windows in seating positions with seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail airbags. Seats and Restraint System 1-49

Where Are the Airbags?

Driver Side shown, Passenger The right front passenger frontal Side similar airbag is in the instrument panel on The driver frontal airbag is in the the passenger’s side. If the vehicle has seat-mounted side middle of the steering wheel. impact airbags for the driver and right front passenger, they are in the side of the seatbacks closest to the door. 1-50 Seats and Restraint System

{ When Should an Airbag CAUTION Inflate? If something is between an Frontal airbags are designed to occupant and an airbag, the inflate in moderate to severe frontal airbag might not inflate properly or or near-frontal crashes to help it might force the object into that reduce the potential for severe person causing severe injury or injuries mainly to the driver’s or right even death. The path of an front passenger’s head and chest. inflating airbag must be kept However, they are only designed to clear. Do not put anything inflate if the impact exceeds a between an occupant and an predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds Driver Side shown, Passenger airbag, and do not attach or put are used to predict how severe a Side similar anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other crash is likely to be in time for the The roof-rail airbags for the driver, airbag covering. airbags to inflate and help restrain right front passenger, and second the occupants. Do not use seat accessories that row outboard passengers are in the Whether the frontal airbags will or ceiling above the side windows. block the inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact airbag. should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. Never secure anything to the roof It depends largely on what you of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags hit, the direction of the impact, by routing a rope or tie down and how quickly your vehicle through any door or window slows down. opening. If you do, the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked. Seats and Restraint System 1-51

Frontal airbags may inflate at In addition, the vehicle has system’s designed threshold level. different crash speeds. For example: dual-stage frontal airbags. The threshold level can vary • If the vehicle hits a stationary Dual-stage airbags adjust the with specific vehicle design. object, the airbags could inflate at restraint according to crash severity. Seat-mounted side impact airbags a different crash speed than if the The vehicle has electronic frontal are not intended to inflate in frontal vehicle hits a moving object. sensors, which help the sensing impacts, near-frontal impacts, system distinguish between a • If the vehicle hits an object that rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-rail moderate frontal impact and a airbags are not intended to inflate in deforms, the airbags could inflate more severe frontal impact. at a different crash speed than if rear impacts. A seat-mounted side For moderate frontal impacts, impact airbag is intended to deploy the vehicle hits an object that dual-stage airbags inflate at a does not deform. on the side of the vehicle that is level less than full deployment. struck. Both roof-rail airbags will • If the vehicle hits a narrow object For more severe frontal impacts, deploy when either side of the (like a pole), the airbags could full deployment occurs. vehicle is struck, or if the sensing inflate at a different crash speed system predicts that the vehicle is than if the vehicle hits a wide The vehicle may or may not have about to roll over, or in a severe object (like a wall). seat-mounted side impact airbags. The vehicle has roof-rail airbags. frontal impact. • If the vehicle goes into an object See Airbag System on page 1-46. In any particular crash, no one at an angle, the airbags could Seat-mounted side impact and can say whether an airbag should inflate at a different crash speed roof-rail airbags are intended have inflated simply because of the than if the vehicle goes straight to inflate in moderate to severe side damage to a vehicle or because into the object. crashes. In addition, these roof-rail of what the repair costs were. Thresholds can also vary with airbags are intended to inflate during For frontal airbags, inflation is specific vehicle design. a rollover or in a severe frontal determined by what the vehicle Frontal airbags are not intended to impact. Seat-mounted side impact hits, the angle of the impact, and inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear and roof-rail airbags will inflate if how quickly the vehicle slows down. impacts, or in many side impacts. the crash severity is above the For seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags, deployment is 1-52 Seats and Restraint System determined by the location and How Does an Airbag full or partial ejection in rollover severity of the side impact. In a events, although no system can rollover event, roof-rail airbag Restrain? prevent all such ejections. deployment is determined by the In moderate to severe frontal or But airbags would not help in many direction of the roll. near frontal collisions, even belted types of collisions, primarily because occupants can contact the steering the occupant’s motion is not toward What Makes an Airbag wheel or the instrument panel. In those airbags. See When Should Inflate? moderate to severe side collisions, an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-50 even belted occupants can contact for more information. In a deployment event, the sensing the inside of the vehicle. system sends an electrical signal Airbags should never be regarded triggering a release of gas from the Airbags supplement the protection as anything more than a supplement inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the provided by safety belts. to safety belts. airbag causing the bag to break out Frontal airbags distribute the force of of the cover and deploy. The inflator, the impact more evenly over the What Will You See After the airbag, and related hardware are occupant’s upper body, stopping the an Airbag Inflates? all part of the airbag module. occupant more gradually. After the frontal airbags and Frontal airbag modules are located Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags distribute the force of seat-mounted side impact airbags inside the steering wheel and inflate, they quickly deflate, so instrument panel. For vehicles with the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body. quickly that some people may not seat-mounted side impact airbags, even realize an airbag inflated. there are airbag modules in the side Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are Roof-rail airbags may still be at least of the front seatbacks closest to designed to help contain the head partially inflated for some time after the door. For vehicles with roof-rail and chest of occupants in the they deploy. Some components of airbags, there are airbag modules outboard seating positions in the the airbag module may be hot for in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the first, second, and third rows. The several minutes. For location of the side windows that have occupant rollover capable roof-rail airbags are airbag modules, see What Makes an seating positions. designed to help reduce the risk of Airbag Inflate? on page 1-52. Seats and Restraint System 1-53

The parts of the airbag that come Additional windshield breakage may into contact with you may be warm, CAUTION (Continued) also occur from the right front but not too hot to touch. There may passenger airbag. but cannot get out of the vehicle be some smoke and dust coming Airbags are designed to inflate after an airbag inflates, then get • from the vents in the deflated only once. After an airbag inflates, fresh air by opening a window or airbags. Airbag inflation does not you will need some new parts for a door. If you experience prevent the driver from seeing out of the airbag system. If you do not the windshield or being able to steer breathing problems following an get them, the airbag system will the vehicle, nor does it prevent airbag deployment, you should not be there to help protect you people from leaving the vehicle. seek medical attention. in another crash. A new system will include airbag modules and { CAUTION The vehicle has a feature that may possibly other parts. The service automatically unlock the doors, manual for your vehicle covers When an airbag inflates, there may turn the interior lamps on, and turn the need to replace other parts. the hazard warning flashers on be dust in the air. This dust could • The vehicle has a crash sensing when the airbags inflate. You can cause breathing problems for and diagnostic module which lock the doors, turn the interior people with a history of asthma or records information after a crash. lamps off, and turn the hazard other breathing trouble. To avoid See Vehicle Data Recording and warning flashers off by using the this, everyone in the vehicle should Privacy on page 7-16 and Event controls for those features. get out as soon as it is safe to do Data Recorders on page 7-16. so. If you have breathing problems In many crashes severe enough to • Let only qualified technicians work inflate the airbag, windshields are (Continued) on the airbag systems. Improper broken by vehicle deformation. service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly. See your dealer/retailer for service. 1-54 Seats and Restraint System

Passenger Sensing on or off, will be visible. See We recommend that children be Passenger Airbag Status Indicator secured in a rear seat, including: an System on page 3-26. infant or a child riding in a rear-facing The vehicle has a passenger sensing child restraint; a child riding in a The passenger sensing system will system for the right front passenger forward-facing child seat; an older turn off the right front passenger position. The passenger airbag child riding in a booster seat; and frontal airbag and seat-mounted side status indicator will be visible on the children, who are large enough, impact airbag (if equipped) under instrument panel when the vehicle using safety belts. certain conditions. The driver is started. airbags and the roof-rail airbags are A label on the sun visor says, not affected by the passenger “Never put a rear-facing child seat sensing system. in the front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, The passenger sensing system if the airbag deploys. works with sensors that are part of United States the right front passenger seat and safety belt. The sensors are { CAUTION designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant and A child in a rear-facing child determine if the right front passenger restraint can be seriously injured or frontal airbag and seat-mounted side killed if the right front passenger Canada impact airbag (if equipped) should be airbag inflates. This is because enabled (may inflate) or not. the back of the rear-facing child The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, are visible According to accident statistics, restraint would be very close to during the system check. When the children are safer when properly the inflating airbag. A child in a system check is complete, the secured in a rear seat in the forward-facing child restraint can word ON or OFF, or the symbol for correct child restraint for their (Continued) weight and size. Seats and Restraint System 1-55

The passenger sensing system is When the passenger sensing CAUTION (Continued) designed to turn off the right system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag if: front passenger frontal airbag and be seriously injured or killed if The right front passenger seat is seat-mounted side impact airbag the right front passenger airbag • unoccupied. (if equipped), the off indicator will inﬂates and the passenger seat light and stay lit to remind you is in a forward position. • The system determines that an that the airbag or airbags are off. infant is present in a rear-facing See Passenger Airbag Status Even if the passenger sensing infant seat. system has turned off the right Indicator on page 3-26. front passenger frontal airbag • The system determines that a The passenger sensing system is and seat-mounted side impact small child is present in a designed to turn on (may inﬂate) the airbag (if equipped), no system is child restraint. right front passenger frontal airbag fail-safe. No one can guarantee • The system determines that a and seat-mounted side impact airbag that an airbag will not deploy under small child is present in a (if equipped) anytime the system some unusual circumstance, even booster seat. senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the right front though the airbag(s) are off. • A right front passenger takes passenger seat. Secure rear-facing child his/her weight off of the seat restraints in a rear seat, even for a period of time. When the passenger sensing if the airbag(s) are off. If you • The right front passenger seat is system has allowed the airbag or secure a forward-facing child occupied by a smaller person, airbags to be enabled, the on restraint in the right front seat, such as a child who has indicator will light and stay lit to always move the front passenger outgrown child restraints. remind you that the airbag or airbags are active. seat as far back as it will go. It is • Or, if there is a critical problem better to secure the child restraint with the airbag system or the in a rear seat. passenger sensing system. 1-56 Seats and Restraint System

For some children who have If the On Indicator is Lit for a 5. If, after reinstalling the child outgrown child restraints and for Child Restraint restraint and restarting the very small adults, the passenger vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, sensing system may or may not turn If a child restraint has been installed turn the vehicle off. Then slightly off the right front passenger frontal and the on indicator is lit: recline the vehicle seatback airbag and seat-mounted side 1. Turn the vehicle off. and adjust the seat cushion, if impact airbag (if equipped), 2. Remove the child restraint from adjustable, to make sure that the depending upon the person seating the vehicle. vehicle seatback is not pushing posture and body build. Everyone the child restraint into the in the vehicle who has outgrown 3. Remove any additional items seat cushion. from the seat such as blankets, child restraints should wear a safety Also make sure the child restraint cushions, seat covers, seat belt properly — whether or not is not trapped under the vehicle heaters, or seat massagers. there is an airbag for that person. head restraint. If this happens, 4. Reinstall the child restraint adjust the head restraint. See { CAUTION following the directions provided Head Restraints on page 1-2. by the child restraint manufacturer 6. Restart the vehicle. If the airbag readiness light ever and refer to Securing a Child comes on and stays on, it means Restraint in the Right Front Seat If the on indicator is still lit with a child present in a child restraint, that something may be wrong with Position on page 1-43. secure the child restraint in a rear the airbag system. To help avoid seat position in the vehicle and injury to yourself or others, have check with your dealer/retailer. the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-25 for more information, including important safety information. Seats and Restraint System 1-57

If the Off Indicator is Lit for an system to detect that person and Additional Factors Affecting Adult-Size Occupant enable the right front passenger System Operation frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped): Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat during vehicle 1. Turn the vehicle off. maneuvers and braking, which helps 2. Remove any additional material the passenger sensing system from the seat, such as blankets, maintain the passenger airbag cushions, seat covers, seat status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child heaters, or seat massagers. Restraints” in the Index for additional information about the importance of 3. Place the seatback in the fully proper restraint use. upright position. If the shoulder portion of the belt is 4. Have the person sit upright in pulled out all the way, the child the seat, centered on the seat restraint locking feature will be cushion, with legs comfortably engaged. This may unintentionally If a person of adult-size is sitting in extended. cause the passenger sensing system the right front passenger seat, but 5. Restart the vehicle and have the to turn the airbag(s) off for some the off indicator is lit, it could be person remain in this position for adult size occupants. If this happens, because that person is not sitting two to three minutes after the just let the belt go back all the way properly in the seat. If this happens, on indicator is lit. and start again. use the following steps to allow the 1-58 Seats and Restraint System

A thick layer of additional material, Servicing Your such as a blanket or cushion, or CAUTION (Continued) aftermarket equipment such as seat Airbag-Equipped Vehicle covers, seat heaters, and seat Airbags affect how the vehicle Avoid yellow connectors. They are massagers can affect how well should be serviced. There are parts probably part of the airbag the passenger sensing system of the airbag system in several system. Be sure to follow proper operates. We recommend that you places around the vehicle. Your service procedures, and make not use seat covers or other dealer/retailer and the service sure the person performing work aftermarket equipment except when manual have information about for you is qualified to do so. approved by GM for your specific servicing the vehicle and the airbag vehicle. See Adding Equipment system. To purchase a service to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on manual, see Service Publications Adding Equipment to page 1-58 for more information Ordering Information on page 7-15. Your Airbag-Equipped about modifications that can affect Vehicle how the system operates. { CAUTION Q: Is there anything I might add to { CAUTION For up to 10 seconds after the or change about the vehicle ignition is turned off and the battery that could keep the airbags Stowing of articles under the is disconnected, an airbag can still from working properly? passenger seat or between the inflate during improper service. A: Yes. If you add things that passenger seat cushion and You can be injured if you are close change the vehicle’s frame, seatback may interfere with the to an airbag when it inflates. bumper system, height, front end proper operation of the passenger or side sheet metal, they may (Continued) sensing system. keep the airbag system from working properly. Changing or moving any parts of the front Seats and Restraint System 1-59 seats, safety belts, the airbag seat fabric, could also interfere Q: Because I have a disability, sensing and diagnostic module, with the operation of the I have to get my vehicle steering wheel, instrument panel, passenger sensing system. modified. How can I find out roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling This could either prevent proper whether this will affect my headliner or pillar garnish trim, deployment of the passenger airbag system? overhead console, front sensors, airbag(s) or prevent the A: If you have questions, call side impact sensors, rollover passenger sensing system from Customer Assistance. The phone sensor module, or airbag wiring properly turning off the passenger numbers and addresses for can affect the operation of the airbag(s). See Passenger Customer Assistance are in airbag system. Sensing System on page 1-54. Step Two of the Customer In addition, the vehicle has a If you have any questions, call Satisfaction Procedure in this passenger sensing system for the Customer Assistance. The phone manual. See Customer right front passenger position, numbers and addresses for Satisfaction Procedure on which includes sensors that are Customer Assistance are in page 7-1. part of the passenger seat. Step Two of the Customer In addition, your dealer/retailer and The passenger sensing system Satisfaction Procedure in this the service manual have information may not operate properly if the manual. See Customer about the location of the airbag original seat trim is replaced with Satisfaction Procedure on sensors, sensing and diagnostic non-GM covers, upholstery or page 7-1. module and airbag wiring. trim, or with GM covers, If the vehicle has rollover upholstery or trim designed for a roof-rail airbags, see Different different vehicle. Any object, such Size Tires and Wheels on as an aftermarket seat heater or a page 5-61 for additional comfort enhancing pad or device, important information. installed under or on top of the 1-60 Seats and Restraint System

Restraint System Keep safety belts clean and dry. Replacing Restraint See Care of Safety Belts on System Parts After a Check page 5-85. Crash Checking the Restraint Airbags Systems The airbag system does not need { CAUTION regularly scheduled maintenance Safety Belts or replacement. Make sure the A crash can damage the Now and then, check the safety airbag readiness light is working. restraint systems in your vehicle. belt reminder light, safety belts, See Airbag Readiness Light A damaged restraint system may buckles, latch plates, retractors, and on page 3-25 for more information. not properly protect the person using it, resulting in serious injury anchorages are all working properly. Notice: If an airbag covering or even death in a crash. To help is damaged, opened, or broken, Look for any other loose or damaged make sure your restraint systems safety belt system parts that might the airbag may not work properly. Do not open or break the airbag are working properly after a crash, keep a safety belt system from doing have them inspected and any its job. See your dealer/retailer to coverings. If there are any opened necessary replacements made have it repaired. Torn or frayed or broken airbag covers, have as soon as possible. safety belts may not protect you in a the airbag covering and/or airbag crash. They can rip apart under module replaced. For the impact forces. If a belt is torn or location of the airbag modules, frayed, get a new one right away. see What Makes an Airbag Inﬂate? on page 1-52. See your Make sure the safety belt reminder dealer/retailer for service. light is working. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-24 for more information. Seats and Restraint System 1-61

If the vehicle has been in a crash, do New parts and repairs may be you need new safety belts or LATCH necessary even if the safety belt or system (if equipped) parts? LATCH system (if equipped), was not being used at the time of the crash. After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary. But the safety If an airbag inﬂates, you will need belt assemblies that were used to replace airbag system parts. during any crash may have been See the part on the airbag system stressed or damaged. See your earlier in this section. dealer/retailer to have the safety belt Have the safety belt pretensioners assemblies inspected or replaced. checked if the vehicle has been in a If the vehicle has the LATCH system crash, if the airbag readiness light and it was being used during a stays on after the vehicle is started, crash, you may need new LATCH or while you are driving. See Airbag system parts. Readiness Light on page 3-25. 1-62 Seats and Restraint System

✍ NOTES Features and Controls 2-1

Features and Theft-Deterrent Systems Shifting Out of Park Theft-Deterrent Systems ....2-11 (Automatic Controls Content Theft-Deterrent .....2-11 Transmission) ...... 2-30 Passlock® (U.S. Only) ...... 2-12 Parking the Vehicle PASS-Key® III+ Electronic (Manual Transmission) ....2-31 Immobilizer ...... 2-13 Parking Over Things PASS-Key® III+ Electronic That Burn ...... 2-31 Keys Engine Exhaust ...... 2-31 Keys ...... 2-2 Immobilizer Operation (Canada Only) ...... 2-14 Running the Vehicle Remote Keyless Entry While Parked ...... 2-32 (RKE) System ...... 2-3 Starting and Operating Remote Keyless Entry Mirrors (RKE) System Operation ...2-4 Your Vehicle Automatic Dimming New Vehicle Break-In ...... 2-15 Rearview Mirror ...... 2-33 Doors and Locks Ignition Positions ...... 2-16 Compass ...... 2-34 Door Locks ...... 2-5 Retained Accessory Outside Power Mirrors ...... 2-35 Power Door Locks ...... 2-6 Power (RAP) ...... 2-17 Outside Convex Mirror ...... 2-35 Programmable Automatic Starting the Engine ...... 2-17 Door Locks ...... 2-6 Engine Coolant Heater ...... 2-19 Object Detection Rear Door Security Locks ....2-6 Automatic Transmission Systems Lockout Protection ...... 2-7 Operation ...... 2-19 Rear Vision Tailgate ...... 2-7 Manual Transmission Camera (RVC) ...... 2-36 Swing-gate ...... 2-9 Operation ...... 2-22 Full-Time Four-Wheel OnStar® System Windows Drive ...... 2-24 OnStar® System ...... 2-39 Windows ...... 2-9 Parking Brake ...... 2-28 Power Windows ...... 2-10 Shifting Into Park Sun Visors ...... 2-11 (Automatic Transmission) ...... 2-29 2-2 Features and Controls

Universal Home Remote Keys System Universal Home Remote { CAUTION System ...... 2-42 Universal Home Remote Leaving children in a vehicle with System Operation ...... 2-43 the ignition key is dangerous for Storage Areas many reasons, children or others Glove Box ...... 2-47 could be badly injured or even Cupholders ...... 2-47 killed. They could operate the Front Seat Storage Net .....2-47 power windows or other controls Center Console Storage ....2-47 or even make the vehicle move. Luggage Carrier ...... 2-48 The windows will function with the Rear Storage Area ...... 2-49 keys in the ignition and children The key is used for the ignition and Convenience Net ...... 2-49 could be seriously injured or killed driver’s door lock. Cargo Cover (H3) ...... 2-49 if caught in the path of a closing The vehicle has two identical keys Cargo Tie Downs ...... 2-49 window. Do not leave the keys in and a key code number. Cargo Management a vehicle with children. System (H3T) ...... 2-49 Give the key code to your dealer/retailer or qualiﬁed locksmith Sunroof if a new key needs to be made. Sunroof ...... 2-50 Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle to get in. Be sure you have spare keys. In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance. See Roadside Service on page 7-6. Features and Controls 2-3

Remote Keyless Entry This device complies with RSS-210 If there is a decrease in the RKE (RKE) System of Industry Canada. Operation operating range, try this: is subject to the following • Check the distance. The The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) two conditions: transmitter may be too far from system operates on a radio 1. This device may not cause the vehicle. Stand closer frequency subject to Federal interference. during rainy or snowy weather. Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. 2. This device must accept any • Check the location. Other interference received, including vehicles or objects may be This device complies with Part 15 interference that may cause blocking the signal. Take a of the FCC Rules. Operation undesired operation of the few steps to the left or right, is subject to the following device. hold the transmitter higher, and two conditions: try again. Changes or modiﬁcations to this 1. This device may not cause system by other than an authorized • Check the transmitter’s battery. interference. service facility could void See “Battery Replacement” 2. This device must accept any authorization to use this equipment. later in this section. interference received, including • If the transmitter is still not interference that may cause working correctly, see your undesired operation of the dealer/retailer or a qualiﬁed device. technician for service. 2-4 Features and Controls

Remote Keyless Entry Pressing LOCK may arm the content Programming Transmitters to theft-deterrent system. See Content the Vehicle (RKE) System Operation Theft-Deterrent on page 2-11 for Only RKE transmitters The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) additional information. programmed to this vehicle will transmitter functions work up to UNLOCK: Press to unlock only the work. If a transmitter is lost 30 feet (9 m) away from the vehicle. driver’s door. The interior lamps or stolen, a replacement can be There are other conditions which come on, the parking lamps may purchased and programmed can affect the performance of flash, and the horn may sound. through your dealer/retailer. the transmitter. See Remote Keyless When the replacement transmitter Entry (RKE) System on page 2-3. Press UNLOCK again within three seconds to unlock all the doors. is programmed to this vehicle, all remaining transmitters must also Pressing UNLOCK may disarm be reprogrammed. Any lost or the content theft-deterrent system. stolen transmitters will no longer See Content Theft-Deterrent on work once the new transmitter page 2-11 for additional information. is programmed. Each vehicle can Different feedback choices can be have up to four transmitters programmed through the Driver programmed to it. Information Center (DIC). See “Remote Keyless Entry Feedback” Battery Replacement under DIC Operation and Displays The battery in the transmitter is on page 3-34. weak and should be changed if it does not work at the normal range LOCK: Press to lock all the doors. L (Panic): Press to activate the The parking lamps may flash in any location. alarm. The horn sounds and the and the horn may chirp. headlamps and taillamps flash for up If a door is open or ajar when LOCK to 30 seconds. To turn the alarm off is pressed, the doors lock, but the press Lagain, start the vehicle or theft-deterrent system does not wait 30 seconds. arm until the open door is closed. Features and Controls 2-5

Notice: When replacing the Doors and Locks battery, do not touch any of the CAUTION (Continued) circuitry on the transmitter. Static from your body could damage Door Locks • Young children who get into the transmitter. unlocked vehicles may be { unable to get out. A child can To replace the battery: CAUTION be overcome by extreme heat Unlocked doors can be dangerous. and can suffer permanent • Passengers, especially injuries or even death from children, can easily open the heat stroke. Always lock your doors and fall out of a moving vehicle whenever you leave it. vehicle. When a door is • Outsiders can easily enter locked, the handle will not through an unlocked door open it. You increase the when you slow down or stop 1. Separate the transmitter with a chance of being thrown out of your vehicle. Locking your ﬂat, thin object inserted into the the vehicle in a crash if the doors can help prevent this notch on the side. doors are not locked. So, wear from happening. safety belts properly and lock 2. Remove the old battery. Do not the doors whenever you drive. use a metal object. There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle. 3. Insert the new battery. Replace (Continued) with a CR2032 or equivalent From the outside, use the key in the battery. driver’s door or use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. 4. Snap the transmitter back together. 2-6 Features and Controls

Press L (lock) to lock all the doors Rear Door Security Locks at once. To unlock all the doors, press U (Unlock). Each rear door can be locked so it cannot be opened from the inside. Programmable Automatic Door Locks With an automatic transmission, the vehicle is pre-programmed to automatically lock the doors when From the inside, use the manual lock shifted out of P (Park). All doors levers or power door lock switch. unlock when the vehicle is shifted back into P (Park). Power Door Locks With a manual transmission, the vehicle is pre-programmed to automatically lock the doors when The rear door security lock is the vehicle speed reached 15 mph located on the inside edge of (24 km/h). Removing the key each rear door. from the ignition unlocks the doors. To engage a security lock: To program the automatic door 1. Open one of the rear doors. locks, see “Automatic Door Locks” under DIC Operation and Displays 2. Use the ignition key to turn the Driver’s side shown on page 3-34. lock toward the front of the vehicle. The power door lock switches are located on the driver’s and the front 3. Close the door. passenger doors. 4. Repeat these steps on the other rear door. Features and Controls 2-7

To open a rear door when the Tailgate security lock is set, unlock the door and open the door from the outside. { CAUTION To disengage a security lock: 1. Open one of the rear doors. It is extremely dangerous to ride on the tailgate, even when the 2. Use the ignition key to turn the vehicle is operated at low speeds. lock to the vertical position. People riding on the tailgate can 3. Close the door. easily lose their balance and fall 4. Repeat these steps on the other in response to vehicle maneuvers. Open the tailgate by pulling up on rear door. Falling from a moving vehicle may result in serious injuries or death. the outside handle while pulling Lockout Protection Do not allow people to ride on the the tailgate down. tailgate. Be sure everyone in your When putting the tailgate up, This feature protects against locking vehicle is in a seat and using a be sure it latches securely. the key in the vehicle when it is safety belt properly. in the ignition. A chime sounds as an alert to indicate that the key has been left in the ignition. When the power door lock switch is pressed, a door is open, and the key is in the ignition all of the doors lock and then the driver’s door unlocks. 2-8 Features and Controls

Removing the Tailgate 2. Lift up slightly on the entire To partially lower the tailgate: To remove the tailgate: tailgate assembly. 1. With the tailgate fully open, lift up Remove the retaining cables slightly on the entire tailgate from both sides of the pickup box assembly. by pulling the clips away from the bolt heads while pushing the cable bracket forward. When the larger part of the hole on the bracket is over the bolt, slide the bracket off of the bolt. 3. With the tailgate partially down, lift up on the passenger’s side and pull the tailgate toward you, 1. Open the tailgate fully and then move the tailgate to the remove the retainer clip from the right to release the driver’s side. driver’s side hinge. Reverse the procedure to reinstall It is recommended that the the tailgate. Make sure it is secure. Tailgate Partially Down retainer clip be stored in a safe place, like the glove box. 2. Remove the retaining cable from the passenger side of the pickup box by pulling the clip away from the bolt head while pushing the cable bracket forward. When the larger part of the hole on the bracket is over the bolt, slide the bracket off of the bolt. Features and Controls 2-9

3. Slide the lower end ﬁtting onto Windows the front bolt. The tailgate will now stay in the partially opened { position. CAUTION 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the Leaving children, helpless adults, driver side. or pets in a vehicle with the When closing the tailgate the windows closed is dangerous. bracket cannot be in the partially They can be overcome by the opened position. It must be extreme heat and suffer anchored on the rear bolt using permanent injuries or even death the top position on the bracket. from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a pet Swing-gate To open the swing-gate, use the alone in a vehicle, especially with door handle to pull the swing-gate the windows closed in warm or To lock or unlock the swing-gate, hot weather. use the power door lock switch rearward slightly so it opens or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) automatically. transmitter.

{ CAUTION

Make sure the swing-gate is completely closed. Driving with the swing-gate open could injure pedestrians or damage the vehicle. 2-10 Features and Controls

Power Windows Express-Down Window The driver’s window has an { CAUTION express-down feature that lowers the window without holding the Leaving children in a vehicle with switch. Press the front edge of the the keys is dangerous for many switch past the ﬁrst position to reasons, children or others could activate the express-down mode. be badly injured or even killed. To stop the express-down, pull They could operate the power up on the switch. To open the windows or other controls or window partway, press the front of even make the vehicle move. the switch to the ﬁrst position The windows will function and until the window is at the they could be seriously injured or The power window controls are desired level. located on each door. killed if caught in the path of a Window Lockout closing window. Do not leave The driver’s door also has passenger o keys in a vehicle with children. window switches. The ignition must (Window Lockout): The be in ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN, window lockout button is located When there are children in the in front of the window switches. rear seat use the window lockout or in Retained Accessory Power (RAP). See Retained Accessory This feature disables the button to prevent unintentional Power (RAP) on page 2-17. passenger’s window switches operation of the windows. when the button is pressed. Pull up or press down on the front edge of the switch to raise or lower the window. Features and Controls 2-11

Press the button again to turn the Theft-Deterrent If the lock button on the RKE lockout off. A red band on the transmitter is pressed, but a door side of the button is lit when the Systems is open, the doors lock, the lights windows are not locked out. Vehicle theft is big business, may flash and the horn may sound. especially in some cities. This Close the open door to arm the Sun Visors vehicle has theft-deterrent features, system. Pull the visor toward you, or move it however, they do not make it The alarm goes off if a locked to the side to help reduce glare. impossible to steal. door is not opened using the ® Pull out the extenders for further RKE transmitter, or by OnStar . coverage. Content Theft-Deterrent A pre-alarm sounds the horn at reduced intensity for 10 seconds. On a visor with a mirror, lift the This vehicle has a content Then, the front turn signal lamps cover to use it. theft-deterrent alarm system. flash for two minutes, and the horn sounds for two minutes. The alarm then turns off to save battery power. Start the engine to turn off the alarm. The theft-deterrent system does not The security light is located on the activate if the doors are locked with instrument panel cluster. the key, the manual door lock, or To arm the system: power door lock switch. The system can only be activated using the 1. Close all the doors. RKE transmitter, or by OnStar. 2. Lock the doors with the Remote See OnStar¨ System on page 2-39 Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. for additional information. The The security light flashes. vehicle can be started with the correct key if the alarm has been set off. 2-12 Features and Controls

To avoid setting off the alarm by Testing the Alarm Passlock® (U.S. Only) accident: To test the alarm: Passlock® is a passive • Lock the vehicle with the manual 1. From inside the vehicle, lock the theft-deterrent system that enables door lock lever, the power door doors with the RKE transmitter. fuel if the vehicle is started with lock switch, or the key, after a valid key. If an incorrect key the doors are closed. 2. Unlock the door with the manual is used or the ignition lock cylinder door lock and open the door. • Unlock the doors by pressing the is tampered with, the fuel system The pre-alarm should sound unlock button on the RKE is disabled and the vehicle does followed by the full alarm about transmitter or by contacting not start. 10 seconds later. OnStar. Unlocking a door any The security light turns off 3. Press the unlock button on the other way activates the alarm. approximately five seconds after RKE transmitter or start the the engine is started. See Security Press unlock on the RKE engine to turn the alarm off. transmitter, start the vehicle with Light on page 3-33. If the alarm does not sound but the the correct key, or have OnStar If the engine stalls and the security lights flash, check to see if the unlock the doors to turn the alarm light flashes, wait about 10 minutes horn works. The horn fuse could be off. The alarm does not stop if until the light stops flashing blown. To replace the fuse, see a door is unlocked any other way. before trying to restart the engine. Fuses and Circuit Breakers Release the key from START on page 5-91. as soon as the engine starts. If the alarm does not sound or If the engine does not start after the front turn signal lamps do not three tries, the vehicle needs flash, see your dealer/retailer service. for service. Features and Controls 2-13

If the engine is running and the PASS-Key® III+ Electronic This device complies with RSS-210 security light comes on, the engine of Industry Canada. Operation restarts if you turn the engine Immobilizer is subject to the following off. However, the Passlock® system The PASS-Key III+ system two conditions: is not working properly and must operates on a radio frequency 1. This device may not cause be serviced by your dealer/retailer. subject to Federal Communications interference. The vehicle is not protected by Commission (FCC) Rules and Passlock® at this time. See with Industry Canada. 2. This device must accept any your dealer/retailer for service. interference received, including This device complies with Part 15 interference that may cause In an emergency, call the Roadside of the FCC Rules. Operation undesired operation of the Assistance Center. See Roadside is subject to the following device. Service on page 7-6. two conditions: Changes or modiﬁcations to Do not leave the key or device that 1. This device may not cause this system by other than an disarms or deactivates the theft harmful interference. authorized service facility could void deterrent system in the vehicle. 2. This device must accept any authorization to use this equipment. interference received, including PASS-Key III+ uses a radio interference that may cause frequency transponder in the key that undesired operation. matches a decoder in the vehicle. 2-14 Features and Controls

PASS-Key® III+ Electronic When trying to start the vehicle, Canadian Owners: If the keys Immobilizer Operation if the engine does not start and are lost or damaged, only a the security light comes on, dealer/retailer can service the (Canada Only) there may be a problem with the theft-deterrent system to have new This vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system. Turn the ones made. Two current driver’s theft-deterrent system. ignition off and try again. keys are required to program additional keys. The system is automatically armed If the engine still does not start, and when the key is removed from the key appears to be undamaged, To program a new key: the ignition. try another ignition key. Check 1. Verify that the new key has the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit PK3+ stamped on it. The system is automatically Breakers on page 5-91. If the engine disarmed when the key is turned still does not start with the other 2. Insert the current driver’s key in to ON/RUN. key, the vehicle needs service. the ignition and start the engine. If the vehicle does start, the ﬁrst If the engine does not start see You do not have to manually arm or your dealer/retailer for service. disarm the system. key may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service the 3. After the engine has started, The security light comes on if there theft-deterrent system and have turn the key to LOCK/OFF, is a problem with arming or a new key made. and remove the key. disarming the theft-deterrent system. It is possible for the theft-deterrent 4. Insert the second current driver’s The key uses a transponder that system decoder to learn the key in the ignition and start the matches an immobilizer control unit transponder value of a new or engine within ten seconds of in the vehicle. Only the correct replacement key. Up to 10 keys can removing the previous key. If the key starts the vehicle. If the key is be programmed for the vehicle. engine does not start see your ever damaged, the vehicle may The following procedure is for dealer/retailer for service. not start. programming additional keys only. Features and Controls 2-15

5. After the engine has started, turn Starting and • Avoid making hard stops for the key to LOCK/OFF, and the first 200 miles (322 km) remove the key. Insert the key to Operating Your or so. During this time the be programmed and turn it to Vehicle new brake linings are not yet ON/RUN within ten seconds of broken in. Hard stops with new removing the previous key. New Vehicle Break-In linings can mean premature The security light turns off once wear and earlier replacement. the key has been programmed. Notice: The vehicle does Follow this breaking-in not need an elaborate break-in. guideline every time you get 6. Repeat the Steps 1 through 5 But it will perform better in new brake linings. if additional keys are to be the long run if you follow these programmed. • Do not tow a trailer during guidelines: break-in. See Towing a If the security light comes on and • Keep your speed at 55 mph Trailer on page 4-42 for the stays on while driving, the engine (88 km/h) or less for the trailer towing capabilities of the will restart if you turn it off. However, first 500 miles (805 km). vehicle and more information. the theft-deterrent system is not working properly and must be • Do not drive at any one Following break-in, engine serviced by your dealer/retailer. constant speed, fast or slow, speed and load can be gradually The vehicle is not protected by the for the first 500 miles (805 km). increased. theft-deterrent system at this time. Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to In an emergency, contact Roadside brake or slow the vehicle. Assistance. See Roadside Service on page 7-6. Do not leave the key or device that disarms or deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle. 2-16 Features and Controls

Ignition Positions Notice: Using a tool to force the the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. key to turn in the ignition could If this doesn’t work, then the vehicle cause damage to the switch or needs service. break the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the way in, and (B) ACC/ACCESSORY: This is the turn it only with your hand. If the position in which you can operate key cannot be turned by hand, see the electrical accessories or items your dealer/retailer. plugged into the accessory power outlets. On automatic transmission (A) LOCK/OFF: This position vehicles, this position unlocks locks the ignition. It also locks the ignition. On manual transmission the transmission on automatic vehicles, it unlocks the ignition transmission vehicles. It locks and steering wheel. Use this position The ignition switch has four different the steering wheel on manual if the vehicle must be pushed or positions. transmission vehicles. The key can towed. only be removed in LOCK/OFF. To shift out of P (Park), turn the (C) ON/RUN: This position can be ignition to ON/RUN and apply On vehicles with an automatic used to operate the electrical the regular brake pedal. transmission, the shift lever must be accessories and to display some in P (Park) to turn the ignition instrument panel cluster warning switch to LOCK/OFF. and indicator lights. The switch stays The steering can bind with the in this position when the engine is wheels turned off center. If this running. The transmission is happens, move the steering wheel also unlocked in this position on from right to left while turning automatic transmission vehicles. Features and Controls 2-17

If you leave the key in the Retained Accessory Starting the Engine ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the engine off, Power (RAP) Place the transmission in the the battery could be drained. These vehicle accessories can be proper gear. You may not be able to start the used for up to 20 minutes after Automatic Transmission vehicle if the battery is allowed the engine is turned off: Move the shift lever to P (Park) or to drain for an extended period • Audio System of time. N (Neutral). The engine will not start • Front Wipers in any other position. To restart (D) START: This is the position that • Power Windows the vehicle when it is already starts the engine. When the engine moving, use N (Neutral) only. starts, release the key. The ignition • Sunroof (if equipped) switch returns to ON/RUN for driving. Notice: Do not try to shift to These features will work when P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. A warning tone will sound when the the key is in ON/RUN or If you do, you could damage driver door is opened, the ignition ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is the transmission. Shift to P (Park) is in ACC/ACCESSORY or turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, only when the vehicle is stopped. LOCK/OFF and the key is in these features continue working the ignition. for up to 20 minutes or until a door Manual Transmission is opened. The shift lever should be in N (Neutral) and the parking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal down to the ﬂoor and start the engine. The vehicle will not start if the clutch pedal is not all the way down. 2-18 Features and Controls

Starting Procedure 15 seconds to prevent cranking Wait at least 15 seconds 1. With your foot off the accelerator motor damage. To prevent between each try, to allow the pedal, turn the ignition key to gear damage, this system also cranking motor to cool. When the START. When the engine starts, prevents cranking if the engine engine starts, let go of the key let go of the key. The idle speed is already running. Engine and accelerator. If the vehicle will go down as the engine cranking can be stopped by starts briefly but then stops warms. Do not race the engine turning the ignition switch again, repeat the procedure. immediately after starting it. to ACC/ACCESSORY or This clears the extra gasoline Operate the engine and LOCK/OFF. from the engine. Do not race transmission gently to allow the engine immediately Notice: Cranking the engine for after starting it. Operate the the oil to warm up and lubricate long periods of time, by returning all moving parts. engine and transmission gently the key to the START position until the oil warms up and The vehicle has a immediately after cranking has lubricates all moving parts. Computer-Controlled Cranking ended, can overheat and damage System. This feature assists the cranking motor, and drain the Notice: The engine is designed in starting the engine and battery. Wait at least 15 seconds to work with the electronics protects components. If the between each try, to let the in the vehicle. If you add electrical ignition key is turned to the cranking motor cool down. parts or accessories, you could START position, and then 2. If the engine does not start change the way the engine released when the engine after 5-10 seconds, especially in operates. Before adding electrical begins cranking, the engine very cold weather (below 0°F equipment, check with your will continue cranking for a or −18°C), it could be flooded dealer/retailer. If you do not, few seconds or until the vehicle with too much gasoline. Push the the engine might not perform starts. If the engine does not accelerator pedal all the way properly. Any resulting damage start and the key is held in to the floor and holding it there would not be covered by the START for many seconds, as you hold the key in START vehicle warranty. cranking will be stopped after for a maximum of 15 seconds. Features and Controls 2-19

Engine Coolant Heater Automatic Transmission { CAUTION The engine coolant heater can Operation provide easier starting and better Plugging the cord into an fuel economy during engine ungrounded outlet could cause an warm-up in cold weather conditions electrical shock. Also, the wrong at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles kind of extension cord could with an engine coolant heater should overheat and cause a ﬁre. You be plugged in at least four hours could be seriously injured. Plug before starting. An internal the cord into a properly grounded thermostat in the plug-end of the three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. cord may exist which will prevent If the cord will not reach, use a engine coolant heater operation heavy-duty three-prong extension at temperatures above 0°F (−18°C). cord rated for at least 15 amps. To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 4. Before starting the engine, be The automatic transmission has a 1. Turn off the engine. sure to unplug and store the cord to prevent damage. shift lever on the console. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The cord is The length of time the heater should located in the engine remain plugged in depends on compartment behind the several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer underhood fuse block on the in the area where you will be driver side of the vehicle. parking the vehicle for the best advice on this. 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet. 2-20 Features and Controls

system. You must fully apply the { CAUTION regular brakes ﬁrst and then press the shift lever button before you It is dangerous to get out of the can shift from P (Park) when vehicle if the shift lever is not fully the ignition key is in ON/RUN. If you in P (Park) with the parking brake cannot shift out of P (Park), ease ﬁrmly set. The vehicle can roll. pressure on the shift lever and push Do not leave the vehicle when the the shift lever all the way into engine is running unless you have P (Park) as you maintain brake to. If you have left the engine application. Then press the shift lever button and move the shift running, the vehicle can move lever into another gear. See It features an electronic shift suddenly. You or others could be Shifting Out of Park (Automatic position indicator within the injured. To be sure the vehicle will Transmission) on page 2-30 instrument cluster. not move, even when you are on There are several different positions fairly level ground, always set the R (Reverse): Use this gear to for the shift lever. parking brake and move the shift back up. lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into P (Park): This position locks the Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) Park (Automatic Transmission) on while the vehicle is moving rear wheels. It is the best position page 2-29. If you are pulling a to use when you start the engine forward could damage the trailer, see Towing a Trailer on transmission. The repairs would because the vehicle cannot page 4-42. move easily. not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) Make sure the shift lever is fully in only after the vehicle is stopped. P (Park) before starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control Features and Controls 2-21

To rock the vehicle back and forth to Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) D (Drive) can be used when towing get out of snow, ice, or sand without or N (Neutral) with the engine a trailer. You may want to shift damaging the transmission, see running at high speed may the transmission to 3 (Third) or, If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, damage the transmission. The if necessary, a lower gear if Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-33 repairs would not be covered by the transmission shifts too often the vehicle warranty. Be sure under heavy loads or in hilly N (Neutral): In this position, the the engine is not running at high conditions. engine does not connect with speed when shifting the vehicle. the wheels. To restart the engine 3 (Third): This position is also used when the vehicle is already moving, D (Drive): This position is for for normal driving. However it use N (Neutral) only. normal driving. It provides the best reduces vehicle speed more than fuel economy. If you need more D (Drive) without using the brakes. { CAUTION power for passing, and you are: You might choose 3 (Third) instead • Going less than about 35 mph of D (Drive) when driving on hilly or Shifting into a drive gear while the (55 km/h), push the accelerator winding roads, or when towing a engine is running at high speed is pedal about halfway down. trailer, so there is less shifting between gears, or when going dangerous. Unless your foot is • Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or down a steep hill. ﬁrmly on the brake pedal, the more, push the accelerator all vehicle could move very rapidly. the way down. 2 (Second): This position reduces You could lose control and hit vehicle speed even more than people or objects. Do not shift into Downshifting the transmission in 3 (Third) without using the brakes. a drive gear while the engine is slippery road conditions could result You can use 2 (Second) on hills. running at high speed. in skidding, see “Skidding” under It can help control vehicle speed as Loss of Control on page 4-12. you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to use the brakes off and on. 2-22 Features and Controls

1 (First): This position reduces Manual Transmission shift into 1 (First), put the shift lever vehicle speed even more than in Neutral and let up on the 2 (Second) without using the brakes. Operation clutch. Then press the clutch pedal You can use it on very steep hills, back down and shift into 1 (First). or in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in 1 (First) while the 2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal vehicle is moving forward, the as you let up on the accelerator transmission will not shift into ﬁrst pedal and shift into 2 (Second). gear until the vehicle is going slowly Then, slowly let up on the clutch enough. pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth): on a hill using only the Shift into 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth) and accelerator pedal may damage This is the shift pattern. 5 (Fifth) the same way you do the transmission. The repair for 2 (Second). Slowly let up on the Vehicles with a manual transmission will not be covered by the vehicle clutch pedal as you press the operate as described below: warranty. If you are stuck, do accelerator pedal. not spin the tires. When stopping 1 (First): Press the clutch pedal To stop, let up on the accelerator on a hill, use the brakes to and shift into 1 (First). Then slowly pedal and press the brake hold the vehicle in place. let up on the clutch pedal as pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, you slowly press down on the press the clutch pedal and the Hill Start Assist accelerator pedal. brake pedal, and shift to Neutral. H3 and H3T vehicles have a Hill You can shift into 1 (First) when Start Assist feature, which may be Neutral: Use this position when you you are going less than 20 mph useful when stopped on a grade. start or idle the engine. (30 km/h). If you have come to a See Braking on page 4-3 for complete stop and it is hard to more information. Features and Controls 2-23

R (Reverse): To back up, stop the Up-Shift Light Shift Speeds vehicle. Press the clutch pedal and shift into R (Reverse). Slowly let { CAUTION up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. If it is hard If you skip a gear when you to shift, let the shift lever return downshift, you could lose control to Neutral and release the clutch This light will show you when to of the vehicle. You could injure pedal. Then press the clutch again shift to the next higher gear for best yourself or others. Do not shift and shift into R (Reverse). Do not fuel economy. attempt to shift into the ﬁfth gear down more than one gear at a position prior to shifting into When this light comes on, you can time when you downshift. R (Reverse). The transmission has shift to the next higher gear if a lock out feature which prevents weather, road and traffic conditions Hill Start Assist a 5 (Fifth) gear to R (Reverse) permit. For the best fuel economy, gear shift. accelerate slowly and shift when the H3 and H3T vehicles have a Hill light comes on. Start Assist feature, which may be Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) useful when stopped on a grade. While you accelerate, it is normal while the vehicle is moving See Braking on page 4-3 for for the light to go on and off if forward could damage the more information. you quickly change the position of transmission. The repairs would the accelerator. Ignore the shift light not be covered by the vehicle when you downshift. warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle is stopped. Disregard the shift light when the transfer case is in four-wheel low. Use R (Reverse), along with the parking brake, for parking the For more information, see Up-Shift vehicle. Light on page 3-27. 2-24 Features and Controls

Full-Time Four-Wheel 4 m (Four-Wheel High): This Notice: Operating the vehicle in Drive setting is used for driving in most Four-Wheel-Low Lock above street and highway situations. 30 mph (48 km/h) for any Full-Time Four-Wheel Drive sends You can also use this setting for extended period of time could engine power to all four wheels light or variable off-road conditions. cause damage to the transfer for extra traction. To get the most case. Do not operate the vehicle out of Full-Time Four-Wheel Drive, N (Neutral): Shift the transfer in Four-Wheel-Low Lock above you must be familiar with its case to Neutral only when towing 30 mph (48 km/h) for extended operation. the vehicle. See Recreational periods. Vehicle Towing on page 4-40 or Transfer Case Buttons Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-40 4 nQ(Four-Wheel-Low Lock): for more information. This setting delivers extra torque to Notice: Driving on pavement in all four wheels and is used for Four-Wheel High Lock or Four extreme off-road conditions. Wheel Low Lock for extended If the vehicle has locking axles, periods may cause premature they can be locked for additional wear on the vehicle powertrain The transfer case buttons are traction in extreme off-road and tires. Do not drive in located to the right of the instrument situations. See Locking Rear Axle Four-Wheel High Lock or panel cluster. Use these switches to on page 4-8 and Locking Front Axle Four-Wheel Low Lock on shift into and out of the different on page 4-9. pavement for extended periods. Full-Time Four-Wheel Drive modes. Indicator lights in the buttons show 4 mQ(Four-Wheel-High Lock): which setting the transfer case Use this setting when you need is in. The indicator lights will come extra traction in most off-road on brieﬂy when the ignition is in situations such as sand, mud, snow ON/RUN. The If the lights do or level, rocky trails. not come on, take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service. Features and Controls 2-25

An indicator light will flash while Shifting into Four-Wheel Low Lock Four-Wheel-Low Lock indicator shifting the transfer case. If the light to stop flashing and remain lit Notice: Shifting the transmission transfer case cannot make a before shifting the transmission into gear before the indicator requested shift, it will return to the into gear. light stops flashing could cause last chosen setting. damage to the transfer case. It is normal for the vehicle to have If the SERV 4WD message on the Always wait until the indicator engagement noise and bump Driver Information Center (DIC) light stops flashing before putting when shifting between Four-Wheel stays on, take the vehicle to the transmission back in gear. Low and Four-Wheel High ranges your dealer/retailer for service. or from Neutral. To shift into Four-Wheel-Low Lock, See Service 4WD message under the ignition must be in ON/RUN If the Four-Wheel-Low Lock button DIC Warnings and Messages and the vehicle must be stopped or is pressed when the vehicle is on page 3-37. moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) in gear and/or moving too fast, the Shifting between Four-Wheel with the transmission in N (Neutral). Four-Wheel-Low Lock indicator High and Four-Wheel-High Lock The preferred method for shifting light will flash for 15 seconds and into Four-Wheel Low is to have not complete the shift. With the vehicle traveling less the vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph than 75 mph (120 km/h), press and (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release release the Four-Wheel High or the Four-Wheel-Low Lock button. Four-Wheel-High Lock button. If the vehicle has a manual It may be necessary to drive transmission, the clutch pedal must backwards while turning for a be pressed to the floor while you distance of 25 feet (7.5 m) to get press the Four-Wheel-Low Lock the lock feature to disengage. button, or the shift will not be completed. You must wait for the 2-26 Features and Controls

Shifting Out of If the vehicle has a manual Shifting Into Neutral Four-Wheel-Low Lock transmission, the clutch pedal must To shift the transfer case to Neutral: be pressed to the floor while you Notice: Shifting the transmission press the Four-Wheel High or 1. Set the parking brake. into gear before the indicator Four-Wheel-High Lock button, or the light stops flashing could cause 2. Start the vehicle. shift will not be completed. You must damage to the transfer case. wait for the Four-Wheel High or 3. Put the transmission in Always wait until the indicator Four-Wheel-High Lock indicator light N (Neutral). If the vehicle has a light stops flashing before putting to stop flashing and remain lit before manual transmission, press and the transmission back in gear. shifting the transmission into gear. hold the clutch pedal down while To shift out of Four-Wheel-Low Lock, you perform Steps 5 through 9. It is normal for the vehicle to have the vehicle must be stopped or 4. Shift the transfer case to engagement noise and bump moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) Four-Wheel High. when shifting between Four-Wheel with the transmission in N (Neutral) Low and Four-Wheel High ranges and the ignition in ON/RUN. or from Neutral. { CAUTION The preferred method for shifting out of Four-Wheel-Low Lock is to have If the Four-Wheel High or Shifting an all-wheel-drive the vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph Four-Wheel-High Lock button is vehicle’s transfer case into (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and pressed when the vehicle is in Neutral can cause the vehicle release the Four-Wheel High or gear and/or moving too fast, to roll even if the automatic Four-Wheel-High Lock button. the Four-Wheel High or Four-Wheel-High Lock indicator transmission is in P (Park) or the light will flash for 15 seconds but manual transmission is in any will not complete the shift. gear. You or others could be injured. Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before you shift the transfer case to Neutral. Features and Controls 2-27

5. Simultaneously press and hold Shifting Out of Neutral Notice: Shifting the transmission the Four-Wheel High and To shift out of Neutral: into gear before the indicator Four-Wheel-Low Lock buttons for light stops ﬂashing could cause 10 seconds. The Neutral light 1. Set the parking brake and apply damage to the transfer case. will come on when the transfer the regular brake pedal. Always wait until the indicator case shift to Neutral is complete. 2. Shift the transmission to light stops ﬂashing before putting 6. Press and hold the regular brake N (Neutral) for an automatic the transmission back in gear. pedal and shift the transmission transmission, or press the clutch 5. You may start the engine and to R (Reverse), then shift the pedal for vehicles that have a shift the transmission to the transmission to D (Drive) for an manual transmission. Then turn desired position. automatic transmission, or the ignition to ON/RUN but 1 (First) for vehicles have a do not start the engine. manual transmission and then let 3. Press the button for the desired out the clutch. This is to ensure transfer case shift position the transfer case is in Neutral. (Four-Wheel High, If not, repeat this procedure Four-Wheel-High Lock or starting at Step 3. Four-Wheel-Low Lock). 7. Turn the engine off. After the transfer case has 8. Place the transmission shift lever shifted out of Neutral the light in P (Park) for an automatic will go out. transmission, or 1 (First) for 4. Release the parking brake. vehicles that have a manual transmission. 9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. 2-28 Features and Controls

Parking Brake A chime will sound and the brake Notice: Driving with the parking warning light will ﬂash when the brake on can overheat the parking brake is applied and brake system and cause the vehicle is moving at least 3 mph premature wear or damage to (5 km/h) for at least three seconds. brake system parts. Make See Brake System Warning Light sure that the parking brake is on page 3-27. fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving. If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-42.

The parking brake pedal is located to the left of the regular brake pedal, near the driver door. To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down, then push the parking brake pedal down to its fully-applied position. To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down. Pull the park brake release lever, located above the parking brake pedal. Features and Controls 2-29

Shifting Into Park { Leaving Your Vehicle (Automatic Transmission) CAUTION With the Engine Running (Automatic Transmission) With all-wheel drive, the vehicle { CAUTION will be free to roll — even if the { shift lever is in P (Park) — if the CAUTION It can be dangerous to get out of transfer case is in Neutral. So, be It can be dangerous to leave the the vehicle if the shift lever is not sure the transfer case is in a drive vehicle with the engine running. fully in P (Park) with the parking gear, four-wheel high (4H) or The vehicle could move suddenly brake firmly set. The vehicle can four-wheel low (4L) — not in if the shift lever is not fully in roll. If you have left the engine Neutral. running, the vehicle can move P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the suddenly. You or others could be 2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) vehicle with the engine running, injured. To be sure the vehicle will by pressing the shift lever button it could overheat and even catch not move, even when you are on and moving the lever as far fairly level ground, use the steps forward as it will go. fire. You or others could be that follow. If you are pulling a injured. Do not leave the vehicle 3. Turn the ignition key to with the engine running. trailer, see Towing a Trailer on LOCK/OFF. page 4-42. 4. Remove the key from the If you have to leave the vehicle with ignition. 1. Hold the brake pedal down, the engine running, be sure the then set the parking brake. vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking brake is firmly set before you See Parking Brake on page 2-28 leave it. After you have moved the for more information. shift lever into P (Park), hold the regular brake pedal down. 2-30 Features and Controls

Then, see if you can move the shift Shifting Out of Park To shift out of P (Park): lever away from P (Park) without (Automatic 1. Apply the brake pedal. ﬁrst pressing the shift lever button. If you can, it means that the Transmission) 2. Then press the shift lever button. shift lever was not fully locked into This vehicle is equipped with an 3. Move the shift lever to the P (Park). electronic shift lock release system. desired position. The shift lock release is designed to: Torque lock is when the weight of If you still are unable to shift out the vehicle puts too much force • Prevent ignition key removal of P (Park): on the parking pawl in the unless the shift lever is in P (Park) 1. Fully release the shift lever transmission. This happens when with the shift lever button fully button. parking on a hill and shifting released, and the transmission into P (Park) is 2. While holding down the brake • Prevent movement of the shift not done properly and then it pedal, press the shift lever lever out of P (Park) unless is difficult to shift out of P (Park). button again. the ignition is in ON/RUN or To prevent torque lock, set the ACC/ACCESSORY and the 3. Move the shift lever to the parking brake and then shift into regular brake pedal is applied. desired position. P (Park). To ﬁnd out how, see “Shifting Into P (Park)” listed The shift lock release is always If you still cannot move the shift previously. functional except in the case of lever from P (Park), consult your a an uncharged or low voltage dealer/retailer or a professional If torque lock does occur, your (less than 9 volt) battery. towing service. vehicle may need to be pushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve If the vehicle has an uncharged the parking pawl pressure, so battery or a battery with low voltage, you can shift out of P (Park). try charging or jump starting the battery. See Jump Starting on page 5-34 for more information. Features and Controls 2-31

Parking the Vehicle Engine Exhaust (Manual Transmission) CAUTION (Continued) If the vehicle has a manual { CAUTION • The vehicle’s exhaust system transmission, before you get out of has been modified, damaged the vehicle, move the shift lever Engine exhaust contains Carbon or improperly repaired. Monoxide (CO) which cannot be into R (Reverse), and firmly apply • There are holes or openings seen or smelled. Exposure to CO the parking brake. Once the in the vehicle body from can cause unconsciousness and shift lever has been placed into damage or after-market R (Reverse) with the clutch pedal even death. modifications that are not pressed in, turn the ignition key Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: completely sealed. to LOCK/OFF, remove the key and • The vehicle idles in areas release the clutch. If unusual fumes are detected or if with poor ventilation (parking it is suspected that exhaust is If you are parking on a hill, or if the garages, tunnels, deep snow coming into the vehicle: vehicle is pulling a trailer, see that may block underbody • Drive it only with the windows Towing a Trailer on page 4-42. airflow or tail pipes). completely down. • The exhaust smells or Parking Over Things • Have the vehicle repaired sounds strange or different. immediately. That Burn • The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or damage. Never park the vehicle with the { CAUTION engine running in an enclosed (Continued) area such as a garage or a Things that can burn could touch building that has no fresh air hot exhaust parts under the ventilation. vehicle and ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that can burn. 2-32 Features and Controls

Running the Vehicle Follow the proper steps to be { CAUTION sure the vehicle will not move. While Parked See Shifting Into Park (Automatic It is better not to park with the It can be dangerous to get out Transmission) on page 2-29 engine running. But if you ever have of the vehicle if the automatic and Parking the Vehicle (Manual to, here are some things to know. transmission shift lever is not fully Transmission) on page 2-31. in P (Park) with the parking brake If pulling a trailer, see Towing a ﬁrmly set. The vehicle can roll. { CAUTION Trailer on page 4-42. Do not leave the vehicle when the Idling a vehicle in an enclosed engine is running unless you have area with poor ventilation is to. If you have left the engine dangerous. Engine exhaust may running, the vehicle can move enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust suddenly. You or others could be contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) injured. To be sure the vehicle will which cannot be seen or smelled. not move, even when it is on It can cause unconsciousness fairly level ground, always set and even death. Never run the the parking brake and move the engine in an enclosed area that automatic transmission shift lever has no fresh air ventilation. to P (Park), or the manual For more information, see Engine transmission shift lever to Neutral. Exhaust on page 2-31. Features and Controls 2-33

Mirrors Automatic Dimming Mirror • At start up, if the vehicle has been Operation off for less than two and a half hours, and the last stored Automatic Dimming Automatic dimming reduces the temperature was less than the glare from the headlamps of Rearview Mirror current temperature, the sensor the vehicle behind you. The dimming will increase 1°F every The vehicle has an automatic feature comes on and the indicator two minutes until the correct dimming rearview mirror with a light illuminates each time the temperature is displayed. compass and temperature display. ignition is turned to start. Vehicles with OnStar® have • If the vehicle has been off more three additional control buttons for Temperature Display than two and a half hours, or the the OnStar® system. See your To adjust between Fahrenheit and last stored temperature is greater dealer/retailer for more information Celsius: than the current temperature, the about OnStar® and how to current temperature immediately • Press z for approximately subscribe to it. See OnStar¨ displays. four seconds to toggle the display System on page 2-39 for more • If the temperature is 37°F (3°C) or from F (Fahrenheit) to C (Celsius) information about the services lower, ICE will ﬂash on the ® to OFF. Release the button after OnStar provides. temperature display. This display the display has toggled to the will ﬂash every two seconds for a next state. z (On/Off): Press to turn the period of one minute. dimming feature on or off. The temperature display will remain in its current state each If an abnormal temperature reading The vehicle may also have a Rear time the ignition goes through is displayed for an extended Vision Camera (RVC). See Rear its cycle. period of time, see your Vision Camera (RVC) on page 2-36 dealer/retailer. Under certain for more information. circumstances, a delay in updating the temperature is normal. 2-34 Features and Controls

Compass Display Press and hold O until CAL displays To adjust for compass variance: Press z to turn the compass in the compass window, then release 1. Find your current location and the button. The compass is now in display on or off. variance zone number on the calibration mode. following zone map. For more information on the • Drive the vehicle in circles at less compass, see Compass on than 5 mph (8 km/h) until CAL page 2-34 after, in this section. is no longer displayed in the Cleaning the Mirror compass window. Then continue to drive to make sure all eight Do not spray glass cleaner directly directions are available. on the mirror. Use a soft towel dampened with water. • Drive the vehicle under normal operating conditions. Compass Compass Variance Compass Calibration The mirror is set to zone eight. If you do not live in zone eight or The compass may need to be drive out of the area, the compass 2. Press and hold O for six seconds calibrated if CAL is not displayed and variance needs to be changed the compass requires calibration. to the appropriate zone. until ZONE displays. Release the button. The compass is now in zone mode. 3. Keep pressing O until the desired zone number displays. Release the button. After four seconds, the new zone number locks in and the compass display returns. Features and Controls 2-35

Outside Power Mirrors To adjust the power mirrors: Outside Convex Mirror 1. Press the left or right side of the selector switch to choose the { CAUTION driver or passenger side mirror. 2. Press the round, four-way control A convex mirror can make things pad to adjust the mirror. Adjust (like other vehicles) look farther each outside mirror to see a little away than they really are. If you of the vehicle, and the area cut too sharply into the right lane, behind the vehicle. you could hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or Manually fold the mirrors inward glance over your shoulder before toward the vehicle. This prevents damage when going through changing lanes. an automatic car wash or a conﬁned H3 Shown, H3T Similar space. Manually unfold the mirrors The passenger side mirror is convex outward to return them to the shaped. A convex mirror’s surface Controls for the outside power mirrors original position. is curved so more can be seen from are located on the driver door. the driver seat. 2-36 Features and Controls

Object Detection Turning the Rear Vision Camera System On or Off { CAUTION Systems To turn off the rear vision camera The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) Rear Vision system, press and hold z, located system does not replace driver Camera (RVC) on the inside rearview mirror, vision. RVC does not: until the left indicator light turns off. • Detect objects that are Vehicles with the rear vision camera The rear camera vision display outside the camera’s ﬁeld of system are designed to help the is now disabled. view, below the bumper, or driver while the vehicle is backing To turn the rear vision camera underneath the vehicle. up. The area behind the vehicle system on again, press and • Detect children, pedestrians, is displayed on the screen in the bicyclists, or pets. inside rear view mirror. Read this hold z until the left indicator light entire section before using the illuminates. The rear vision Do not back the vehicle by only camera system. camera system display is now looking at the rear vision camera enabled and the display will appear screen, or use the screen during When the key is in the ON/RUN in the mirror normally. longer, higher speed backing position and the driver shifts the maneuvers or where there could vehicle into R (Reverse), the video be cross-traffic. Your judged image appears from inside the distances using the screen will rear view mirror. Once the vehicle differ from actual distances. is shifted out of R (Reverse), the image disappears. (Continued) The display may have a guideline overlay that can help the driver align the vehicle when backing into a parking spot. Features and Controls 2-37

Rear Vision Camera Location The image from the camera that CAUTION (Continued) appears on the screen appears farther than the actual distance. So if you do not use proper care The area displayed by the camera before backing up, you could is limited. The camera does not hit a vehicle, child, pedestrian, display objects which are close to bicyclist, or pet, resulting in either corner of the bumper or under vehicle damage, injury, or death. the bumper. On the H3, the spare Even though the vehicle has the tire and carrier extends rearward RVC system, always check of the rear bumper. The area displayed on the screen may vary carefully before backing up by View of H3 Camera Location checking behind and around according to vehicle orientation the vehicle. or road conditions.

View of H3T Camera Location

The image on the screen is provided by the camera located on the rear bumper. 2-38 Features and Controls

The following illustration shows the Notice: The spare tire extends ﬁeld of view that the camera farther away from rear of the provides. vehicle than the trailer hitch shown on rear vision camera display. The spare tire could hit an object even though there appears to be enough distance on the display between the trailer hitch and objects behind you causing vehicle or property damage. Do not use this system to judge the distance between the spare tire and objects behind you.

H3T Field of View

H3 Field of View Features and Controls 2-39

When the System Does Not Seem The rear vision camera system OnStar® System To Work Properly display in the rearview mirror may The rear vision camera system may turn off or not appear as expected not work properly or display a due to a loss of video signal, or clear image: no video signal present during the reverse cycle. The display will • In the dark. be blank and the left indicator light OnStar uses several innovative • When the sun or the beam of will slowly ﬂash as long as the technologies and live advisors to headlamps is shining directly vehicle is in R (Reverse) or until the provide a wide range of safety, into the camera lens. condition returns to normal. security, information, and convenience services. If the airbags • If ice, snow, mud, or anything else Pressing and holding z when the builds up on the camera lens. deploy, the system is designed to left indicator light is ﬂashing will make an automatic call to OnStar Clean the lens, rinse it with water, turn off the video display along with and wipe it with a soft cloth. Emergency advisors who can the left indicator light. request emergency services be sent • If the back of the vehicle is in an to your location. If the keys are accident, the position and locked in the vehicle, call OnStar mounting angle of the camera at 1-888-4-ONSTAR to have a may change or the camera may signal sent to unlock the doors. be affected. Be sure to have the OnStar Hands-Free Calling, camera and its position and including 30 trial minutes good for mounting angle checked at your 60 days, is available on most dealer/retailer. vehicles. OnStar Turn-by-Turn • If there are extreme temperatures Navigation service, with one trial or extreme temperature changes. route, is available on most vehicles. Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service. 2-40 Features and Controls

OnStar service is provided subject and system limitations, see the • GM Goodwrench On Demand to the OnStar Terms and Conditions OnStar Owner’s Guide in the Diagnostics included in the OnStar Subscriber glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) • OnStar Hands-Free Calling with glove box literature. or onstar.ca (Canada), contact 30 trial minutes OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR Some services such as Remote (1-888-466-7827) or TTY • OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only) Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle 1-877-248-2080, or press the Location Assistance may not be OnStar button to speak with an OnStar Services Included with available until the owner of the OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, Directions & Connections Plan vehicle registers with OnStar. 7 days a week. • All Safe and Sound Plan Services After the first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select a monthly or OnStar Services Available • OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation annual subscription payment plan. with the Safe & Sound Plan (If equipped) or Driving If a payment plan is not selected, Directions - Advisor delivered • Automatic Notification of the OnStar system and all services, • RideAssist including airbag notification and Airbag Deployment emergency services, may be • Advanced Automatic Crash • Information and Convenience deactivated and no longer Notification (AACN) (If equipped) Services available. For more information • Link to Emergency Services OnStar Hands-Free Calling visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca (Canada), or press the OnStar • Roadside Assistance OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows button to speak with an advisor. • Stolen Vehicle Location eligible OnStar subscribers to Assistance make and receive calls using voice Not all OnStar services are available commands. Hands-Free Calling on all vehicles. To check if this • Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle is fully integrated into the vehicle, vehicle is able to provide the Alert and can be used with OnStar services described below, or for a • OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email Pre-Paid Minute Packages. full description of OnStar services Features and Controls 2-41

Most vehicles include 30 trial OnStar Virtual Advisor Use this button to dial numbers minutes good for 60 days. into voicemail systems or to OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature Hands-Free Calling can also be dial phone number extensions. of OnStar Hands-Free Calling linked to a Verizon Wireless service See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for that uses minutes to access plan in the U.S. or a Bell Mobility more information. location-based weather, local traffic service plan in Canada, depending reports, and stock quotes. Press on eligibility. To ﬁnd out more, How OnStar Service Works the phone button and give a refer to the OnStar Owner’s Guide few simple voice commands to The OnStar system can record in the vehicle’s glove box, visit browse through the various topics. and transmit vehicle information. onstar.com or onstar.ca, or speak See the OnStar Owner’s Guide This information is automatically with an OnStar advisor by pressing for more information. This feature is sent to an OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button or calling only available in the continental U.S. the OnStar button is pressed, the 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827). emergency button is pressed, OnStar Turn-by-Turn Additional OnStar Controls or if the airbags or AACN system deploy. This information usually Navigation includes the vehicle’s GPS location Vehicles with the OnStar and, in the event of a crash, Turn-by-Turn Navigation system additional information regarding can provide voice-guided driving the crash that the vehicle was directions. Press the OnStar button involved in (e.g. the direction from to have an OnStar advisor locate which the vehicle was hit). When the a business or address and download The vehicle may have a button, Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar driving directions to the vehicle. located on the driver side of the Hands-Free Calling is used, Voice-guided directions to the instrument panel near the headlamp the vehicle also sends OnStar the desired destination will play controls, that can be used to vehicle’s GPS location so they through the audio system speakers. interact with OnStar. can provide services where See the OnStar Owner’s Guide it is located. for more information. 2-42 Features and Controls

OnStar service cannot work unless control that may prevent OnStar Universal Home the vehicle is in a place where from providing OnStar service at OnStar has an agreement with a any particular time or place. Remote System wireless service provider for service Some examples are damage to The Universal Home Remote in that area. OnStar service also important parts of the vehicle in a System provides a way to cannot work unless the vehicle is in crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, replace up to three hand-held a place where the wireless service weather or wireless phone network radio-frequency (RF) transmitters provider OnStar has hired for congestion. used to activate devices such that area has coverage, network Your Responsibility as garage door openers, security capacity and reception when systems, and home lighting. the service is needed, and Increase the volume of the radio technology that is compatible if the OnStar advisor cannot This device complies with Part 15 with the OnStar service. Not all be heard. If the light next to the of the FCC Rules. Operation is services are available everywhere, OnStar buttons is red, the system subject to the following two particularly in remote or enclosed may not be functioning properly. conditions: areas, or at all times. Press the OnStar button and request 1. This device may not cause Location information about the a vehicle diagnostic. If the light harmful interference. vehicle is only available if the GPS appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar subscription has 2. This device must accept any satellite signals are unobstructed interference received, including and available. expired and all services have been deactivated. Press the OnStar interference that may cause The vehicle must have a working button to conﬁrm that the OnStar undesired operation. electrical system, including adequate equipment is active. The FCC Grant of Equipment battery power, for the OnStar Authorization Certiﬁcate number equipment to operate. There are is CB2SAHL3. other problems OnStar cannot Features and Controls 2-43

This device complies with RSS-210 Universal Home Remote Do not use the Universal Home of Industry Canada. Operation is Remote with any garage door subject to the following two System Operation opener that does not have the stop conditions: and reverse feature. This includes 1. This device may not cause any garage door opener model interference. manufactured before April 1, 1982. 2. This device must accept any Read the instructions completely interference received, including before attempting to program interference that may cause the Universal Home Remote. Because of the steps involved, undesired operation of the If there is one triangular Light it may be helpful to have another device. Emitting Diode (LED) indicator person available to assist you in light above the Universal Home The Canadian Registration the programming the Universal Remote buttons, follow the ID number is 2791021849A. Home Remote. instructions below. Changes or modiﬁcations to this Keep the original hand-held This system provides a way to system by other than an authorized transmitter for use in other vehicles replace up to three remote control service facility could void as well as for future Universal transmitters used to activate devices authorization to use this equipment. Home Remote programming. such as garage door openers, It is also recommended that security systems, and home upon the sale of the vehicle, the automation devices. programmed Universal Home Remote buttons should be erased for security purposes. See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later in this section. 2-44 Features and Controls

When programming a garage door, To program up to three devices: 2. Hold the end of the hand-held park outside of the garage. Park transmitter about 1 to 3 inches directly in line with and facing (3 to 8 cm) away from the the garage door opener motor-head Universal Home Remote buttons or gate motor-head. Be sure that while keeping the indicator people and objects are clear of light in view. The hand-held the garage door or gate you are transmitter was supplied by the programming. manufacturer of the garage It is recommended that a new door opener receiver (motor battery be installed in the hand-held head unit). transmitter for quicker and more 3. At the same time, press and hold accurate transmission of the both the Universal Home Remote radio-frequency signal. button that you would like to 1. From inside the vehicle, press use to control the garage door Programming the Universal and the hand-held transmitter Home Remote System and hold down the two outside buttons at the same time, button. Do not release the If you have questions or need help releasing only when the Universal Universal Home Remote button programming the Universal Home Remote indicator light or the hand-held transmitter Home Remote System, call begins to ﬂash, after 20 seconds. button until Step 4 has been 1-800-355-3515 or go to This step erases the factory completed. www.homelink.com. settings or all previously Some entry gates and garage Programming a garage door opener programmed buttons. door openers may require you to involves time-sensitive actions, so Do not hold down the buttons for substitute Step 3 with the read the entire procedure before you longer than 30 seconds and procedure noted in “Gate begin. If you do not follow these do not repeat this step to Operator and Canadian actions, the device times out and you program the remaining two Programming” later in this have to repeat the procedure. Universal Home Remote buttons. section. Features and Controls 2-45

4. The indicator light on the It may be helpful to have another 8. Immediately return to the vehicle. Universal Home Remote ﬂashes person available to assist with Firmly press and hold the slowly at ﬁrst and then rapidly the remaining steps. Universal Home Remote button, after Universal Home Remote chosen in Step 3 to control successfully receives the the garage door, for two seconds, frequency signal from the and then release it. If the hand-held transmitter. Release garage door does not move, both buttons. press and hold the same button 5. Press and hold the newly-trained a second time for two seconds, Universal Home Remote button and then release it. Again, if and observe the indicator light. the door does not move, press and hold the same button a If the indicator light stays on 6. After Steps 1 through 5 have third time for two seconds, and continuously, the programming been completed, locate inside then release. is complete and the garage the garage the garage door door should move when The Universal Home Remote opener receiver (motor-head the Universal Home Remote should now activate the unit). Locate the “Learn” or button is pressed and released. garage door. “Smart” button. The name and You do not need to continue color of the button may vary by To program the remaining two the programming Steps 6 manufacturer. Universal Home Remote buttons, through 8 and can stop here. begin with Step 2 of “Programming If the Universal Home Remote 7. Firmly press and release the the Universal Home Remote indicator light blinks rapidly “Learn” or “Smart” button. System.” Do not repeat Step 1, for two seconds and then After you press this button, as this erases all previous turns to a constant light, you have 30 seconds to programming from the Universal continue with the programming complete Step 8. Home Remote buttons. Steps 6 through 8. 2-46 Features and Controls

Gate Operator and Canadian procedures, regardless of where Erasing Universal Home Programming you live, replace Step 3 under Remote Buttons “Programming Universal Home If you have questions or need help Remote” with the following: Erase the programmed buttons when programming the Universal you sell or terminate your lease. Home Remote System, call Continue to press and hold the To erase all programmed buttons on 1-800-355-3515 or go to Universal Home Remote button the Universal Home Remote device: www.homelink.com. while you press and release every two seconds (cycle) the hand-held Canadian radio-frequency laws transmitter button until the frequency require transmitter signals to time signal has been successfully out or quit after several seconds of accepted by the Universal Home transmission. This may not be Remote. The Universal Home long enough for Universal Home Remote indicator light flashes slowly Remote to pick up the signal at first and then rapidly. Proceed during programming. Similarly, with Step 4 under “Programming some U.S. gate operators are Universal Home Remote” to manufactured to time out in the complete. same manner. If you live in Canada, or you are Using Universal Home Remote having difficulty programming a gate Press and hold the appropriate 1. Press and hold down the operator or garage door opener Universal Home Remote button two outside buttons until the by using the “Programming for at least half of a second. indicator light begins to flash, Universal Home Remote” The indicator light comes on while after 20 seconds. the signal is being transmitted. 2. Release both buttons. Features and Controls 2-47

Reprogramming a Single Storage Areas Front Seat Storage Net Universal Home Remote Button The vehicle has a storage net Glove Box located on the back of each front To reprogram any of the three Open the glove box by pulling up seat. To remove a net, pull out Universal Home Remote buttons, on the bottom of the handle. on the four clips. repeat the programming instructions earlier in this section, beginning Center Console Storage with Step 2. Cupholders A two tiered storage area is For help or information on the The vehicle may have cupholders in front of the front armrest storage located in the center console. Universal Home Remote System, To open, lift the latch on the call the customer assistance phone area and in the lower area of the driver and front passenger doors. front and pull up. Pull out the top number under Customer Assistance storage area to access storage Offices on page 7-4. The H3 may also have a cupholder underneath. in the center of the rear bench seat. Pull down on the cover to open the cupholder. The H3T may have cup/bottle holders located on the bottom of the rear doors. 2-48 Features and Controls

Luggage Carrier Adjusting the Crossrails 5. Once both sides of the crossrail To adjust the crossrails to ﬁt a load: are loose, adjust the crossrail to If the vehicle has this feature, cargo the desired position. can be loaded on top of the vehicle. 6. Push the lever labeled “PULL” The luggage carrier consists of from right to left to lock the siderails attached to the roof. crossrail in place. The crossrails attach into the siderails and can be moved back 7. Reinstall the end cap and turn and forth to accommodate various the crossrail key to lock the cargo sizes. crossrail. 1. Turn the crossrail key 8. Repeat Steps 5 through 7 to the Notice: Loading cargo on the counterclockwise to unlock the opposite end of the crossrail. luggage carrier that weighs more crossrail end cap. than 250 lbs. (113 kg) or hangs 2. Remove the end cap. Stop Tabs over the rear or sides of the If the vehicle has a sunroof, it has a vehicle may damage the vehicle. crossrail stop tab in the siderail. Load cargo only on top of the This tab prevents the crossrail from crossrails and tie the cargo down being moved past the opening of to the crossrail support cargo the sunroof and cargo from tie-down loops, making sure being loaded too far forward. to fasten it securely The vehicle may have cargo tie Do not exceed the maximum vehicle 3. Pull the lever labeled “PULL” downs. Once the cargo is loaded capacity when loading your vehicle. from left to right to loosen the onto the crossrails, use the cargo tie For more information on vehicle crossrail. downs to secure it. Do not load capacity and loading, see Loading cargo directly on the roof of the the Vehicle on page 4-35. 4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to the opposite end of the crossrail. vehicle. See Cargo Tie Downs on page 2-49 for more information. Features and Controls 2-49

Rear Storage Area To install the cover, place the loops on each corner of the cover on The H3 has a rear storage area the four hooks in the rear of located on the passenger side of the the vehicle. The cover should be cargo area. To open it, pull the stored securely when not in use. two tabs out and open lid. Cargo Tie Downs Convenience Net There may be four cargo tie-downs Use the convenience net, located in that can be moved on the tracks the rear, to store small loads as far located on the roof. To move, loosen forward as possible. The net should the tie-down counterclockwise. To adjust a tie-down, pull the locator not be used to store heavy loads. Turn clockwise to tighten and lock pin out and move the tie-down to in place. another location making sure Cargo Cover (H3) the locator pin lines up with a locator Notice: Do not put items onto Cargo Management hole on the rail. The tie-down pin the cargo cover. The weight of the System (H3T) may not be installed correctly if the items could cause the attachment pin does not line up, turn it over The vehicle comes with a cargo clips to break. The cargo cover and reinstall. The tie-down will not management system located in the could no longer be attached move when the pin is completely bed of the vehicle. The system and used. The repairs would not installed. The maximum load contains three rails located on the be covered by the warranty. for each rail is 500 lbs (227 kg). front and sides of the bed. Never put anything on top of the The rails are notched at each end cargo cover. The system has four adjustable which allows the tie-downs to cargo tie-downs, that can be placed The vehicle may have a cargo be removed and placed on another on the upper and lower slides of cover. It can be used to cover rail. To remove, pull the locator the rail. items in the rear of the vehicle. pin out and slide the tie-down to the end of the rail and pull back. 2-50 Features and Controls

To remove or install cargo tie-downs Sunroof second time. To express-close the at the front of the bed, slide the sunroof, fully press and release corner cap towards the center of the To operate a power sliding sunroof, the front of the switch. The sunroof bed to expose the rail notches. the ignition must be on, or Retained will close automatically. To stop To remove the corner cap, Accessory Power (RAP) must be the sunroof partway, press the pull either edge away from the rail. active. See Retained Accessory switch a second time. The sunshade Power (RAP) on page 2-17. will open automatically with the To remove the system, loosen sunroof, but can also be opened the toggle bolts on each rail until manually. The sunroof has a comfort they can be removed from the bed stop feature which stops the of the truck. To replace the system, sunroof from opening to the place the toggle bolts and rails full-open position. From the comfort into their original locations and stop position, press the rear of tighten them to a torque setting of the switch a second time to open 12.5 ft-lbs (17 Y). the sunroof to the full-open position. Notice: If cargo is tied down When the sunroof is opened, an using the horizontal slots on the air deﬂector will automatically raise. top of the pickup box, the box The air deﬂector will retract when could be damaged. Using the the sunroof is closed. horizontal slots on the top of Vent: The sunroof has an the pickup box for tie-down The switch used to operate the express-vent open feature. From the locations may cause damage to sunroof is located in the headliner. closed position, press the rear of the pickup box and would not Express Open/Express Close: the switch to vent the sunroof. be covered by the vehicle To express-open the sunroof, fully To stop the sunroof partway, press warranty. Only use the tie-down press and release the rear of the switch a second time. To close loops if the vehicle does not have the switch. The sunroof will open the sunroof, press and hold the front the cargo management system. automatically. To stop the sunroof of the switch. To stop the sunroof partway, press the switch a partway, release the switch. Features and Controls 2-51

Anti-Pinch Feature Sunshade Operation If an object is in the path of the The sunshade automatically opens sunroof while it is closing, the with the sunroof. Manually pull it anti-pinch feature will detect the shut after the sunroof is closed. object and stop the sunroof To adjust the sunshade, push it from closing at the point of backward or pull it forward to the obstruction. The sunroof will then desired position. The sunshade open halfway, and the air deﬂector cannot be adjusted further than the will raise. current closed position of the sunroof. Do not leave the sunroof open for long periods of time. Excessive debris may collect in the tracks and possibly damage the sunroof operation, or plug the water draining system. 2-52 Features and Controls

✍ NOTES Instrument Panel 3-1

Instrument Panel Daytime Running Warning Lights, Gages, Lamps (DRL) ...... 3-13 and Indicators Automatic Headlamp Warning Lights, Gages, System ...... 3-14 and Indicators ...... 3-22 Instrument Panel Off-Road Lamps ...... 3-14 Instrument Panel Cluster ...3-23 Fog Lamps ...... 3-15 Speedometer and Overview Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Odometer ...... 3-24 Brightness ...... 3-15 Trip Odometer ...... 3-24 Overview ...... 3-4 Dome Lamp ...... 3-16 Hazard Warning Flashers ...3-5 Tachometer ...... 3-24 Dome Lamp Override ...... 3-16 Safety Belt Reminders ...... 3-24 Horn ...... 3-5 Exit Lighting ...... 3-16 Tilt Wheel ...... 3-6 Airbag Readiness Light .....3-25 Reading Lamps ...... 3-16 Passenger Airbag Status Turn Signal/Multifunction Electric Power Lever ...... 3-6 Indicator ...... 3-26 Management ...... 3-17 Charging System Light ...... 3-27 Turn and Lane-Change Battery Run-Down Signals ...... 3-6 Up-Shift Light ...... 3-27 Protection ...... 3-17 Brake System Warning Headlamp High/ Accessory Power Low-Beam Changer ...... 3-7 Light ...... 3-27 Outlet(s) ...... 3-18 Antilock Brake System Flash-to-Pass ...... 3-7 Ashtray(s) and Cigarette ...... 3-7 (ABS) Warning Light ...... 3-28 Windshield Wipers Lighter ...... 3-18 ® Windshield Washer ...... 3-8 StabiliTrak /Traction Rear Window Wiper/ Climate Controls Control System (TCS) Washer ...... 3-8 Climate Control System ....3-19 Warning Light ...... 3-29 Cruise Control ...... 3-9 Outlet Adjustment ...... 3-21 Engine Coolant Exterior Lamps ...... 3-11 Temperature Gage ...... 3-29 Headlamps on Reminder ...3-13 Tire Pressure Light ...... 3-30 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ...... 3-30 3-2 Instrument Panel

Oil Pressure Light ...... 3-32 Security Light ...... 3-33 Cruise Control Light ...... 3-33 Highbeam On Light ...... 3-33 Fuel Gage ...... 3-33 Driver Information Center (DIC) Driver Information Center (DIC) ...... 3-34 DIC Operation and Displays ...... 3-34 DIC Warnings and Messages ...... 3-37 Audio System(s) Audio System(s) ...... 3-41 Setting the Clock ...... 3-41 Radio(s) ...... 3-42 XM Radio Messages ...... 3-51 Navigation/Radio System ...3-52 Bluetooth® ...... 3-52 Theft-Deterrent Feature .....3-62 Radio Reception ...... 3-62 Fixed Mast Antenna ...... 3-63 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 3-63 Instrument Panel 3-3

✍ NOTES 3-4 Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel Overview

Automatic Transmission shown, Manual Transmission similar Instrument Panel 3-5

The main components of the H. Parking Brake on page 2-28. Hazard Warning Flashers instrument panel are the following: I. Audio System(s) on page 3-41. | A. Outlet Adjustment on page 3-21. J. Climate Control System on (Hazard Warning Flasher): B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever page 3-19. Press this button located on the instrument panel, to make the on page 3-6. Windshield Wipers K. Rear Window Wiper/Washer on front and rear turn signal lamps ﬂash on page 3-7. Windshield Washer page 3-8 (If Equipped). on page 3-8. Cruise Control on on and off. This warns others that L. Traction Control System (TCS) you are having trouble. page 3-9. on page 4-7 (For vehicles with C. Horn on page 3-5. Locking Front Axle). Press | again to turn the D. Instrument Panel Cluster on M. Off-Road Lamps on page 3-14. ﬂashers off. page 3-23. N. Shift Lever. See Automatic E. Hazard Warning Flashers on Transmission Operation on Horn page 3-5. page 2-19 or Manual To sound the horn, press the horn Transmission Operation on F. Full-Time Four-Wheel Drive on symbol on the steering wheel pad. page 2-24. Passenger Airbag page 2-22. Status Indicator on page 3-26. O. Accessory Power Outlet(s) on Locking Rear Axle on page 4-8. page 3-18. Locking Front Axle on page 4-9 P. Glove Box on page 2-47. (If Equipped) or Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-7. G. Exterior Lamps on page 3-11. Dome Lamp Override on page 3-16. Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-15. Fog Lamps on page 3-15. OnStar¨ System on page 2-39 and Bluetooth¨ on page 3-52. 3-6 Instrument Panel

Tilt Wheel Turn Signal/Multifunction Turn and Lane-Change A tilt wheel allows the steering Lever Signals wheel to be adjusted.

An arrow on the instrument panel cluster flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change. The lever on the left side of the Move the lever all the way up or steering column includes the down to signal a turn. following: Raise or lower the lever until the G: Turn and Lane Change arrow starts to flash to signal a lane Signals change. Hold it there until the change is completed. The tilt lever is located on the left 53 side of the steering column. : Headlamp High/Low-Beam The lever returns to its starting Changer To tilt, hold the steering wheel and position whenever it is released. pull the tilt lever toward you. N: Windshield Wipers If after signaling a turn or a Raise or lower the wheel to a lane change the arrow flashes comfortable level, then release the L: Windshield Washer rapidly or does not come on, tilt lever to lock the wheel in a signal bulb may be burned out. place. J: Cruise Control Do not adjust the steering wheel Flash-to-Pass. while driving. Information for these features is on the pages following. Instrument Panel 3-7

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb Headlamp If the headlamps are in the is not burned out, check the fuse. automatic position or on low beam, For bulb replacement, see High/Low-Beam Changer the high-beam headlamps will Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps 23Headlamp High/Low turn on. They will stay on as long as and Back-up Lamps (H3) on Beam Changer: Push the turn the lever is held toward you. The page 5-42 or Taillamps, Turn Signal, signal/multifunction lever away from high-beam indicator on the Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps you to turn the high beams on. instrument panel cluster will come (H3T) on page 5-42. For a blown on. Release the lever to return fuse or circuit breaker, see Pull the lever towards you to return to normal operation. Fuses and Circuit Breakers on to low beams. page 5-91. Windshield Wipers Turn Signal On Chime The windshield wipers are controlled If a turn signal is left on for more by turning the band with N on it. than 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), a chime 8 will sound at each ﬂash of the This indicator light turns on in the (Mist): Turn to mist for a single turn signal and the message TURN instrument panel cluster when wiping cycle. Hold it there until SIGNAL will also appear in the the high beam headlamps are on. the wipers start. Then let go. The DIC. To turn the chime and wipers will stop after one wipe. Hold message off, move the turn signal Flash-to-Pass the band on mist longer, if more lever to the off position. wipes are needed. This feature lets you use the See “TURN SIGNAL” under DIC high-beam headlamps to signal a N (Delay): The wiper speed can Warnings and Messages on driver in front of you that you want to be set for long or short delays page 3-37 DIC Warnings and pass. It works even if the headlamps between wipes. This can be very Messages for more information. are in the automatic position. useful in light rain or snow. Turn the To use it, pull the turn signal lever band to choose the delay time. toward you, then release it. The closer to the top of the lever, the shorter the delay. 3-8 Instrument Panel

6 (Low Speed): For steady Windshield Washer Rear Window wiping at low speed, turn the band L Wiper/Washer away from you to the first solid (Washer Fluid): This feature is position past the delay settings. located on the paddle marked L 1 with at the top of the (High Speed): For high-speed multifunction lever. Push the paddle wiping, turn the band to the to spray washer fluid on the second solid position past the delay windshield. The wipers will clear the settings. window and then either stop or return to the preset speed. 9 (Off): Move the band to off, to stop the wipers. { CAUTION Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using In freezing weather, do not use them. If they are frozen to the your washer until the windshield is windshield, carefully loosen or thaw warmed. Otherwise the washer For vehicles with this feature, the them. If the blades do become fluid can form ice on the knob is located on the instrument worn or damaged, get new blades windshield, blocking your vision. panel below the climate controls. or blade inserts. Z Windshield wipers work in all power (Rear Wiper): Turn to 1 modes, except when the ignition for a slower wiping speed or to 2 for is set to LOCK/OFF. After the a faster wiping speed. engine is turned off, wipers will work 0 (Off): Turn to 0 for off. in Retained Accessory Power (RAP) mode until a door is opened. = (Washer Fluid): Press to wash See Retained Accessory Power and wipe the window. (RAP) on page 2-17. Instrument Panel 3-9

The rear window washer uses the 9 (Off): Turns the cruise control { same fluid bottle as the windshield system off. CAUTION washer. Check the fluid level if the windshield can be washed, but R (On): Turns the cruise control the Cruise control can be dangerous the rear windows cannot. system on. where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use Cruise Control S (Resume/Accelerate): This the cruise control on winding position makes the vehicle roads or in heavy traffic. With cruise control, a speed of accelerate or resume to a previously Cruise control can be dangerous about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more can set speed. be maintained without keeping on slippery roads. On such roads, your foot on the accelerator. Cruise rT(Set): Press this button to fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and control does not work at speeds set the speed. below about 25 mph (40 km/h). you could lose control. Do not use Cruise control will not work if the cruise control on slippery roads. parking brake is set, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low. The cruise control disengages, if the If the brakes are applied, the cruise vehicle has the Traction Control control shuts off. System (TCS) and it begins to limit wheel spin. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-7. When road conditions allow the cruise control to be safely used again, you can turn it back on. 3-10 Instrument Panel

Setting Cruise Control Resuming a Set Speed Increasing Speed While Using Suppose the cruise control is set at Cruise Control { CAUTION a desired speed and then you There are two ways to go to a apply the brake or step on the higher speed: If you leave your cruise control on clutch. This disengages the cruise • Use the accelerator pedal to get when you are not using cruise, control. But it does not need to T you might hit a button and go into be reset. to the higher speed. Press cruise when you do not want to. at the end of the lever, then Once the vehicle is going about You could be startled and even release the button and the 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, move accelerator pedal. The vehicle lose control. Keep the cruise the cruise control switch brieﬂy control switch off until you want to will now cruise at the higher from R to S. speed. If the accelerator pedal is use cruise control. held longer than 60 seconds, The vehicle goes back to the cruise control will turn off. 1. Move the cruise control switch chosen speed and stays there. • Move the cruise switch from R to to on. If the switch is held at 2. Get up to the speed desired. resume/accelerate the vehicle will S. Hold it there until you get up T keep going faster until the switch is to the desired speed, and 3. Press at the end of the lever released or the brake is applied. then release the switch. To and release it. Do not hold the switch at increase the vehicle speed in 4. Take your foot off the accelerator resume/accelerate, unless you want small amounts, move the switch pedal. the vehicle to go faster. brieﬂy to resume/accelerate. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

The cruise symbol on the instrument panel comes on when the cruise control is engaged. Instrument Panel 3-11

Reducing Speed While Using Using Cruise Control on Hills Erasing Speed Memory Cruise Control How well the cruise control works on The cruise control set speed memory • Press and hold T until the hills depends upon the vehicle’s is erased, when the cruise control or desired lower speed is reached, speed, load, and the steepness of the ignition is turned off. then release it. the hills. When going up steep hills, the accelerator pedal might Exterior Lamps • To slow down in very small have to be used to maintain amounts, brieﬂy press T. Each the vehicle speed. When going time this is done, the vehicle downhill, you might have to brake or goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) shift to a lower gear to keep the slower. vehicle speed down. When the brake is applied the cruise Passing Another Vehicle While control will turn off. Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to Ending Cruise Control increase the vehicle speed. When To turn off the cruise control, do The exterior lamps control is located you take your foot off the pedal, the one of the following: vehicle slows down to the cruise on the instrument panel to the left • Step lightly on the brake pedal. control speed set earlier. of the steering wheel. • Move the cruise control switch 9 O (Exterior Lamps): Turn the to . knob to select one of the four • Lightly tap or press the clutch, if exterior lamp positions. the vehicle has a manual transmission. 3-12 Instrument Panel

9 (Off): Turns all exterior lamps To enable automatic lighting, do any Vehicles first sold in Canada with a and the Daytime Running Lamps of the following: manual transmission can turn off the (DRL) off. This is a momentary • Turn the headlamp control from automatic headlamps with the control that returns to AUTO when AUTO to off and release the headlamp control; however, the released. The DRL does not control. It returns to the AUTO parking lamps will remain on. turn off on vehicles first sold in position by itself. ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the Canada, unless the following • Turn the headlamp control from conditions are met: parking lamps, together with the the parking lamp or headlamp following: • The vehicle has an automatic position to AUTO. transmission. • Sidemarker Lamps To disable automatic lighting, do • Taillamps • The gear position is in P (Park). any of the following: • License Plate Lamps • The headlamp switch is turned • Turn the headlamp control from to 9. AUTO to off and release the • Instrument Panel Lights control. It returns back to 2 AUTO (Automatic): Turns the the AUTO position by itself. (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps on and off automatically, headlamps together with the together with the following: • Turn the headlamp control from previously listed lamps and lights. AUTO to the parking lamp or • Sidemarker Lamps headlamp position. The headlamps can be switched • Taillamps from low to high beam by pushing See Automatic Headlamp System the turn signal/multifunction • Parking Lamps on page 3-14 for more information. lever toward the instrument panel. • Instrument Panel Lights Vehicles first sold in Canada with an Due to the momentary control, the automatic transmission cannot turn automatic headlamps may be off automatic headlamps unless the disabled even if the control is in the gear position is in P (Park) and the AUTO position. headlamp switch is turned to O. Instrument Panel 3-13

Headlamps on Reminder Daytime Running When the DRL are on, no other lamps are on. The instrument panel A headlamp reminder chime will Lamps (DRL) will not be lit up either. For sound if the following conditions Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can vehicles first sold in Canada, if are met: make it easier for others to see parking lamps are manually turned • The driver door is open. the front of your vehicle during the on, DRL will stay on. day. Fully functional daytime • Parking lamps or headlamps are When it begins to get dark, the running lamps are required on all manually turned on. automatic headlamp system will vehicles first sold in Canada. • The key is either not in the switch from DRL to the headlamps. The DRL system will come on when ignition switch, or it is in the The regular headlamp system the following conditions are met: LOCK/OFF position of the ignition should be turned on when needed. switch. • The ignition is on. To turn off the DRL, see Exterior The headlamp reminder cannot be • The exterior lamps control is Lamps on page 3-11. turned off if the conditions listed in AUTO. above are met. Vehicles first sold in Canada cannot • The transmission is not in turn off DRL unless certain In the automatic mode, the P (Park), if the vehicle has conditions are met. See Exterior headlamps turn off once the ignition an automatic transmission. Lamps on page 3-11. is in ACC/ACCESSORY. • The light sensor determines it is daytime. 3-14 Instrument Panel

Automatic Headlamp There is a delay in the transition Off-Road Lamps between the daytime and nighttime System operation of the Daytime Running The off-road lamps, if the vehicle When it is dark enough outside, Lamps (DRL) and the automatic has them, provide auxiliary lighting the automatic headlamp system headlamp system so that driving when the vehicle is used off will turn on after the transmission under bridges or bright overhead road. These lamps are not intended has been shifted from P (Park) to street lights does not affect the to be used in place of existing D (Drive). The headlamps, taillamps, system. The DRL and automatic vehicle lighting. The lamps are not sidemarker, parking lamps, roof headlamp system will only be to be used on any public street marker lamps, and the instrument affected when the light sensor or highway and are to be covered panel lights turn on at normal detects a change in lighting lasting when not in use. Check your brightness. The radio lights will longer than the delay. state and local laws before installing become dimmer when the or using any auxiliary lighting. In If the vehicle is started in a dark headlights are off compared to some states it may be necessary to garage, the automatic headlamp when the headlights are on. remove the roof lamps when system will come on immediately. operating the vehicle on the The vehicle has a light sensor Once the vehicle leaves the garage, highway. located on the top of the instrument it will take about one minute for panel. Do not cover the sensor, the automatic headlamp system to or the system will be on whenever change to DRL if it is light the ignition is on. outside. During that delay, the instrument panel cluster may not be The system can turn on the as bright as usual. Make sure the headlamps when driving in a parking instrument panel brightness garage, through a tunnel or when control is in the full bright position. there is overcast weather. This See Instrument Panel Brightness on is normal. page 3-15. Instrument Panel 3-15

turn the fog lamps on or off. An indicator light turns on when the fog lamps are on. Never use the fog lamps in the dark without turning on the headlamps. When the high-beam headlamps are turned on, the fog lamps turn off automatically. When the high-beam headlamps are turned off, the fog lamps come on again. Some localities have laws that The off-road lamps button is located The off-road lamps remain on even require the headlamps to be on the instrument panel below after the ignition is turned off. on along with the fog lamps. the climate controls. The off-road lamp button must be pressed to turn them off. To use the lamps, remove the Instrument Panel covers from the lamps and press Brightness the button to turn them on or off. An Fog Lamps indicator light turns on when the The vehicle has fog lamps that This feature controls the brightness lamps are on. provide better visibility in foggy or of the instrument panel lights. misty conditions. The instrument panel brightness Notice: Turning on the off-road thumbwheel is located next to lamps before removing the The fog lamp button is located in the exterior lamp control. lamp covers could damage the the exterior lamps control. D off-road lamps and the covers. # (Instrument Panel Brightness): Always remove the covers before (Fog Lamps): The headlamps Turn the thumbwheel up or down turning on the off-road lamps. or parking lamps must be on for to brighten or dim the instrument the fog lamps to work. Press # to panel lights and the radio display. 3-16 Instrument Panel

The instrument panel lights, cluster, Dome Lamp Override Exit Lighting and radio display do not dim to complete darkness. Turn the E (Dome Lamp Override): You The interior lamps will come on thumbwheel all the way up to turn can use the dome override when the key is removed from the the dome lamps on. button, located below the exterior ignition. The lamps will not come on lamps control, to set the dome if the dome override button is Dome Lamp and footwell lamps to come pressed in. on automatically when a door is The dome lamps are located in the opened, or to remain off. To turn the Reading Lamps front area of the vehicle. There E is also a dome lamp in the cargo lamps off, press the button in. The reading lamps are located in area of the H3 model only. With the button in this position, the overhead console. the dome lamps will remain off when Press the button located next to Turn the thumbwheel, located next the doors are open. To return the each lamp to turn them on or off. to the exterior lamps control, all lamps to automatic operation, press the way up to turn the dome E again and return it to the out These lamps will not come on and footwell lamps on. In this position. With the button in this with the dome lamps. position, the lamps remain on position, the dome lamps will come whether a door is opened or closed. on when a door is opened. The dome lamp in the cargo area automatically turns off when: • The shift lever is shifted out of P (Park) (automatic transmissions). • The parking brake is released (manual transmissions). Instrument Panel 3-17

Electric Power enough at idle to produce all the this action may be noticeable to the power that is needed for very high driver. If so, a Driver Information Management electrical loads. Center (DIC) message might be The vehicle has Electric Power displayed, such as BATTERY A high electrical load occurs when Management (EPM) that estimates SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY several of the following are on, such the battery’s temperature and VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. as: headlamps, high beams, fog state of charge. It then adjusts the If this message is displayed, it is lamps, rear window defogger, voltage for best performance recommended that the driver reduce climate control fan at high speed, and extended life of the battery. the electrical loads as much as heated seats, engine cooling fans, possible. See DIC Warnings and When the battery’s state of charge trailer loads, and loads plugged into Messages on page 3-37. is low, the voltage is raised accessory power outlets. slightly to quickly bring the charge EPM works to prevent excessive back up. When the state of charge is Battery Run-Down discharge of the battery. It does this high, the voltage is lowered Protection by balancing the generator’s slightly to prevent overcharging. If output and the vehicle’s electrical This feature shuts off the dome the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or needs. It can increase engine lamp if it is left on for more a voltage display on the Driver idle speed to generate more power, than 20 minutes when the ignition is Information Center (DIC), you may whenever needed. It can temporarily in LOCK/OFF. This helps to see the voltage move up or reduce the power demands of prevent the battery from being down. This is normal. If there is a some accessories. drained. problem, an alert will be displayed. Normally, these actions occur in The battery can be discharged steps or levels, without being at idle if the electrical loads are very noticeable. In rare cases at the high. This is true for all vehicles. highest levels of corrective action, This is because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning fast 3-18 Instrument Panel

Accessory Power see your dealer/retailer for additional Ashtray(s) and Cigarette information on accessory power Outlet(s) outlets. Lighter The accessory power outlets can be For vehicles with a removable used to connect auxiliary electrical Notice: Adding any electrical ashtray, it can be placed into the equipment, such as a cellular phone. equipment to the vehicle can cupholder and be removed for damage it or keep other cleaning. There are two accessory power components from working as outlets located under the climate they should. The repairs would Notice: If papers, pins, or other control system. There is also one not be covered by the vehicle ﬂammable items are put in accessory power outlet located in the warranty. Do not use equipment the ashtray, hot cigarettes or rear cargo area (H3 model only). Pull exceeding maximum amperage other smoking materials could down the small cover to access the rating of 20 amperes. Check with ignite them and possibly damage accessory power outlet. your dealer/retailer before the vehicle. Never put ﬂammable adding electrical equipment. items in the ashtray. Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for extended When adding electrical equipment, For vehicles with a lighter, push the periods will drain the battery. be sure to follow the proper lighter down and it will pop up Always unplug electrical installation instructions included with when it is ready to be used. equipment when not in use and the equipment. do not plug in equipment that Notice: Holding a cigarette exceeds the maximum amperage Notice: Improper use of the lighter in while it is heating does rating of 20 amperes. power outlet can cause damage not let the lighter back away from not covered by the warranty. the heating element when it is hot. Certain electrical accessories may Do not hang any type of Damage from overheating can not be compatible with the accessory or accessory bracket occur to the lighter or heating accessory power outlet and could from the plug because the element, or a fuse could be blown. result in blown vehicle or adapter power outlets are designed for Do not hold a cigarette lighter in fuses. If you experience a problem, accessory power plugs only. while it is heating. Instrument Panel 3-19

Climate Controls Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the Climate Control System temperature of the air in the vehicle. The heating, cooling, and ventilation of the vehicle can be controlled with this system. 9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to change the direction of the airﬂow in the vehicle. The airﬂow can be set between modes. To change the current mode, select one of the following:

H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets. A. Temperature Control 9 (Off): Turn the fan control to B. Fan Control this position to turn the fan off. \ (Bi-Level): Air is directed to the C. Air Delivery Mode Control Air still enters the vehicle and instrument panel outlets, and the increases with vehicle speed remaining air to the floor outlets and D. Air Conditioning depending on the mode and the defroster and side window E. Recirculation temperature settings. Turn on the outlets. Cooler air is directed to the F. Rear Window Defogger recirculation mode to stop this upper outlets and warmer air to airflow. the floor outlets. 3-20 Instrument Panel

[ (Floor): Air is directed to the # (Air Conditioning): Press to @ (Recirculation): Press to turn floor outlets, side window outlets, turn the air conditioning system on the recirculation mode on or off. An and defroster. Recirculation is or off. An indicator light comes indicator light comes on when the not available in this mode. on when the air conditioning recirculation is on. This mode is turned on. This system cools and recirculates and helps to quickly cool / (Floor/Defog): This mode clears dehumidifies the air entering the the air inside the vehicle. It can be the windows of fog and moisture. vehicle. used to prevent outside air and odors Air is directed to the windshield, side from entering the vehicle. window, and floor outlets. The The air conditioning will not function system runs the air conditioning if the fan is turned off. If air Recirculation is available in the unless the outside temperature is conditioning is selected with fan off, bi-level and vent modes. This mode near freezing or below. Recirculation the indicator light flashes three cannot be selected while in the floor, is not available in this mode. times and then turns off. floor/defog or defrost modes. If you try to select the recirculation mode, A slight change in engine 0 (Defrost): This mode clears the indicator flashes three times performance may occur when the the windshield of fog or frost indicating it is not available in that air conditioning compressor shuts off mode. When the recirculation mode more quickly. Air is directed to the and turns on again. This is normal. windshield and side window is turned on, the air conditioning The system is designed to make turns on automatically. outlets. The system runs the air adjustments to help with fuel conditioning system unless economy while still maintaining the When it is hot enough outside, the the outside temperature is near or selected temperature. recirculation mode may turn on below freezing. Recirculation is automatically to help improve cooling not available in this mode. The air conditioning system removes performance. The indicator light will moisture from the air, so a small be lit to show this mode is active. If Do not drive the vehicle until all the amount of water might drip windows are clear. the recirculation button is pressed under the vehicle while idling or while in this mode, the light flashes after turning off the engine. This is three times and stays on to indicate normal. that recirculation may not be shut off. Instrument Panel 3-21

Rear Window Defogger Outlet Adjustment Operation Tips The rear window defogger uses a Use the air outlets located in the • Use the recirculation mode for warming grid to remove fog or center and on the side of the maximum air conditioning frost from the rear window when the instrument panel to direct the performance. key is in the ignition and turned airflow. • Clear away any ice, snow or to ON/RUN. This vehicle has air outlets that leaves from the air inlets at the base of the windshield that = (Rear Defogger): Press to turn allow you to adjust the direction and amount of airflow inside the may block the flow of air into the the rear window defogger on or vehicle. off. After the button is first pressed vehicle. Move the louvers up or the rear window defogger stays down to change the direction of the • Use of non-GM approved hood on for about 15 minutes. If turned on airflow. Use the thumbwheel deflectors may adversely affect again, the defogger only runs for under the outlets to change the the performance of the system. about seven and one-half minutes. direction of the airflow from left • Keep the path under the to right. Notice: Do not use anything front seats clear of objects to help sharp on the inside of the rear circulate the air inside of the window. If you do, you could cut vehicle more effectively. or damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar to the defogger grid. 3-22 Instrument Panel

Warning Lights, When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on while Gages, and Indicators driving, or when one of the gages Warning lights and gages can shows there may be a problem, signal that something is wrong check the section that explains what before it becomes serious enough to do. Follow this manual’s advice. to cause an expensive repair or Waiting to do repairs can be replacement. Paying attention to the costly and even dangerous. warning lights and gages could prevent injury. Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some warning lights come on brieﬂy when the engine is started to indicate they are working. Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and warning lights work together to indicate a problem with the vehicle. Instrument Panel 3-23

Instrument Panel Cluster The instrument panel cluster is designed to indicate at a glance how the vehicle is running. It tells how fast the vehicle is going, about how much fuel is being used, and many other things needed to drive safely and economically.

United States 3.7L L5 Automatic Transmission version shown, 5.3L V8, Canada and Manual Transmission similar 3-24 Instrument Panel

Speedometer and Trip Odometer Safety Belt Reminders Odometer The vehicle has a trip odometer that Driver Safety Belt Reminder The speedometer shows the speed indicates how far the vehicle has Light in both miles per hour (mph) and been driven since the trip odometer was last set to zero. When the engine is started, a chime kilometers per hour (km/h). sounds for several seconds to The odometer shows how far the See “Trip Odometer” under DIC remind the driver to fasten their vehicle has been driven, in Operation and Displays on safety belt, unless it is already either miles (used in the United page 3-34 for more information. buckled. States) or kilometers (used in Canada). Tachometer The odometer mileage can be The tachometer displays the checked without the vehicle running engine speed in revolutions per by pressing the trip information minute (rpm). The safety belt light comes on and stem. See “Odometer” under DIC Notice: If the engine is operated stays on for several seconds, Operation and Displays on while the tachometer is in the then ﬂashes for several more. page 3-34 for more information. shaded warning area, the vehicle This chime and light are repeated if If the cluster is replaced the could be damaged, and the the driver safety belt remains new one will automatically detect damages would not be covered unbuckled and the vehicle is in and update the vehicle’s by the vehicle warranty. Do motion. If the driver safety belt is accumulated mileage. not operate the engine with the already buckled, neither the tachometer in the shaded chime nor the light comes on. warning area. Instrument Panel 3-25

Passenger Safety Belt If the passenger safety belt is the pretensioners, the airbag Reminder Light buckled before the engine is started, modules, the wiring and the crash neither the chime nor the light sensing and diagnostic module. Several seconds after the engine is comes on. For more information on the airbag started, a chime sounds for several system, see Airbag System on The front passenger safety belt seconds to remind the front page 1-46. passenger to buckle their safety belt. warning light and chime may turn on This only occurs if the passenger if an object is put on the seat airbag is enabled. See Passenger such as a briefcase, handbag, Sensing System on page 1-54 for grocery bag, laptop or other more information. The passenger electronic device. To turn off the safety belt light, located on the warning light and or chime, remove instrument panel, comes on and the object from the seat or buckle This light comes on when the stays on for several seconds and the safety belt vehicle is started, and ﬂashes for a then ﬂashes for several more. few seconds. The light goes out Airbag Readiness Light when the system is ready. There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The This chime and light are repeated if system checks the airbag’s the passenger remains unbuckled electrical system for malfunctions. and the vehicle is in motion. The light indicates if there is an electrical problem. The system check includes the airbag sensor, 3-26 Instrument Panel

If the airbag readiness light stays on (DIC) message may also come on. When the vehicle is started, the after the vehicle is started or See DIC Warnings and Messages passenger airbag status indicator comes on while driving, the airbag on page 3-37 for more information. will light ON and OFF, or the symbol system may not work properly. Have for on and off, for several seconds the vehicle serviced right away. Passenger Airbag as a system check. Then, after Status Indicator several more seconds, the status { CAUTION indicator will light either ON or OFF, The vehicle has the passenger or either the on or off symbol to sensing system. See Passenger If the airbag readiness light stays let you know the status of the right Sensing System on page 1-54 on after the vehicle is started or front passenger frontal airbag for important safety information. The and seat-mounted side impact comes on while driving, it means instrument panel has a passenger airbag (if equipped). the airbag system might not be airbag status indicator. working properly. The airbags in If the word ON or the on symbol is the vehicle might not inflate in a lit on the passenger airbag status crash, or they could even inflate indicator, it means that the right front without a crash. To help avoid passenger frontal airbag and injury, have the vehicle serviced seat-mounted side impact airbag (if right away. equipped) are enabled (may United States inflate). The airbag readiness light should If the word OFF or the off symbol is flash for a few seconds when lit on the airbag status indicator, the engine is started. If the light it means that the passenger sensing does not come on then, have it fixed system has turned off the right immediately. If there is a problem front passenger frontal airbag and with the airbag system, an Canada seat-mounted side impact airbag (if airbag Driver Information Center equipped). Instrument Panel 3-27

If, after several seconds, both status Charging System Light Up-Shift Light indicator lights remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system. See your dealer/retailer for service. This light comes on brieﬂy when the The vehicle may have an up-shift { CAUTION ignition key is turned, but the light. engine is not running, as a check to When this light comes on, shift to If the airbag readiness light ever show it is working. the next higher gear if weather, comes on and stays on, it means It should go out once the engine road, and traffic conditions allow. that something may be wrong with starts. If it stays on, or comes the airbag system. To help avoid on while driving, there could be a See Manual Transmission Operation injury to yourself or others, have problem with the charging system. A on page 2-22 for more information. the vehicle serviced right away. charging system message in the See Airbag Readiness Light on Driver Information Center (DIC) may Brake System Warning page 3-25 for more information, also appear. See DIC Warnings Light including important safety and Messages on page 3-37 The vehicle’s hydraulic brake information. for more information. This light could indicate that there are problems system is divided into two parts. If with a generator drive belt, or that one part is not working, the there is an electrical problem. other part can still work and stop Have it checked right away. If the the vehicle. For good braking vehicle must be driven a short though, both parts need to be distance with the light on, turn off all working well. the accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner. 3-28 Instrument Panel

If the warning light comes on, there If the light comes on while driving, Antilock Brake System could be a brake problem. Have pull off the road and stop. The brake the brake system inspected pedal might be harder to push, or (ABS) Warning Light right away. it might go closer to the floor. It can take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-40. For vehicles with the Antilock Brake United States Canada System (ABS), this light comes { CAUTION on briefly when the engine is started. This light comes on briefly when the If it does not, have the vehicle ignition key is turned to ON/RUN. The brake system might not be serviced by your dealer/retailer. If If it does not, have it fixed so it working properly if the brake the system is working normally will be ready to warn if there is a system warning light is on. Driving the indicator light will then go off. problem. with the brake system warning If the ABS light stays on, turn When the ignition is on, the brake light on can lead to a crash. If the the ignition off. If the light comes on system warning light comes on light is still on after the vehicle while driving, stop as soon as it when the parking brake is set. See has been pulled off the road and is safely possible and turn the Parking Brake on page 2-28 for carefully stopped, have the ignition off. Then start the engine more information. The light stays on vehicle towed for service. again to reset the system. If the ABS if the parking brake does not light stays on, or comes on again release fully. If it stays on after the while driving, the vehicle needs parking brake is fully released, it service. If the regular brake system means there is a brake problem. warning light is not on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also on, the vehicle does not have antilock Instrument Panel 3-29 brakes and there is a problem with The indicator/warning light flashes Engine Coolant the regular brakes. See Brake while the StabiliTrak or TCS system System Warning Light on page 3-27. is working to control the vehicle Temperature Gage on a low traction surface. For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), see DIC If the TCS warning light comes on Warnings and Messages on and stays on while driving, the page 3-37 for all brake related DIC vehicle needs service. messages. The light comes on when the TCS ® and the StabiliTrak system is United States Canada StabiliTrak /Traction turned off. If the TCS is off, wheel Control System (TCS) spin is not limited. If the StabiliTrak This gage shows the engine coolant Warning Light system is off, the system does temperature. not assist in controlling the vehicle. Turn on the TCS and the If the gage pointer is in the shaded StabiliTrak system and the warning area of the gage, the engine is light turns off. too hot. It means that the engine coolant has overheated. If the ¨ See StabiliTrak System on vehicle has been operating under The StabiliTrak system or the page 4-6 and Traction Control normal driving conditions, pull off the Traction Control System (TCS) System (TCS) on page 4-7 for more road, stop your vehicle and turn indicator/warning light comes information off the engine as soon as possible. on briefly while starting the engine. See Engine Overheating on If it does not, have the vehicle page 5-27 for more information. serviced by your dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator light will then go off. 3-30 Instrument Panel

Tire Pressure Light When the Light Flashes First and Then is On Steady This indicates that there may be a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes This light comes on when the for about a minute and stays ignition is on, but the engine is not The tire pressure light should come on steady for the remainder of the running, as a check to show it on briefly as the engine is started. ignition cycle. This sequence is working. If it does not, have the If it does not, have the vehicle will repeat with every ignition cycle. vehicle serviced by your service by your dealer/retailer. It See Tire Pressure Monitor System dealer/retailer. provides information about tire on page 5-52 for more information. If the check engine light comes on pressures and the Tire Pressure and stays on, while the engine Monitoring System. Malfunction is running, this indicates that there When the Light is On Steady Indicator Lamp is an OBD II problem and service is required. This indicates that one or more of Check Engine Light the tires are significantly Malfunctions often are indicated by underinflated. A computer system called OBD II the system before any problem (On-Board Diagnostics-Second is apparent. Being aware of the light A tire pressure message in the Generation) monitors operation of can prevent more serious damage Driver Information Center (DIC), the fuel, ignition, and emission to the vehicle. This system may accompany the light. See DIC control systems. It ensures assists the service technician in Warnings and Messages on that emissions are at acceptable correctly diagnosing any page 3-37 for more information. levels for the life of the vehicle, malfunction. Stop and check the tires as soon as helping to produce a cleaner it is safe to do so. If underinflated, environment. Notice: If the vehicle is inflate to the proper pressure. continually driven with this light See Tires on page 5-44 for more on, after a while, the emission information. controls might not work as well, Instrument Panel 3-31 the vehicle’s fuel economy might This light comes on during a Light On Steady: An emission not be as good, and the engine malfunction in one of two ways: control system malfunction has been might not run as smoothly. detected on the vehicle. Diagnosis This could lead to costly repairs Light Flashing: A misfire condition and service might be required. that might not be covered by has been detected. A misfire An emission system malfunction the vehicle warranty. increases vehicle emissions and could damage the emission control might be corrected by: Notice: Modifications made to system on the vehicle. Diagnosis • Make sure the fuel cap is fully the engine, transmission, and service might be required. installed. See Filling the Tank exhaust, intake, or fuel system of on page 5-7. The diagnostic the vehicle or the replacement The following can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle: system can determine if the fuel of the original tires with other cap has been left off or than those of the same Tire • Reduce vehicle speed. improperly installed. A loose or Performance Criteria (TPC) can • Avoid hard accelerations. missing fuel cap allows fuel affect the vehicle’s emission to evaporate into the atmosphere. • Avoid steep uphill grades. controls and can cause this light A few driving trips with the cap to come on. Modifications to • If towing a trailer, reduce the properly installed should turn these systems could lead amount of cargo being hauled the light off. to costly repairs not covered by as soon as it is possible. the vehicle warranty. This • If the vehicle has been driven could also result in a failure to If the light continues to flash, when through a deep puddle of pass a required Emission it is safe to do so, stop the water, the vehicle’s electrical Inspection/Maintenance test. See vehicle. Find a safe place to park system might be wet. The Accessories and Modifications the vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at condition is usually corrected on page 5-3. least 10 seconds, and restart the when the electrical system dries engine. If the light is still flashing, out. A few driving trips should follow the previous steps and turn the light off. see your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible. 3-32 Instrument Panel

• Make sure to fuel the vehicle Emissions Inspection and down. The diagnostic system is with quality fuel. Poor fuel Maintenance Programs designed to evaluate critical quality causes the engine not to emission control systems during Some state/provincial and local run as efficiently as designed normal driving. This can take governments have or might begin and may cause: stalling several days of routine driving. If programs to inspect the emission after start-up, stalling when the this has been done and the control equipment on the vehicle. vehicle is changed into gear, vehicle still does not pass the Failure to pass this inspection could misfiring, hesitation on inspection for lack of OBD II prevent getting a vehicle acceleration, or stumbling on system readiness, your registration. acceleration. These conditions dealer/retailer can prepare the might go away once the engine is Here are some things to know to vehicle for inspection. warmed up. help the vehicle pass an inspection: If one or more of these conditions • The vehicle will not pass this Oil Pressure Light occurs, change the fuel brand inspection if the check engine used. It will require at least light is on with the engine { CAUTION one full tank of the proper fuel to running, or if the key is in the turn the light off. ON/RUN and the light is not on. Do not keep driving if the oil See Gasoline Octane on • The vehicle will not pass pressure is low. The engine can page 5-5. this inspection if the OBD II become so hot that it catches fire. Someone could be burned. Check If none of the above have made the (on-board diagnostic) system light turn off, your dealer/retailer determines that critical emission the oil as soon as possible and can check the vehicle. The control systems have not have the vehicle serviced. dealer/retailer has the proper test been completely diagnosed by equipment and diagnostic tools to fix the system. The vehicle would be any mechanical or electrical considered not ready for problems that might have inspection. This can happen if developed. the battery has recently been replaced or if the battery has run Instrument Panel 3-33

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil Security Light Highbeam On Light maintenance can damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil. This light comes on when the For information regarding this light high-beam headlamps are in use. and the vehicle’s security system, see Content Theft-Deterrent See Headlamp High/Low-Beam on page 2-11. Changer on page 3-7 for more information. The oil pressure light should come Cruise Control Light on brieﬂy as the engine is started. Fuel Gage If it does not come on have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is not ﬂowing This light comes on whenever the through the engine properly. The cruise control is set. vehicle could be low on oil and The light goes out when the cruise United States Canada might have some other system control is turned off. See Cruise problem. Control on page 3-9 for more The fuel gage indicates about how information. much fuel there is remaining in the fuel tank. The ignition must be in ON/RUN. 3-34 Instrument Panel

An arrow on the fuel gage indicates Driver Information following section. The DIC trip the side of the vehicle the fuel odometer reset stem is located on door is on. Center (DIC) the instrument panel cluster next to the DIC display. To scroll Here are three things that can The Driver Information Center (DIC) through the available functions, happen but do not indicate a displays information such as the press and release the reset stem. problem with the fuel gage: trip odometer, personalization features, and warning messages. • At the gas station, the gas pump Trip Information The DIC display is located on shuts off before the gage the instrument panel cluster. Odometer reads full. The odometer is automatically • It takes a little more or less fuel DIC Operation and displayed on the DIC when you start to ﬁll up than the gage indicated. Displays the vehicle. The odometer shows the For example, the gage may total distance the vehicle has been have indicated the tank was half The Driver Information Center (DIC) driven in either miles for the United full, but it actually took a little comes on when the ignition is on. States or kilometers for Canada. more or less than half the tank’s If a problem is detected, a warning capacity to ﬁll the tank. Trip Odometer message appears on the display. • The gage moves a little when Pressing and releasing the trip Press and release the reset stem turning a corner or speeding up. odometer reset stem on the until TRIP appears on the DIC display. The trip odometer shows the When the fuel in the fuel tank is low, DIC acknowledges some current warnings or service messages. current distance traveled since the a LOW FUEL message displays last reset of the trip odometer in on the Driver Information Some messages only clear after the required action has been taken. either miles for the United States or Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings kilometers for Canada. and Messages on page 3-37 The DIC has different modes which for more information. can be accessed by pressing the To reset the trip odometer, press trip odometer reset stem on the DIC. and hold the reset stem until These modes are explained in the the display returns to zero. Instrument Panel 3-35

Engine Oil Life System To set your choice for this feature: Automatic Door Locks With the engine off, turn the key to 1. With the engine off, turn the This feature allows you to program ON/RUN and then press the key to ON/RUN, but do not the door locks to a preferred reset stem until OIL LIFE RESET start the engine. setting. appears — alternating between OIL 2. Close all doors so the DOORS To set your choice for this feature: LIFE and RESET — on the DIC message does not display in display. The CHANGE OIL message the DIC. 1. With the engine off, turn the alerts you to change the oil on a key to LOCK/OFF. Do not schedule consistent with your driving 3. Momentarily press and release remove the key from the ignition. the reset stem until the current conditions. Always reset the OIL 2. Press and hold the power LIFE message after an oil change. language is displayed: English (default), Spanish, or French. door lock button until the To reset the message, see DIC display shows the current Engine Oil Life System on 4. To select a different language, door lock mode. page 5-15. press and hold the reset stem until the next language appears. 3. To view the next available mode, In addition to the engine oil life press and hold the reset stem system monitoring the oil life, 5. Repeat Step 4 until the desired until the mode appears. Release additional maintenance is language is displayed. Once the the reset stem and press and recommended in the Maintenance desired language is shown on hold again to view the next mode. Schedule in this manual. See the DIC display, the language Engine Oil on page 5-13 and is set. 4. Once the desired mode is shown on the DIC display, brieﬂy press Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 6. To exit the language selection, for more information. the reset stem to set your momentarily press and release choice. The DIC display then Language the reset stem. All DIC messages clears. will now display in the language This feature allows you to choose selected. the language in which the DIC display shows information. 3-36 Instrument Panel

The following are the available Lock 3: On vehicles with an Hold both buttons until the DIC modes: automatic transmission, this mode display shows the current locks all of the doors when the RKE feedback mode. Lock 1 (default): On vehicles with vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). an automatic transmission, this 3. To view the next available mode, The doors will not automatically press and hold the reset stem mode locks all of the doors when unlock. the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) until the mode appears. Release and unlocks all of the doors when On vehicles with a manual the reset stem and press and the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). transmission, this mode locks all of hold again to view the next mode. the doors when the vehicle 4. Once the desired mode is shown On vehicles with a manual speed is greater than 15 mph transmission, this mode locks all of on the DIC display, briefly press (24 km/h). The doors will not the reset stem to set your choice. the doors when the vehicle speed is automatically unlock. greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) and The DIC display then clears. unlocks all of the doors when the key Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) The following are the available is removed from the ignition. Feedback modes: Lock 2: On vehicles with an This feature allows you to program RFA 1 (default): This mode flashes automatic transmission, this mode the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the parking lamps when you locks all of the doors when the feedback to a preferred setting. press the lock or unlock buttons on vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) and To set your choice for this feature: the RKE transmitter. unlocks the driver’s door when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). 1. With the engine off, turn the RFA 2: This mode flashes the key to LOCK/OFF. Do not parking lamps and sounds the horn On vehicles with a manual remove the key from the ignition. when you press the lock button transmission, this mode locks all of on the RKE transmitter. This mode the doors when the vehicle speed is 2. Press and hold the lock and also flashes the parking lamps greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) and unlock buttons on the RKE when you press the unlock button unlocks the driver’s door when the transmitter at the same time. on the RKE transmitter. key is removed from the ignition. Instrument Panel 3-37

RFA 3: This mode ﬂashes the clear them from the display. Each ABS (Antilock Brake System) parking lamps and sounds the horn message must be acknowledged FAULT when you press the lock or individually. unlock buttons on the RKE This message displays if there is a Some messages cannot be cleared transmitter. problem with the Antilock Brake from the DIC display because System (ABS). Check the ABS as RFA 4: This mode disables RKE they are more urgent. These soon as possible and have the feedback. There will be no feedback messages require action before they vehicle serviced by your when you press the lock or unlock can be cleared. You should take dealer/retailer. See Brakes on buttons on the RKE transmitter. any messages that appear on page 5-30 and Antilock Brake the display seriously and remember System (ABS) Warning Light on DIC Warnings and that clearing the messages only page 3-28 for more information. Messages makes the messages disappear, not Press and release the reset stem to correct the problem. acknowledge the message and Messages are displayed on the DIC The following are the possible clear it from the display. to notify the driver that the status messages that can be displayed of the vehicle has changed and that BRAKES and some information about them. some action may be needed by This message displays if there is a the driver to correct the condition. AC (Air Conditioning) OFF problem with the brakes. Check Multiple messages may appear one This message displays when the brakes as soon as possible and after another. The messages are have the vehicle serviced by displayed for several seconds each. the engine coolant temperature is too high and the air conditioning your dealer/retailer. See Brakes on Some messages may not require in the vehicle needs to be turned off. page 5-30 and Brake System immediate action, but you should See Engine Overheating on Warning Light on page 3-27 for press and release the trip odometer page 5-27 and Climate Control more information. Press and release reset stem to acknowledge that System on page 3-19 for more the reset stem to acknowledge you received the messages and to information. This message displays the message and clear it from the along with the ENG HOT message. display. 3-38 Instrument Panel

CHANGE OIL serviced by your dealer/retailer as turns off. See Malfunction Indicator soon as possible if you suspect Lamp on page 3-30 for more This message displays when the oil the engine is overheating. See information if the light still remains needs to be changed. Check the Engine Overheating on page 5-27 on. Press and release the reset oil in the vehicle as soon as possible for more information. stem to acknowledge the message and have the vehicle serviced by and clear it from the display. your dealer/retailer. See Engine Oil FLUID on page 5-13 and Scheduled HSA (Hill Start Assist) ON Maintenance on page 6-4 for more This message displays if the brake information. Press and release fluid is low. Check the brake This message displays when the Hill the reset stem to acknowledge the fluid as soon as possible and have Start Assist is enabled. See message and clear it from the the vehicle serviced by your Braking on page 4-3 for more display. dealer/retailer. See Brakes on information. page 5-30 for more information. DOORS Press and release the reset stem to LOW FUEL acknowledge the message and This message displays when one or This message displays if the level of clear it from the display. more of the doors is ajar. Check fuel in the vehicle is low. Also check the fuel gage. See Fuel Gage all the doors on the vehicle to make FUEL CAP sure they are closed. The message on page 3-33 for more information. clears from the display after all This message displays if the Refill the fuel tank as soon as of the doors are closed. vehicle’s fuel cap is either off or possible. loose. Pull over as soon as possible ENG (Engine) HOT and check to see if the fuel cap is LOW TIRE secure. You may also see the check This message displays when the On vehicles with the Tire Pressure engine light on the instrument engine coolant temperature is Monitor System (TPMS), this panel cluster. If the check engine hot. Check the engine coolant message displays if a low tire light does come on when the temperature gage. See Engine pressure is detected in any of the fuel cap was loose, it may take a Coolant Temperature Gage vehicle’s tires. Press and release the few driving trips before the light on page 3-29. Have the vehicle reset stem to acknowledge the Instrument Panel 3-39 message and clear it from the REDUCED POWER and have it serviced by your display. The message appears at dealer/retailer. See Full-Time This message displays when the each ignition cycle until the tires are Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-24 for vehicle’s engine power is reduced. inflated to the correct inflation more information about the Reduced engine power can pressure. See Tires on page 5-44 transfer case. Press and release the affect the vehicle’s ability to and Inflation - Tire Pressure on reset stem to acknowledge the accelerate. If this message is on, page 5-51 for more information on message and clear it from the but there is no reduction in tires and the correct inflation display. performance, proceed to your pressures. destination. The performance may SERV (Service) TPM OIL be reduced the next time the vehicle (Tire Pressure Monitor) is driven. The vehicle may be This message displays when the oil driven at a reduced speed while this On vehicles with the Tire Pressure pressure is low. See Oil Pressure message is on, but acceleration Monitor System (TPMS), this Light on page 3-32 and Engine and speed may be reduced. Anytime message displays if a part on the Oil on page 5-13 for more this message stays on, the vehicle TPMS is not working properly. information. should be taken to your The tire pressure light also flashes and then remains on during the PARK BRK (Brake) dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible. Press and release the same ignition cycle. See Tire This message displays when the reset stem to acknowledge Pressure Light on page 3-30. parking brake is set. See Parking the message and clear it from the Several conditions may cause this Brake on page 2-28 and Brake display. message to appear. See Tire System Warning Light on page 3-27 Pressure Monitor Operation on for more information. The message SERV (Service) 4WD page 5-54 for more information. If clears from the display after the (Four-Wheel Drive) the warning comes on and stays on, there may be a problem with the parking brake is released or by This message displays when there TPMS. See your dealer/retailer. pressing and releasing the is a problem with the transfer reset stem. case control system. Check the transfer case on the vehicle 3-40 Instrument Panel

SERV (Service) VEH (Vehicle) SERVICE STAB (Stability) TRACTION FAULT This message displays if the SYS (System) This message displays if there is a vehicle needs service. Have the This message displays if there is a problem with the Traction Control vehicle serviced by your problem with the StabiliTrak® System (TCS). Check the TCS dealer/retailer as soon as possible. system. Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible and have the by your dealer/retailer. See vehicle serviced by your SERVICE CHARG (Charge) StabiliTrak¨ System on page 4-6 for dealer/retailer. See Traction Control SYS (System) more information. System (TCS) on page 4-7 for This message displays if there is a more information. Press and release problem with the battery charging STAB (Stability) the reset stem to acknowledge system. Under certain conditions, SYS (System) OFF the message and clear it from the the battery warning light may This message displays when the display. also turn on in the instrument panel ® StabiliTrak system is turned TURN SIGNAL cluster. See Charging System off. See StabiliTrak¨ System on Light on page 3-27. The battery will page 4-6 for more information. This message displays when the not be charging at an optimal turn signal is on for about 0.75 miles rate and the vehicle will lose the TRAC (Traction) OFF (1.2 km) of travel. Press and ability to enter the fuel economy This message along with the release the reset stem to mode. The vehicle is safe to drive, traction off light displays when the acknowledge the message and however have the electrical Traction Control System (TCS) clear it from the display. system checked by your is turned off by pressing the TCS dealer/retailer. Press and release button. See StabiliTrak¨/Traction the reset stem to acknowledge Control System (TCS) Warning Light the message and clear it from the on page 3-29 and Traction Control display. System (TCS) on page 4-7 for more information. Instrument Panel 3-41

Audio System(s) For more information, see Defensive Setting the Clock Driving on page 4-2. Determine which radio the vehicle The clock can be set with the has and read the following pages to Notice: Contact your ignition on or off. become familiar with its features. dealer/retailer before adding any equipment. To set the clock: 1. Press and hold H until the { CAUTION Adding audio or communication equipment could interfere correct hour and AM or PM displays. Taking your eyes off the road for with the operation of the vehicle’s extended periods could cause a engine, radio, or other systems, 2. Press and hold M until the crash resulting in injury or death and could damage them. correct minute displays. Follow federal rules covering to you or others. Do not give Press DISP (Display) to display the mobile radio and telephone extended attention to time while the ignition is turned off. equipment. entertainment tasks while driving. The vehicle has Retained Accessory This system provides access to Power (RAP). With RAP, the many audio and non audio listings. audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off. To minimize taking your eyes off See Retained Accessory Power the road while driving, do the (RAP) on page 2-17 for more following while the vehicle is parked: information. • Become familiar with the operation and controls of the audio system. • Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset radio stations. 3-42 Instrument Panel

Radio(s)

Single CD Radio Instrument Panel 3-43

or channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY (program type), Channel Number/Channel Name. To change the default display: 1. Press DISP until the desired display is shown. 2. Press and hold DISP for two seconds and the radio produces one beep. The selected display becomes the default. Audio Settings AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press and release to select customized equalization Six-Disc CD Radio settings designed for country/ western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and The vehicle has one of these radios DISP (Display): Press to: classical. To return the bass and as its audio system. treble to the manual mode, press and • Display the time when the release e until MANUAL displays. Playing the Radio ignition is off. AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): P • Switch the display between the (Power/Volume): Press to turn station frequency and the time. This adjusts the radio volume to the system on and off. compensate for road and wind • Retrieve four different categories noise. Turn to increase or to decrease the of information while in XM™ volume. mode related to the current song 3-44 Instrument Panel

To set Automatic Volume: Adjusting the Tone (Bass/Treble) To adjust the Fade: 1. Adjust the volume at the desired To adjust Bass/Treble: Press and release e until FAD or level. Press and release e until BASS or FADE displays 2. Press AUTO VOL to select LOW, TREB displays. • Turn e to move the sound MEDIUM, or HIGH. Each higher setting allows for more volume • Turn e to increase or to toward the front or the rear compensation at faster vehicle decrease the level. speakers. speeds. • To set the fade to the center • To set the Bass or Treble to the e To turn automatic volume off, press center setting, press and hold e setting, press and hold AUTO VOL until AVOL OFF until the radio beeps once. until the radio beeps once. displays. Adjusting the Speakers Using the Radio Tone and Speaker Controls (Balance/Fade) XM™ Satellite Radio Service To adjust all tone and speaker To adjust the Balance: XM is a satellite radio service that is controls to the center setting, press based in the 48 contiguous United Press and release e until BAL and hold e until CEN or ALL States and 10 Canadian provinces. displays. CENTERED displays and the radio XM Satellite Radio has a wide beeps once. • Turn e to move the sound variety of programming and toward the right or the left commercial-free music, speakers. coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. During your trial or when • To adjust the balance to the you subscribe, you will get unlimited center setting, press and hold e access to XM Radio Online for until the radio beeps once. when you are not in the vehicle. A service fee is required to receive the XM service. For more information, Instrument Panel 3-45 contact XM at.xmradio.com or call Selecting an FM/AM/XM Station 2. Press t or u again or one of 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and BAND: Press to select FM1, the pushbuttons to stop xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 FM2, AM, XM1, or XM2. scanning presets. in Canada. Manual Tuning To scan preset stations: 4 (Information) (XM Satellite 1. Press and hold t or u for more Radio Service): Press to display e (Tune): Turn to select a radio than four seconds. PSC or additional information current station. PSCN displays and the radio XM station when 4 is shown on the Automatic Tuning beeps twice. The radio goes to a display. When the complete preset station, plays for a few message has shown, 4 disappears 1-6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press seconds, then goes to the from the display. The last to select preset stations. next preset station. message can be viewed until a new t SEEK u: Press and release to t u message is received or the station 2. Press or again or one of is changed. go to the previous or next station the pushbuttons to stop and stay there. The radio only stops scanning presets. • Parts of the message appear at stations with a strong signal. every three seconds if the Programming Preset Stations entire message cannot be shown Press and hold to scan stations or preset stations. Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, on the display at once. and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2), • Press and release 4 to manually To scan stations: and equalization settings for each station can be programmed on scroll through the message. 1. Press and hold t or u for more the six numbered pushbuttons. • When 4 is pressed and a than two seconds. SCN or SCAN message is not available from the displays and the radio beeps To program presets: station, NO INFO is shown on once. The radio goes to a station, 1. Turn the radio on. the display. plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next station. 2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2. 3-46 Instrument Panel

3. Tune in the desired station. 5. Press CAT to exit program type If the desired program type cannot 4. Press AUTO EQ to select the select mode. If CAT times out be found, NONE or NOT FOUND equalization. and is no longer on the display, displays and the radio returns to the go back to Step 1. previous station. 5. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until If the desired program type cannot Radio Messages the radio beeps once. be found, NONE or NOT FOUND displays and the radio returns to the CAL ERR (Calibration Error): 6. Repeat the steps for each previous station. Displays if the radio is no longer pushbutton. configured properly for the vehicle. To select an XM station by category The vehicle must be returned to Finding a Category (CAT) Station for the Six-Disc CD Radio: your dealer/retailer for service. (XM Satellite Radio Service Only) 1. Press CAT to select a LOC (Locked): Displays when the To select an XM station by category category mode. ® for the Single CD Radio: THEFTLOCK system has locked 2. Turn e to select a category. up. The vehicle must be returned to 1. Press CAT to select a your dealer/retailer for service. category mode. 3. Press t or u to select the first If any error occurs repeatedly or 2. Press CAT repeatedly to change station in the category. cannot be corrected, contact the category. 4. Press t or u to go to another your dealer/retailer. 3. Press t or u to select the first station within the category if Radio Messages for station in the category. category is displayed. If CAT times out and is no longer XM™ Only 4. To go to another station in the on the display, go back to selected category: See XM Radio Messages on Step 1. page 3-51 later in this section for • Press CAT once if the 5. Press CAT to exit program type further detail. category is displayed. select mode. • Press CAT twice if the category is not displayed. Instrument Panel 3-47

Using the CD Player The CD symbol displays when a CD To insert multiple CDs: is inserted, and the track number The CD player can play smaller 1. Turn the ignition on. displays when each new track starts 3 inch (8 cm) single CDs with to play. 2. Press and hold the LOAD button an adapter ring. for two seconds. The radio Six-Disc CD Radio: A CD in the player it stays in the beeps once, the indicator light player when the ignition is turned off. LOAD: Press to load CDs into the flashes, and LOAD # is When the ignition or radio is CD player. displayed. turned on, the CD starts to play To insert one CD: 3. Load a CD once INSERT CD # where it stopped, if it was the last displays and the light stops selected audio source. 1. Turn the ignition on. flashing and illuminates. Insert the CD partway into the slot, Loading a CD 2. Press and release the LOAD button. label side up, until the player To load a CD do one of the pulls the CD in. following: 3. Wait for the indicator light comes on. 4. Repeat step 3 to load the Single CD Radio: remaining CDs. 4. Insert the CD partway into the • To Insert a CD with the ignition slot, label side up, until the To load more than one CD but less on, insert the CD partway into player pulls the CD in. The CD than six, complete Steps 1 the slot, label side up, until begins playing automatically. through 3. When finished loading the player pulls the CD in. The CDs, press the LOAD button CD begins playing automatically. to cancel the loading function. The • To insert a CD with the ignition last CD loaded begins playing automatically. off, press Z (Eject) or the DISP knob first. Playing a CD B (CD): Press to play a CD while listening to the radio. 3-48 Instrument Panel

Single CD Radio: Z (Eject): Press to eject a CD. Press and hold t or u for more Eject can be used with either than four seconds until CD 1 r (Previous): Press to go to the ignition or radio off. SCAN displays and a beep sounds the start of the current track to scan all loaded CDs. Use this Six-Disc Radio: after more than eight seconds have feature to listen to 10 seconds of the played. Press or hold 1 r more r (Reverse): Press to reverse first track of each loaded CD. than once to continue moving within the track. Press t or u again, to stop backward through the CD. scanning. [ (Fast Forward): Press to fast 2 [ (Next): Press to go to the forward within the track. N (Repeat): One track or an next track. Press or hold 2 [ more entire CD can be repeated. than once to continue moving t SEEK u: Press t to go to the • Press and release N to repeat forward through the CD. start of the current track, if more than ten seconds have played. the current track. RPT ON 4 y (Random): Press to hear the displays. Press again to turn off Press u to go to the next track. To tracks in random order. Press 4 repeat play. RPT OFF displays. y continue moving backward or again to turn off random play. forward through the tracks press • Press and hold N for t u two seconds to repeat the t SEEK u: Press to go to the start and hold or , or press multiple times. current CD. RPT ON displays. of the current or the previous Press again to turn off repeat track. Press u to go to the start of Press and hold t or u for more play. RPT OFF displays. the next track. To continue than two seconds until SCAN moving backward or forward through displays and a beep sounds to scan the tracks press and hold t or one CD. The radio goes to the u, or press multiple times. next track, plays for 10 seconds, then goes to the next track. Press t or u again, to stop scanning. Instrument Panel 3-49 y (Random): All the tracks on 2. Remove the CD when REMOVE To save tracks: one CD or all the CDs can be played CD # displays and the light stops R flashing. 1. If S-LIST is displayed, press in random order. to turn it off. Once the CD is removed, the • Press and release y to play indicator light begins flashing 2. Select the desired CD by all the tracks on one CD in again and another CD ejects. pressing the numbered random order. RANDOM ONE pushbutton and then use u to displays. Press again to turn To stop ejecting the CDs, press select the track to be saved. off random play. LOAD or Z. R • Press and hold y for more than The CD is automatically pulled back 3. Press and hold for two seconds to play the tracks into the player if the CD is not two seconds, two beeps on all of the CDs that are loaded removed after 25 seconds. Pushing sound to confirm the track is in random order. A beep a CD back into the player, before saved into memory. sounds and RANDOM ALL the 25 second time period is 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for saving displays. Press again to turn off complete causes the player to sense other selections. random play. an error and the CD player tries to eject the CD several times before S-LIST FULL displays if more than Z (Eject): Press to eject CD(s). stopping. 20 selections are tried to be stored. Z Z Press and release to eject Pressing repeatedly after trying To play tracks: the CD that is currently playing. to push a CD in manually causes the CD players 25-second eject 1. Press R. One beep sounds and To eject multiple CDs: timer to reset. Wait for the timer to S-LIST displays. The recorded 1. Press and hold Z for five expire before pressing Z again. tracks begin to play in the seconds. A beep sounds and the order they were saved R (Song List): The Song indicator light begins to flash 2. Press t or u to go back or and EJECT ALL displays. List feature can save 20 track forward within the saved selections. tracks. 3-50 Instrument Panel

To delete tracks: If a CD is ejected, and the song list If the surface of a CD is dirty, take a R contains saved tracks from that soft, lint free cloth or dampen a 1. Press to turn song list on. CD, those tracks are automatically clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral S-LIST displays. deleted from the song list. Any detergent solution mixed with water, 2. Press either SEEK arrow to tracks saved to the song list again and clean it. Make sure the wiping select the desired track to are added to the bottom of the list. process starts from the center to the edge. be deleted. To end song list mode, press 3. Press and hold R for the R button. One beep sounds Care of the CD Player two seconds. Two beeps and S-LIST is removed from Do not add labels to a CD, it could sound to conﬁrm that the track the display. get caught in the CD player. has been deleted. Care of CDs and the CD Use a marking pen to write on the After a track has been deleted, the Player top of the CD if a description is remaining tracks are moved up needed. Care of CDs the list. When another track is added Do not use CD lens cleaners, they to the song list, the track is added Store CD(s) in their original cases could damage the CD player. to the end of the list. or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. Notice: If a label is added to a To delete the entire song list: The CD player scans the bottom CD, or more than one CD is 1. Press R to turn song list on. of the disc. If the bottom of a CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or S-LIST displays. damaged it may not play properly an attempt is made to play or at all. Do not touch the bottom of scratched or damaged CDs, the 2. Press and hold R for more than a CD while handling it. Pick up CD player could be damaged. four seconds. One beep sounds CDs by grasping the outer edges or While using the CD player, and S-LIST EMPTY displays the edge of the hole and the use only CDs in good condition to conﬁrm that the song list has outer edge. without any label, load one been deleted. CD at a time, and keep the CD Instrument Panel 3-51 player and the loading slot free of • A problem may have occurred No Signal: The system is foreign materials, liquids, and while burning the CD. functioning correctly, but the vehicle debris. is in a location that is blocking • The label could be caught in the the XM signal. When the vehicle is If an error displays, see “CD CD player. moved into an open area, the Messages” later in this section. If the CD is not playing correctly, for signal should return. CD Messages any other reason, try a known good CD. Loading XM: The audio system is CHECK CD: If this message acquiring and processing audio and displays and/or the CD comes out, it If any error occurs repeatedly or if text data. No action is needed. This could be for one of the following an error cannot be corrected, message should disappear shortly. reasons: contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio displays an error message, CH Off Air: This channel is not • The CD player is very hot. When write it down and provide it to your currently in service. Tune in the temperature returns to dealer/retailer when reporting to another channel. normal, the CD should play. the problem. CH Unauth: This channel is • The road is very rough. When blocked or cannot be received with the road becomes smoother, XM Radio Messages your XM Subscription package. the CD should play. XL (Explicit Language Channels): CH Unavail: This previously • The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, These channels, or any others, assigned channel is no longer or upside down. can be blocked by calling assigned. Tune to another station. If • The air is very humid. Wait about 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). this station was one of the presets, an hour and try again. choose another station for that Updating: The encryption code in preset button. • The format of the CD might not the receiver is being updated, be compatible. and no action is required. This No Info: No artist, song title, process should take no longer than category, or text information is 30 seconds. available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. 3-52 Instrument Panel

Not Found: There are no channels Navigation/Radio System Noise: Keep interior noise levels to available for the selected category. a minimum. The system may not The system is working properly. For vehicles with a navigation recognize voice commands if there radio system, see the separate is too much background noise. XM Locked: The XM receiver in the Navigation System manual. vehicle may have previously been When to Speak: A short tone in another vehicle. For security Bluetooth® sounds after the system responds purposes, XM receivers cannot be indicating when it is waiting for swapped between vehicles. If Vehicles with a Bluetooth system a voice command. Wait until this message is received after can use a Bluetooth capable the tone and then speak. having the vehicle serviced, check cell phone with a Hands Free Proﬁle with your dealer/retailer. to make and receive phone calls. How to Speak: Speak clearly in a The system can be used while calm and natural voice. Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this the key is in ON/RUN or message will alternate with the XM ACC/ACCESSORY position. The Audio System Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label range of the Bluetooth system When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth is needed to activate the service. can be up to 30 ft. (9.1 m). Not all system, sound comes through Unknown: If this message is phones support all functions, the vehicle’s front audio system received when tuned to channel 0, and not all phones are guaranteed speakers and overrides the audio there may be a receiver fault. to work with the in-vehicle system. Use the audio system Consult with your dealer/retailer. Bluetooth system. See volume knob, during a call, gm.com/bluetooth for more to change the volume level. The Chk XMRcvr: If this message does information on compatible phones. adjusted volume level remains not clear within a short period of in memory for later calls. To prevent time, the receiver may have a fault. Voice Recognition missed calls, a minimum volume Consult with your dealer/retailer. The Bluetooth system uses voice level is used if the volume is turned recognition to interpret voice down too low. commands to dial phone numbers and name tags. Instrument Panel 3-53

Bluetooth Controls Pairing Information: Pairing a Phone Use the g button, located on the • Up to five cell phones can be 1. Press and release g. The driver side of the instrument paired to the in-vehicle system responds with “Ready” panel near the headlamp controls, Bluetooth system. followed by a tone. to operate the in-vehicle Bluetooth • The pairing process is disabled 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system system. when the vehicle is moving. responds with “Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone. g (Push To Talk): Press to • The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links with the first answer incoming calls, to confirm 3. Say “Pair”. The system responds available paired cell phone in the system information, and to start with instructions and a four digit order the phone was paired. speech recognition. PIN number. The PIN number • Only one paired cell phone can will be used in Step 4. Pairing be connected to the in-vehicle 4. Start the pairing process on the A Bluetooth enabled cell phone Bluetooth system at a time. cell phone that will be paired to must be paired to the in-vehicle • Pairing should only need to be the vehicle. Reference the Bluetooth system first and then completed once, unless cell phone manufacturers user connected to the vehicle before it changes to the pairing guide for information on this can be used. See the cell phone information have been made or process. manufacturers user guide for the phone is deleted. Locate the device named Bluetooth functions before pairing “General Motors” in the list on the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a Different Phone the cellular phone and follow the is not connected, calls will be instructions on the cell phone ® later in this section. made using OnStar Hands-Free to enter the four digit PIN number Calling, if available. Refer to that was provided in Step 3. the OnStar owner’s guide for more information. 3-54 Instrument Panel

5. The system prompts for a name 3. Say “List”. The system lists all 5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. for the phone. Use a name that the paired Bluetooth devices. The system responds with “OK, best describes the phone. If a phone is connected to deleting ”. This name will be used to the vehicle, the system will say indicate which phone is “Is connected” after the Linking to a Different Phone connected. The system then connected phone. 1. Press and release g. The conﬁrms the name provided. Deleting a Paired Phone system responds with “Ready” 6. The system responds with followed by a tone. 1. Press and release g. The “ has been 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system successfully paired” after the system responds with “Ready” responds with “Bluetooth pairing process is complete. followed by a tone. ready” followed by a tone. 7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system 3. Say “Change phone”. The additional phones to be paired. responds with “Bluetooth system responds with “Please ready” followed by a tone. Listing All Paired and Connected wait while I search for other Phones 3. Say “Delete”. The system asks phones”. which phone to delete followed 1. Press and release g. The • If another phone is found, the by a tone. response will be “ is now connected”. followed by a tone. deleted. If the phone name is • If another phone is not found, 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system unknown, use the “List” the original phone remains responds with “Bluetooth command for a list of all paired connected. ready” followed by a tone. phones. The system responds with “Would you like to delete ? Yes or No” followed by a tone Instrument Panel 3-55

Storing Name Tags 3. Say the complete phone number 5. Say a name tag for the phone to be stored at once with no number. The name tag is The system can store up to thirty pauses. recorded and the system phone numbers as name tags responds with “About to store that are shared between the • If the system recognizes the . Does that Bluetooth and OnStar systems. number it responds with “OK, Storing” and repeats the sound OK?”. The system uses the following phone number. • If the name tag does not commands to store and retrieve sound correct, say “No” phone numbers: • If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone number, and repeat Step 5. • Store it responds with “Store” and • If the name tag sounds • Digit Store repeats the number followed correct, say “Yes” and • Directory by “Please say yes or the name tag is stored. After no”. If the number is correct, the number is stored the Using the Store Command say “Yes”. If the number system returns to the is not correct, say “No”. The main menu. The store command allows a phone system will ask for the number number to be stored without to be re-entered. Using the Digit Store Command entering the digits individually. 4. After the system stores the The digit store command allows 1. Press and release g. The phone number, it responds a phone number to be stored system responds with “Ready” with “Please say the name tag” by entering the digits individually. followed by a tone. followed by a tone. 1. Press and release g. The 2. Say “Store”. The system system responds with “Ready” responds with “Store, number followed by a tone. please” followed by a tone. 2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with “Please say the ﬁrst digit to store” followed by a tone. 3-56 Instrument Panel

3. Say the ﬁrst digit to be stored. • If the name tag does not Deleting Name Tags The system will repeat back sound correct, say “No” The system uses the following the digit it heard followed by a and repeat Step 5. commands to delete name tags: tone. Continue entering digits • If the name tag sounds until the number to be stored is • Delete correct, say “Yes” and complete. the name tag is stored. After • Delete all name tags • If an unwanted number is the number is stored the Using the Delete Command recognized by the system, system returns to the say “Clear” at any time main menu. The delete command allows speciﬁc to clear the last number. name tags to be deleted. Using the Directory Command • To hear all of the numbers To use the delete command: recognized by the system, The directory command lists say “Verify” at any time all of the name tags stored by the 1. Press and release g. The and the system will system. To use the directory system responds with “Ready” repeat them. command: followed by a tone. 4. After the complete number has 1. Press and release g. The 2. Say “Delete”. The system been entered, say “Store”. The system responds with “Ready” responds with “Delete, please system responds with “Please followed by a tone. say the name tag” followed by say the name tag” followed by a tone. 2. Say “Directory”. The system a tone. responds with “Directory” 5. Say a name tag for the phone and then plays back all of the number. The name tag is stored name tags. When the list recorded and the system is complete, the system responds with “About to store returns to the main menu. . Does that sound OK?”. Instrument Panel 3-57

3. Say the name tag to be deleted. To use the delete all name tags Using the Dial Command The system responds with command: 1. Press and release g. The “Would you like to delete, ? Please say yes or no”. 1. Press and release . The system responds with “Ready” system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. • If the name tag is correct, say followed by a tone. “Yes” to delete the name tag. 2. Say “Dial”. The system responds The system responds with 2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The with “Dial using . “OK, deleting , system responds with “You are “Number please” followed by returning to the main menu.” about to delete all name tags a tone. stored in your phone directory • If the name tag is incorrect, 3. Say the entire number without and your route destination pausing. say “No”. The system directory. Are you sure you want responds with “No. OK, let’s to do this? Please say yes or no.” • If the system recognizes the try again, please say the number, it responds with name tag.” • Say “Yes” to delete all “OK, Dialing” and dials name tags. the number. Using the Delete All Name Tags • Say “No” to cancel the function Command • If the system does not and return to the main menu. recognize the number, The delete all name tags command Making a Call it conﬁrms the numbers deletes all stored phone book followed by a tone. If the name tags and route name tags for Calls can be made using the number is correct, say “Yes”. OnStar (if present). following commands: The system responds with • Dial “OK, Dialing” and dials the number. If the number is • Digit Dial not correct, say “No”. The • Call system will ask for the number to be re-entered. • Re-dial 3-58 Instrument Panel

Using the Digit Dial Command • To hear all of the numbers with “OK, calling, ” and dials the number. If 1. Press and release g. The recognized by the system, say “Verify” at any time and the the name tag is not correct, system responds with “Ready” system will repeat them. say “No”. The system will ask followed by a tone. for the name tag to be 2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system Using the Call Command re-entered. responds with “Digit dial 1. Press and hold g for Once connected, the person called using , please say two seconds. The system will be heard through the audio the ﬁrst digit to dial” followed responds with “Ready” speakers. by a tone. followed by a tone. Using the Re-dial Command 3. Say the digits to be dialed one at 2. Say “Call”. The system responds a time. Following each digit, the with “Call using . 1. Press and release g. The system will repeat back the Please say the name tag” system responds with “Ready” digit it heard followed by a tone. followed by a tone. followed by a tone. 4. Continue entering digits until the 3. Say the name tag of the person 2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The number to be dialed is complete. to call. system responds with “Re-dial After the whole number has using ” and been entered, say “Dial”. • If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it dials the last number called from The system responds with “OK, the connected Bluetooth Dialing” and dials the number. responds with “OK, calling, ” and dials phone. • If an unwanted number the number. Once connected, the person called is recognized by the system, will be heard through the audio say “Clear” at any time to • If the system is unsure it speakers. clear the last number. recognizes the right name tag, it conﬁrms the name tag followed by a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system responds Instrument Panel 3-59

Receiving a Call Three-Way Calling Muting a Call When an incoming call is received, Three-Way Calling must be During a call, all sounds from inside the audio system mutes and a supported on the Bluetooth phone the vehicle can be muted so that ring tone is heard in the vehicle. and enabled by the wireless service the person on the other end of Press g to answer the call. carrier to work. the call cannot hear them. g Call Waiting 1. While on a call press . The To Mute a Call system responds with “Ready” 1. Press g. The system responds Call waiting must be supported on followed by a tone. the Bluetooth phone and enabled by with “Ready” followed by a tone. the wireless service carrier to work. 2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with “Three-way 2. Say “Mute Call”. The system • Press g to answer an incoming call, please say dial or call”. responds with “Call muted”. call when another call is active. 3. Use the dial or call command to To Cancel Mute The original call is placed on hold. dial the number of the third party 1. Press g. The system responds g to be called. • Press again to return to the with “Ready” followed by a tone. original call. 4. Once the call is connected, press 2. After the tone, say “Mute • To ignore the incoming call, g to link all the callers together. Call”. The system responds with continue with the original call with “Resuming call”. no action. Ending a Call To end a call: Transferring a Call 1. Press g. The system responds Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle Bluetooth system with “Ready” followed by a tone. and the cell phone. 2. Say “End Call”. The call is then ended. 3-60 Instrument Panel

To Transfer Audio to the Cell Voice Pass-Thru Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Phone Voice Pass-Thru allows access to (DTMF) Tones During a call with the audio in the the voice recognition commands on The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can vehicle: the cell phone. See the cell send numbers and numbers phone manufacturers user guide to 1. Press g. The system responds stored as name tags during a call. see if the cell phone supports This is used when calling a with “Ready” followed by a tone. this feature. This feature can be menu driven phone system. Account 2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system used to verbally access contacts numbers can be programmed into responds with “Transferring call” stored in the cell phone. the phonebook for retrieval and the audio will switch from g during menu driven calls. the vehicle to the cell phone. 1. Press and hold for two seconds. The system Sending a Number During a Call To Transfer Audio to the responds with “Ready” followed g In-Vehicle Bluetooth System by a tone. 1. Press . The system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. The cellular phone must be paired 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system and connected with the Bluetooth responds with “Bluetooth 2. Say “Dial”. The system responds system before a call can be ready” followed by a tone. with “Say a number to send transferred. The connection process tones” followed by a tone. 3. Say “Voice”. The system can take up to two minutes after responds with “OK, accessing 3. Say the number to send. the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ”. ACC/ACCESSORY position. • If the system clearly • The cell phone’s normal recognizes the number it During a call with the audio on the prompt messages will responds with “OK, Sending cell phone, press g for more go through its cycle according Number” and the dial than two seconds. The audio to the phone’s operating tones are sent and the call switches from the cell phone to the instructions. continues. vehicle. Instrument Panel 3-61

• If the system is not sure it • If the system is not sure it Other Information recognized the number recognized the name tag The Bluetooth® word mark and properly, it responds “Dial properly, it responds logos are owned by the Bluetooth® Number, Please say yes or “Dial . Please say SIG, Inc. and any use of such no?” followed by a tone. If the yes or no?” followed by a marks by General Motors is under number is correct, say tone. If the name tag is license. Other trademarks and “Yes”. The system responds correct, say “Yes”. The trade names are those of their with “OK, Sending Number” system responds with “OK, respective owners. and the dial tones are Sending ” and the sent and the call continues. dial tones are sent and the This device complies with Part 15 of call continues. the FCC Rules. Operation is Sending a Stored Name Tag subject to the following two During a Call Clearing the System conditions: 1. Press g. The system responds Unless information is deleted out of 1. This device may not cause with “Ready” followed by a tone. the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, harmful interference. it will be retained indeﬁnitely. This 2. Say “Send name tag.” The 2. This device must accept any includes all saved name tags in system responds with “Say interference received, including the phonebook and phone pairing a name tag to send tones” interference that may cause information. For information on followed by a tone. undesired operation. how to delete this information, see 3. Say the name tag to send. the above sections on Deleting • If the system clearly a Paired Phone and Deleting recognizes the name tag it Name Tags. responds with “OK, Sending ” and the dial tones are sent and the call continues. 3-62 Instrument Panel

This device complies with RSS-210 When the when the ignition is in the storms and power lines interfere of Industry Canada. Operation is off position, a blinking red light on with radio reception. When this subject to the following two the upper left side of the radio happens, try reducing the treble on conditions: indicates that THEFTLOCK® the radio. is armed. 1. This device may not cause FM Stereo interference. Radio Reception FM signals only reach about 2. This device must accept any 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Frequency interference and static interference received, including Although the radio has a built-in can occur during normal radio interference that may cause electronic circuit that automatically reception if items such as cell phone undesired operation of the works to reduce interference, chargers, vehicle convenience device. some static can occur, especially accessories, and external electronic around tall buildings or hills, causing Changes or modiﬁcations to this devices are plugged into the the sound to fade in and out. system by other than an authorized accessory power outlet. If there is service facility could void interference or static, unplug the item XM™ Satellite Radio Service authorization to use this equipment. from the accessory power outlet. XM Satellite Radio Service gives Theft-Deterrent Feature AM digital radio reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous ® The range for most AM stations is THEFTLOCK is designed to United States, and in Canada. greater than for FM, especially discourage theft of the vehicle’s radio Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills at night. The longer range can cause by learning a portion of the Vehicle can interfere with satellite radio station frequencies to interfere Identiﬁcation Number (VIN). The signals, causing the sound to fade with each other. For better radio radio does not operate and LOCKED in and out. In addition, traveling reception, most AM radio stations displays if the radio is stolen or or standing under heavy foliage, boost the power levels during moved to a different vehicle. bridges, garages, or tunnels the day, and then reduce these may cause loss of the XM signal for levels during the night. Static a period of time. can also occur when things like Instrument Panel 3-63

Cellular Phone Usage XM™ Satellite Radio Cellular phone usage may cause Antenna System interference with the vehicle’s radio. The XM Satellite Radio antenna is This interference may occur when located on the roof of the vehicle. making or receiving phone calls, Keep the antenna clear of charging the phone’s battery, obstructions for clear radio or simply having the phone on. This reception. interference causes an increased level of static while listening to If the vehicle has a sunroof, the the radio. If static is received while performance of the XM system may listening to the radio, unplug the be affected if the sunroof is open. cellular phone and turn it off. Fixed Mast Antenna The ﬁxed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged as long as it is securely attached to the base. If the mast becomes slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it. Occasionally check to make sure the antenna is tightened to its base. If tightening is required, tighten by hand. until fully seated plus one quarter turn. 3-64 Instrument Panel

✍ NOTES Driving Your Vehicle 4-1

Driving at Night ...... 4-28 Your Driving, the Driving Your Driving in Rain and on Vehicle Wet Roads ...... 4-29 Road, and the Vehicle Before Leaving on a Long Trip ...... 4-30 Driving for Better Fuel Highway Hypnosis ...... 4-30 Economy Your Driving, the Road, Hill and Mountain Roads ...4-30 Winter Driving ...... 4-31 Driving habits can affect fuel and the Vehicle If Your Vehicle is mileage. Here are some driving tips Driving for Better Fuel Stuck in Sand, Mud, to get the best fuel economy Economy ...... 4-1 Ice, or Snow ...... 4-33 possible. Defensive Driving ...... 4-2 Rocking Your Vehicle to • Avoid fast starts and accelerate Drunk Driving ...... 4-2 Get It Out ...... 4-34 smoothly. Control of a Vehicle ...... 4-3 Recovery Loops ...... 4-34 • Brake gradually and avoid abrupt Braking ...... 4-3 Loading the Vehicle ...... 4-35 Antilock Brake Truck-Camper Loading stops. System (ABS) ...... 4-5 Information ...... 4-39 • Avoid idling the engine for long Braking in Emergencies ...... 4-6 periods of time. StabiliTrak® System ...... 4-6 Towing • When road and weather Traction Control Towing Your Vehicle ...... 4-40 System (TCS) ...... 4-7 Recreational Vehicle conditions are appropriate, use Locking Rear Axle ...... 4-8 Towing ...... 4-40 cruise control, if equipped. Locking Front Axle ...... 4-9 Towing a Trailer ...... 4-42 • Always follow posted speed limits Steering ...... 4-10 Trailer or drive more slowly when Off-Road Recovery ...... 4-11 Recommendations ...... 4-53 conditions require. Passing ...... 4-12 • Keep vehicle tires properly Loss of Control ...... 4-12 Off-Road Driving ...... 4-13 inﬂated. Assist Steps ...... 4-28 4-2 Driving Your Vehicle

• Combine several trips into a Drunk Driving single trip. { CAUTION • Replace the vehicle’s tires with Assume that other road users { CAUTION the same TPC Spec number (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other molded into the tire’s sidewall drivers) are going to be careless Drinking and then driving is very near the size. and make mistakes. Anticipate dangerous. Your reﬂexes, • Follow recommended scheduled what they might do and be ready. perceptions, attentiveness, and maintenance. In addition: judgment can be affected by even • Allow enough following a small amount of alcohol. You Defensive Driving distance between you and can have a serious — or even the driver in front of you. fatal — collision if you drive after Defensive driving means “always drinking. Do not drink and drive or • Focus on the task of driving. expect the unexpected.” The ride with a driver who has been ﬁrst step in driving defensively is to Driver distraction can cause drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if wear your safety belt — See collisions resulting in injury or you are with a group, designate a Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone possible death. These simple driver who will not drink. on page 1-11. defensive driving techniques could save your life. Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a global tragedy. Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and attentiveness. Driving Your Vehicle 4-3

Police records show that almost been drinking — driver or Braking 40 percent of all motor passenger — is in a crash, that vehicle-related deaths involve person’s chance of being killed or See Brake System Warning Light on alcohol. In most cases, these permanently disabled is higher than page 3-27. deaths are the result of someone if the person had not been Braking action involves perception who was drinking and driving. drinking. time and reaction time. Deciding In recent years, more than to push the brake pedal is 17,000 annual motor vehicle-related Control of a Vehicle perception time. Actually doing deaths have been associated it is reaction time. with the use of alcohol, with about The following three systems 250,000 people injured. help to control the vehicle while Average reaction time is about driving — brakes, steering, three-fourths of a second. But that For persons under 21, it is and accelerator. At times, as when is only an average. It might be against the law in every U.S. state driving on snow or ice, it is easy less with one driver and as long as to drink alcohol. There are good to ask more of those control systems two or three seconds or more medical, psychological, and than the tires and road can with another. Age, physical developmental reasons for provide. Meaning, you can lose condition, alertness, coordination, these laws. control of the vehicle. See Traction and eyesight all play a part. So The obvious way to eliminate the Control System (TCS) on page 4-7. do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a leading highway safety problem Adding non-dealer/non-retailer second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph is for people never to drink alcohol accessories can affect vehicle (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). and then drive. performance. See Accessories and That could be a lot of distance in an Modiﬁcations on page 5-3. Medical research shows that emergency, so keeping enough alcohol in a person’s system can space between the vehicle make crash injuries worse, and others is important. especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who has 4-4 Driving Your Vehicle

And, of course, actual stopping the pedal could get harder to push Assist. When the system activates, distances vary greatly with the down. If the vehicle loses electrical a chime will sound and the HSA surface of the road, whether it is power, there will still be some ON message will be displayed. pavement or gravel; the condition of power brake assist but it will be Letting off the brake pedal slightly or the road, whether it is wet, dry, or used when the brake is applied. applying the accelerator pedal to icy; tire tread; the condition of Once the power assist is used up, it disengage Hill Start Assist gives the the brakes; the weight of the vehicle; can take longer to stop, the brake driver two seconds to pull forward and the amount of brake force pedal will be harder to push, or back up before the vehicle applied. and you might experience longer starts to roll. Lightly ease off the pedal travel. Avoid needless heavy brake pedal to disengage Hill braking. Some people drive in Adding non-dealer/non-retailer Start Assist. The brakes will spurts — heavy acceleration accessories can affect vehicle automatically be held for a maximum followed by heavy braking — rather performance. See Accessories and of two seconds while the driver than keeping pace with traffic. Modiﬁcations on page 5-3. switches from applying the brakes This is a mistake. The brakes might to pushing the accelerator pedal. not have time to cool between Hill Start Assist When Hill Start Assist is active, the hard stops. The brakes will wear out This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist driver might experience a “hard much faster with a lot of heavy (HSA) feature, which may be pedal.” This is normal and does not braking. Keeping pace with useful when the vehicle is stopped affect safe brake operation. the traffic and allowing realistic on a grade. This feature is following distances eliminates a lot designed to prevent the vehicle from On steeper hills, Hill Start Assist will of unnecessary braking. That rolling, either forward or rearward, only activate if the driver tries to means better braking and longer during vehicle drive off. After move the vehicle up the hill. It will brake life. the vehicle is stopped on an incline, not activate if the vehicle is in a drive gear and facing downhill or if If the vehicle ever loses electrical push the brake pedal completely the vehicle is facing uphill and power while it is being driven, brake to the ﬂoor to activate Hill Start in R (Reverse). normally but do not pump the brakes. If the brakes are pumped, Driving Your Vehicle 4-5

Antilock Brake Let us say the road is wet and you Remember: ABS does not change are driving safely. Suddenly, an the time needed to get a foot System (ABS) animal jumps out in front of you. You up to the brake pedal or always This vehicle has the Antilock Brake slam on the brakes and continue decrease stopping distance. If you System (ABS), an advanced braking. Here is what happens get too close to the vehicle in electronic braking system that will with ABS: front of you, there will not be enough help prevent a braking skid. time to apply the brakes if that A computer senses that the wheels vehicle suddenly slows or stops. When the engine is started and the are slowing down. If one of the Always leave enough room up vehicle begins to drive away, wheels is about to stop rolling, the ahead to stop, even with ABS. ABS checks itself. A momentary computer will separately work motor or clicking noise might the brakes at each wheel. Using ABS be heard while this test is going on. ABS can change the brake pressure This is normal. Do not pump the brakes. Just hold to each wheel, as required, faster the brake pedal down ﬁrmly and than any driver could. This can help let antilock work. The brakes might the driver steer around the vibrate or some noise might be obstacle while braking hard. heard, but this is normal. As the brakes are applied, the If there is a problem with ABS, this computer keeps receiving updates warning light stays on. See on wheel speed and controls braking Antilock Brake System (ABS) pressure accordingly. Warning Light on page 3-28. 4-6 Driving Your Vehicle

Braking in Emergencies the brake pedal as the driving to insure there are no problems. situation dictates The Brake Assist The system may be heard or ABS allows the driver to steer feature will automatically disengage felt while it is working. This is normal and brake at the same time. In many when the brake pedal is released and does not mean there is a emergencies, steering can help or brake pedal pressure is quickly problem with the vehicle. more than even the very best decreased. braking. If cruise control is being used when ® StabiliTrak activates, the cruise Brake Assist StabiliTrak System control automatically disengages. This vehicle has a Brake Assist The vehicle has a vehicle stability The cruise control can be feature designed to assist the driver enhancement system called re-engaged when road conditions in stopping or decreasing vehicle StabiliTrak. It is an advanced allow. See Cruise Control on speed in emergency driving computer controlled system that page 3-9. conditions. This feature uses the assists the driver with directional If there is a problem detected with stability system hydraulic brake control of the vehicle in difficult StabiliTrak, a SERVICE STAB control module to supplement the driving conditions. SYS message displays on the Driver power brake system under StabiliTrak activates when the Information Center (DIC). See conditions where the driver has computer senses a discrepancy DIC Warnings and Messages on quickly and forcefully applied between the intended path and the page 3-37 for more information. the brake pedal in an attempt to direction the vehicle is actually When this message is displayed, the quickly stop or slow down the traveling. StabiliTrak selectively system is not working. Adjust your vehicle. The stability system applies braking pressure at any one driving accordingly. hydraulic brake control module of the vehicle’s brakes to assist increases brake pressure at each StabiliTrak comes on automatically the driver with keeping the vehicle whenever the vehicle is started corner of the vehicle until the on the intended path. ABS activates. Minor brake pedal and resets itself at each ignition pulsations or pedal movement When the vehicle is started and cycle. However, when the transfer during this time is normal and the begins to move, the system case is placed in Four-Wheel-Low driver should continue to apply performs several diagnostic checks Lock mode, StabiliTrak is Driving Your Vehicle 4-7 automatically disabled. See To Turn off TCS and StabiliTrak, TCS can operate on dry roads Full-Time Four-Wheel Drive on press and hold the TCS/StabiliTrak under some conditions. When this page 2-24 for more information. It is button until the STAB SYS OFF happens, the system may be recommended to leave the system message displays on the DIC. Press heard working or a reduction in on for normal driving conditions, and release the TCS/StabiliTrak acceleration may be noticed. This is but it may be necessary to turn the button again to turn StabiliTrak normal and does not mean there system off if the vehicle is stuck back on. See “Traction Control is a problem with the vehicle. in sand, mud, ice, or snow, and it is System (TCS)”, following, for more Examples of these conditions necessary to “rock” the vehicle to information on turning TCS off include hard acceleration in a turn, attempt to free it. See If Your and on. an abrupt upshift or downshift of Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, the transmission or driving on rough or Snow on page 4-33. Traction Control roads. System (TCS) If cruise control is being used when The vehicle has a Traction Control TCS begins to limit wheel spin, System (TCS) that limits wheel the cruise control automatically spin. This is especially useful disengages. The cruise control can be re-engaged when road To turn the system off, press and in slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it senses conditions allow. See Cruise Control hold the TCS/StabiliTrak button until on page 3-9 for more information. the traction off light comes on. that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. TRACTION FAULT appears on When this happens, TCS reduces the Driver information Center (DIC) engine power. The system may when a TCS or antilock brake be heard or felt while it is working. system problem has been detected This is normal and does not and the vehicle needs service. This light comes on steady when mean there is a problem with the When this message is on, the TCS has been turned off. This light vehicle. system will not limit wheel spin. ﬂashes when StabiliTrak is active. 4-8 Driving Your Vehicle

Adjust your driving accordingly. See Locking Rear Axle DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-37 for more information. For vehicles with this feature, additional traction can be obtained It is recommended to leave from the rear wheels when the system on for normal driving When TCS has been turned off, this traveling in off-road situations such conditions, but it may be necessary light comes on steady and TRAC as mud, snow, sand, steep hills to turn the system off if the OFF appears on the DIC. This light and uneven terrain. vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice, or ﬂashes when TCS is active. snow, and it is necessary to “rock” the vehicle to attempt to free Press and release the it. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck TCS/StabiliTrak button again to turn in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow the system back on. The TRAC on page 4-33 for more information. OFF message then goes off. TCS automatically comes on whenever The button used to turn this feature the vehicle is started and resets on or off is located on the itself at each ignition cycle. instrument panel. Adding non-dealer/non-retailer To lock the rear axle, do the accessories can affect the vehicle’s following: To turn the system off, press and performance. See Accessories 1. Place the transfer case in the release the TCS/StabiliTrak® button. and Modiﬁcations on page 5-3. 4LO Lock mode. This is the only mode which will allow the rear axle to lock. See Full-Time Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-24 for more information regarding the transfer case and 4LO Lock mode. Driving Your Vehicle 4-9

2. Press the rear axle locking Notice: If the vehicle’s axle is Before the front axle can be locked, button with the vehicle moving locked while driving on pavement, the rear axle must be locked. less than 16 mph (26 km/h). the drivetrain could be damaged. To lock the front and rear axles: Repairs would not be covered The light in the button stops ﬂashing by the vehicle warranty. Do 1. Place the transfer case in and remains illuminated when the not use the locking axle on the 4LO Lock mode. This is the rear axle is locked. pavement. If four-wheel drive is only mode which allows the Notice: If you try to lock the axle needed when traveling on front and rear axles to lock. See while the vehicle is stuck and pavement, use only 4HI. Full-Time Four-Wheel Drive the tires are spinning, the on page 2-24 for more vehicle’s drivetrain could be Locking Front Axle information regarding the transfer damaged. The repairs would not case and 4LO Lock mode. For vehicles with this feature, the be covered by the vehicle 2. Press the rear axle locking warranty. Always lock the axle locking front axle, used with the locking rear axle, can give the button with the vehicle moving before attempting situations less than 16 mph (26 km/h). and/or navigating terrain which vehicle additional traction when could possibly cause the vehicle traveling in off-road situations such 3. Wait for the light in the button to become stuck. as mud, snow, sand, steep hills to stop ﬂashing and remain and uneven terrain. illuminated to show that the rear The locking rear axle will be axle is locked. disengaged when the wheel speed 4. Press the front axle locking is greater than 40 mph (64 km/h), button with the vehicle stopped if the vehicle’s battery is low and/or or moving less than 16 mph the transfer case is shifted out of (26 km/h). 4LO Lock mode.

The button used to turn the locking front axle on or off is located on the instrument panel. 4-10 Driving Your Vehicle

5. Wait for the light in the button Notice: If the vehicle’s axle is Steering Tips to stop ﬂashing and remain locked while driving on pavement, It is important to take curves at a illuminated to show that the front the drivetrain could be damaged. reasonable speed. axle is locked. Repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do Traction in a curve depends on the Notice: If you try to lock the axle not use the locking axle on condition of the tires and the while the vehicle is stuck and pavement. If four-wheel drive is road surface, the angle at which the the tires are spinning, the needed when traveling on curve is banked, and vehicle vehicle’s drivetrain could be pavement, use only 4HI. speed. While in a curve, speed is damaged. The repairs would not the one factor that can be controlled. be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always lock the axle Steering If there is a need to reduce speed, before attempting situations Power Steering do it before entering the curve, and/or navigating terrain which while the front wheels are straight. If power steering assist is lost could possibly cause the vehicle Try to adjust the speed so you to become stuck. because the engine stops or the system is not functioning, the vehicle can drive through the curve. Locking axles will be disengaged can be steered but it will take Maintain a reasonable, steady when the wheel speed is greater more effort. speed. Wait to accelerate until out than 40 mph (64 km/h), if the of the curve, and then accelerate vehicle’s battery is low and/or the gently into the straightaway. transfer case is shifted out of 4LO Lock mode. Driving Your Vehicle 4-11

Steering in Emergencies Off-Road Recovery There are times when steering can The vehicle’s right wheels can drop be more effective than braking. off the edge of a road onto the For example, you come over a hill shoulder while driving. and ﬁnd a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. These problems can be avoided by braking — if you can stop in time. But sometimes you cannot stop An emergency like this requires in time because there is no room. close attention and a quick decision. That is the time for evasive If holding the steering wheel at action —steering around the the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock problem. positions, it can be turned a full If the level of the shoulder is only The vehicle can perform very well in 180 degrees very quickly without slightly below the pavement, emergencies like these. First removing either hand. But you have recovery should be fairly easy. Ease apply the brakes. See Braking on to act fast, steer quickly, and just off the accelerator and then, if page 4-3. It is better to remove as quickly straighten the wheel once there is nothing in the way, steer as much speed as possible from a you have avoided the object. so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. collision. Then steer around the The fact that such emergency problem, to the left or right situations are always possible is a depending on the space available. good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly. 4-12 Driving Your Vehicle

Turn the steering wheel 3 to • Wait your turn to pass a slow The three types of skids 5 inches, 8 to 13 cm, (about vehicle. correspond to the vehicle’s three one-eighth turn) until the right front control systems. In the braking • When you are being passed, tire contacts the pavement edge. skid, the wheels are not rolling. In ease to the right. Then turn the steering wheel to go the steering or cornering skid, straight down the roadway. too much speed or steering in a Loss of Control curve causes tires to slip and Passing Let us review what driving experts lose cornering force. And in the say about what happens when acceleration skid, too much Passing another vehicle on a the three control systems — brakes, throttle causes the driving wheels two-lane road can be dangerous. To steering, and acceleration — do to spin. reduce the risk of danger while not have enough friction where the passing: Remember: Any traction control tires meet the road to do what system helps avoid only the • Look down the road, to the sides, the driver has asked. acceleration skid. If the traction and to crossroads for situations In any emergency, do not give up. system is off, then an acceleration that might affect a successful skid is best handled by easing pass. If in doubt, wait. Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of your foot off the accelerator pedal. • Watch for traffic signs, less danger. See Traction Control System pavement markings, and lines (TCS) on page 4-7 and StabiliTrak¨ that could indicate a turn or Skidding System on page 4-6. an intersection. Never cross a In a skid, a driver can lose control If the vehicle starts to slide, ease solid or double-solid line on your of the vehicle. Defensive drivers your foot off the accelerator side of the lane. avoid most skids by taking pedal and quickly steer the way you • Do not get too close to the reasonable care suited to existing want the vehicle to go. If you vehicle you want to pass. Doing conditions, and by not overdriving start steering quickly enough, the so can reduce your visibility. those conditions. But skids are vehicle may straighten out. Always always possible. be ready for a second skid if it occurs. Driving Your Vehicle 4-13

Of course, traction is reduced when Off-Road Driving Off-roading can be great fun water, snow, ice, gravel, or other but has some deﬁnite hazards. The material is on the road. For safety, The airbag system is designed to greatest of these is the terrain slow down and adjust your work properly under a wide range itself. When off-road driving, traffic driving to these conditions. It is of conditions, including off-road lanes are not marked, curves are not important to slow down on slippery usage. Always wear your safety belt banked, and there are no road surfaces because stopping and observe safe driving speeds, signs. Surfaces can be slippery, distance will be longer and vehicle especially on rough terrain. rough, uphill, or downhill. control more limited. Drinking and driving can be very Avoid sharp turns and abrupt While driving on a surface with dangerous on any road and this is maneuvers. Failure to operate the reduced traction, try your best to certainly true for off-road driving. vehicle correctly off-road could result avoid sudden steering, acceleration, At the very time you need special in loss of vehicle control or vehicle or braking, including reducing alertness and driving skills, your rollover. vehicle speed by shifting to a lower reﬂexes, perceptions, and judgment Off-roading involves some new gear. Any sudden changes could can be affected by even a small skills. That is why it is very important cause the tires to slide. You may not amount of alcohol. You could that you read these driving tips realize the surface is slippery until have a serious — or even and suggestions to help make the vehicle is skidding. Learn to fatal — accident if you drink and off-road driving safer and more recognize warning clues — such as drive or ride with a driver who has enjoyable. enough water, ice, or packed been drinking. snow on the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down when you have any doubt. Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps avoid only the braking skid. 4-14 Driving Your Vehicle

Before You Go Off-Roading Loading Your Vehicle for CAUTION (Continued) • Have all necessary maintenance Off-Road Driving and service work done. { • Heavy loads on the roof raise • Make sure there is enough fuel, CAUTION the vehicle’s center of gravity, that fluid levels are where they making it more likely to roll should be, and that the spare tire • Cargo on the load floor piled over. You can be seriously or is fully inflated. higher than the seatbacks fatally injured if the vehicle can be thrown forward during • Be sure to read all the rolls over. Put heavy loads a sudden stop. You or your information about inside the cargo area, not on passengers could be injured. four-wheel-drive vehicles in this the roof. Keep cargo in the Keep cargo below the top of manual. cargo area as far forward and the seatbacks. low as possible. • Make sure all underbody shields, • Unsecured cargo on the load if the vehicle has them, are floor can be tossed about properly attached. There are some important things to when driving over rough remember about how to load • Know the local laws that apply to terrain. You or your your vehicle. off-roading where you will be passengers can be struck by driving or check with law flying objects. Secure the • The heaviest things should be on enforcement people in the area. cargo properly. the floor, forward of the rear axle. Put heavier items as far forward • Be sure to get the necessary (Continued) as you can. permission if you will be on private land. • Be sure the load is properly secured, so things are not tossed around. Driving Your Vehicle 4-15

You will find other important • Avoid any driving practice that Traveling to Remote Areas information under Loading the could damage shrubs, flowers, It makes sense to plan your Vehicle on page 4-35 and Tires on trees, or grasses or disturb trip, especially when going to a page 5-44. wildlife. This includes remote area. Know the terrain and wheel-spinning, breaking down Environmental Concerns plan your route. Get accurate trees, or unnecessary driving maps of trails and terrain. Check to Off-road driving can provide through streams or over see if there are any blocked or wholesome and satisfying soft ground. closed roads. recreation. However, it also raises • Always carry a litter bag and It is also a good idea to travel environmental concerns. We make sure all refuse is removed with at least one other vehicle in recognize these concerns and urge from any campsite before case something happens to one every off-roader to follow these leaving. basic rules for protecting the of them. environment: • Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted), camp For vehicles with a winch, be sure • Always use established trails, stoves, and lanterns. to read the winch instructions. roads, and areas that have In a remote area, a winch can be been specially set aside for public • Never park your vehicle over dry handy if you get stuck but you off-road recreational driving grass or other combustible will want to know how to use and obey all posted regulations. materials that could catch fire it properly. from the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system. 4-16 Driving Your Vehicle

High Mobility Characteristics The H3T has an approximate approach angle (A) of 37.1 degrees The H3 has a 8.8 inch (22.3 cm) and a departure angle (B) of running ground clearance (A), 31 degrees, depending on a 9.2 inch (23.4 cm) axle to ground suspension packages. clearance (B), and a low center of gravity. The H3T has a 9.5 inch (24.1 cm) running ground clearance (A), and 8.7 inch (22.1 cm) axle to ground clearance (B), and a low center of gravity.

Design speciﬁcations required a minimum gradeability of 60% (31 degrees) slope, with the vehicle fully loaded, on high friction surfaces with maximum vehicle The H3 has an approximate speed not to exceed 6 mph approach angle (A) of 37.4 degrees (9.7 km/h). The vehicle is expected and a departure angle (B) of to traverse this grade only for 34.7 degrees, depending on short durations. Never stop and idle suspension packages. the vehicle or park it on this grade. Driving Your Vehicle 4-17

3. If wheel spin is experienced, maintain steady throttle, with your foot off the brake pedal, to allow the Traction Control System (TCS) to control the wheel spin. TCS might not operate if the brakes are applied. 4. If wheel spin cannot be controlled by the TCS system, fully press The vehicle can climb a the brake pedal with your left foot 16 inch (40.6 cm) vertical step. so all wheel spin is stopped. The vehicle should be able to Step climbing is best done by traverse a 40% (22 degrees) side approaching the step at an angle 5. Back away from the obstacle slope at 6 mph (9.7 km/h) while fully rather than straight on. so that a new approach can loaded on high friction surfaces. be tried. Brake and Accelerator Operation Techniques for 6. As the ﬁrst wheel crosses the Off-Road Driving obstacle, be prepared to alternate the brake and For logs, walls, rocks, severe accelerator pedal to maintain ditches, hills, sand, etc. control and avoid tire drop-off 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete from obstacles. Repeat this stop. Do not rev the engine. process for the other wheels. 2. Select the proper transmission and transfer case gear range; usually 1 (First) gear, Four-Wheel-Low Lock for such obstacles. 4-18 Driving Your Vehicle

For mounds, washouts, loose 3. Apply slight pressure to the Controlling the vehicle is the key to up-hill slopes, ditches, etc. brake when the shaking or successful off-road driving. One of When wheel spin occurs as the shuddering sensation is felt, the best ways to control the vehicle is moving, the driver may keeping the vehicle moving in a vehicle is to control the speed. notice a slight shaking or shuddering controlled manner. At higher speeds: of the vehicle. This should be 4. Be prepared to alternate between • You approach things faster and stopped as soon as possible to braking and accelerating through have less time to react. prevent damage to vehicle the adverse terrain. • There is less time to scan the components. This is the indication terrain for obstacles. that a loss of traction is occurring on Getting Familiar with Off-Road this terrain. The operator should: Driving • The vehicle has more bounce when driving over obstacles. 1. Reduce speed and apply It is a good idea to practice in an the brakes. area that is safe and close to home • More braking distance is needed, before you go into the wilderness. especially on an unpaved surface. 2. Assess the terrain properly and Off-roading requires some new adjust vehicle speed and gear and different skills. ranges accordingly: Four-Wheel { CAUTION High position for higher speeds Tune your senses to different and Four-Wheel-Low Lock kinds of signals. Your eyes need When you are driving off-road, for more torque and lower to constantly sweep the terrain bouncing and quick changes in speeds. Transmission 1 (First) for unexpected obstacles. Your ears direction can easily throw you gear is generally recommended. need to listen for unusual tire or out of position. This could cause engine sounds. Use your arms, you to lose control and crash. hands, feet, and body to respond to So, whether you are driving vibrations and vehicle bounce. on or off the road, you and your passengers should wear safety belts. Driving Your Vehicle 4-19

Scanning the Terrain Some things to consider: Off-roading requires a different kind of alertness from driving on Off-road driving can take you over • Is the path ahead clear? paved roads and highways. There many different kinds of terrain. • Will the surface texture change are no road signs, posted speed Be familiar with the terrain and its abruptly up ahead? limits, or signal lights. Use many different features. • Does the travel take you uphill or good judgment about what is safe Surface Conditions: Off-roading downhill? and what is not. surfaces can be hard-packed • Will you have to stop suddenly or dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, Crossing Obstacles change direction quickly? mud, snow, or ice. Each of these Approach Angle — a Key to surfaces affects the vehicle’s When driving over obstacles or Mobility steering, acceleration, and braking rough terrain, keep a ﬁrm grip on the in different ways. Depending on steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or the surface, slipping, sliding, wheel other surface features can jerk the spinning, delayed acceleration, wheel out of your hands. poor traction, and longer braking When driving over bumps, rocks, or distances can occur. other obstacles, the wheels can Surface Obstacles: Unseen or leave the ground. If this happens, hidden obstacles can be hazardous. even with one or two wheels, A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump you cannot control the vehicle as can startle you if you are not well or at all. prepared for them. Often these Because you will be on an unpaved obstacles are hidden by grass, surface, it is especially important If you encounter a large dip in the bushes, snow, or even the rise and to avoid sudden acceleration, fall of the terrain itself. terrain, do not enter straight on; sudden turns, or sudden braking. enter at an angle — 15° minimum approach (A), 75° maximum approach angle (B). 4-20 Driving Your Vehicle

For very large dips, ditches or Log Crossing Driving on Hills small washes, coast in, using the Using the proper technique, the Off-road driving often takes you up, engine as a brake (transmission vehicle will cross logs up to down, or across a hill. Driving and transfer case lowest gears). 10 inches (25.4 cm) in diameter. safely on hills requires good Then, use the low ranges in Approach the log at approximately a judgment and an understanding of the transmission and transfer case 15° angle (A) with the transmission what the vehicle can and cannot do. to power out. in 1 (First) and the transfer case There are some hills that simply Roll The Tires Over Large Rocks in Four-Wheel-Low Lock and “walk” cannot be driven, no matter how well the vehicle over, one tire at a built the vehicle. time. It may be necessary to modulate the brake pedal and { accelerator to avoid spin-out. Ease CAUTION the vehicle down from the log Many hills are simply too steep for with the brake. any vehicle. If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive down them, you cannot control your speed. If you drive across them, you will roll over. You could be seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt about the steepness, do not drive the hill. Do not straddle large rocks; drive over them, letting the tire cover the rock. The tread of the tire is thicker and tougher than the sidewall of the tire and is more resilient to impact than underbody components. Driving Your Vehicle 4-21

Approaching a Hill • Is there a straight path up or Driving Uphill When you approach a hill, decide down the hill so you will not have Once you decide it is safe to drive if it is too steep to climb, descend, or to make turning maneuvers? up the hill: cross. Steepness can be hard to • Are there obstructions on the hill • Use transmission and transfer judge. On a very small hill, for that can block your path, such case low gear and get a ﬁrm example, there may be a smooth, as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts? grip on the steering wheel. constant incline with only a • What is beyond the hill? Is there small change in elevation where • Get a smooth start up the hill a cliff, an embankment, a and try to maintain speed. you can easily see all the way to the drop-off, a fence? Get out and top. On a large hill, the incline Not using more power than walk the hill if you do not know. It needed can avoid spinning the may get steeper as you near the is the smart way to ﬁnd out. top, but you might not see this wheels or sliding. because the crest of the hill • Is the hill simply too rough? • Let the traction system work to is hidden by bushes, grass, or Steep hills often have ruts, control any wheel slippage. shrubs. gullies, troughs, and exposed The traction control system rocks because they are allows for moderate wheel spin Consider this as you approach more susceptible to the effects a hill: with some capability to dig in and of erosion. power up the hill. • Is there a constant incline, or See “Hill Start Assist” under Braking does the hill get sharply on page 4-3 for information on steeper in places? vehicles stopped on a grade. • Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the surface cause tire slipping? 4-22 Driving Your Vehicle

• Do not continue if the vehicle • Attach a ﬂag to the vehicle to be If the vehicle stalls, or is about to shudders or exhibits suspension more visible to approaching stall, and you cannot make it up hopping. This can cause traffic on trails or hills. the hill: damage to the driveline or • Sound the horn as you approach • Push the brake pedal to stop the suspension components. the top of the hill to let opposing vehicle and keep it from rolling Improper driving technique is not traffic know you are there. backwards and apply the parking covered by the vehicle warranty. brake. • Use headlamps even during the { day to make the vehicle more • If the engine is still running, shift CAUTION visible to oncoming traffic. the transmission to R (Reverse), release the parking brake, Turning or driving across steep { and slowly back down the hill in hills can be dangerous. You could CAUTION R (Reverse). lose traction, slide sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be Driving to the top (crest) of a hill • If the engine has stopped running, you need to restart seriously injured or killed. When at full speed can cause an it. With the brake pedal driving up hills, always try to go accident. There could be a pressed, apply the parking straight up. drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle. You could brake. If the vehicle has an be seriously injured or killed. As automatic transmission, shift the • Try to drive straight up the hill if transmission to P (Park). at all possible. If the path twists you near the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert. Restart the engine. Then, shift to and turns, you might want to R (Reverse), release the ﬁnd another route. parking brake, and slowly back • Ease up on the speed as you down the hill as straight as approach the top of the hill. possible in R (Reverse). Driving Your Vehicle 4-23

• While backing down the hill, put • Never try to turn around if about your left hand on the steering to stall when going up a hill. If { CAUTION wheel at the 12 o’clock position the hill is steep enough to so you can tell if the wheels stall the vehicle, it is steep Shifting the transfer case to are straight and can maneuver enough to cause it to roll over. If Neutral can cause your vehicle to as you back down. It is best you cannot make it up the hill, roll even if the transmission is in to back down the hill with back straight down the hill. P (Park). This is because the the wheels straight rather than Neutral position on the transfer If, after stalling, you try to back in the left or right direction. case overrides the transmission. down the hill and decide you just Turning the wheel too far to the You or someone else could be cannot do it, set the parking brake. left or right will increase the injured. If you are going to leave If the vehicle has an automatic possibility of a rollover. your vehicle, set the parking transmission, shift to P (Park). Turn Things not to do if the vehicle stalls, off the engine. Leave the vehicle brake and shift the transmission or is about to stall, when going and go get some help. Exit on to P (Park). But do not shift the up a hill: the uphill side and stay clear of the transfer case to Neutral. • Never attempt to prevent a stall path the vehicle would take if it by shifting into N (Neutral) to rolled downhill. Do not shift rev-up the engine and regain the transfer case to Neutral when forward momentum. This will you leave the vehicle. Leave it not work. The vehicle can in some gear. roll backward very quickly and could go out of control. 4-24 Driving Your Vehicle

Driving Downhill Vehicles are much more likely to { CAUTION stall when going uphill, but if it When off-roading takes you happens when going downhill: downhill, consider: Heavy braking when going down 1. Stop the vehicle by applying the • How steep is the downhill? Will I a hill can cause your brakes to regular brakes and apply the be able to maintain vehicle overheat and fade. This could parking brake. control? cause loss of control and a 2. With an automatic transmission, • What is the surface like? serious accident. Apply the brakes shift to P (Park). While still Smooth? Rough? Slippery? lightly when descending a hill and braking, restart the engine. Hard-packed dirt? Gravel? use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control. 3. Shift back to a low gear, release • Are there hidden surface the parking brake, and drive obstacles? Ruts? Logs? straight down. Boulders? Things not to do when driving down a hill: 4. If the engine will not start, get • What is at the bottom of the hill? out and get help. Is there a hidden creek bank or • When driving downhill, avoid even a river bottom with large turns that take you across rocks? the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too steep to drive down If you decide you can go down a hill might be too steep to drive safely, try to keep the vehicle across. The vehicle could headed straight down. Use a low roll over. gear so engine drag can help • Never go downhill with the the brakes so they do not have to do all the work. Descend slowly, transmission in N (Neutral), called keeping the vehicle under control at free-wheeling. The brakes will all times. have to do all the work and could overheat and fade. Driving Your Vehicle 4-25

Driving Across an Incline the vehicle will tumble end over • Hidden obstacles can make the end. But when driving across An off-road trail will probably go steepness of the incline even an incline, the narrower across the incline of a hill. To decide worse. If you drive across a rock track width — the distance whether to try to drive across the with the uphill wheels, or if the between the left and right incline, consider the following: downhill wheels drop into a rut or wheels — might not prevent the depression, the vehicle can tilt vehicle from tilting and rolling even more. { CAUTION over. Driving across an incline puts more weight on the downhill For these reasons, carefully Driving across an incline that is wheels which could cause a consider whether to try to drive too steep will make your vehicle downhill slide or a rollover. across an incline. Just because the trail goes across the incline does roll over. You could be seriously • Surface conditions can be a injured or killed. If you have any not mean you have to drive it. problem. Loose gravel, muddy The last vehicle to try it might have doubt about the steepness of the spots, or even wet grass can rolled over. incline, do not drive across it. Find cause the tires to slip sideways, another route instead. downhill. If the vehicle slips If you feel the vehicle starting to sideways, it can hit something slide sideways, turn downhill. This • A hill that can be driven that will trip it — a rock, a rut, should help straighten out the straight up or down might be etc. — and roll over. vehicle and prevent the side too steep to drive across. When slipping. The best way to prevent going straight up or down a this is to “walk the course” ﬁrst, hill, the length of the wheel so you know what the surface is like base — the distance from before driving it. the front wheels to the rear wheels —reduces the likelihood 4-26 Driving Your Vehicle

Stalling on an Incline Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, Hard packed snow and ice offer the or Ice worst tire traction. On these surfaces, { CAUTION it is very easy to lose control. On wet When you drive in mud, snow, or ice, for example, the traction is so sand, the wheels do not get good poor that you will have difficulty Getting out on the downhill (low) traction. Acceleration is not as quick, side of a vehicle stopped across accelerating. And, if the vehicle does turning is more difficult, and braking get moving, poor steering and an incline is dangerous. If the distances are longer. difficult braking can cause it to slide vehicle rolls over, you could be It is best to use a low gear when in out of control. crushed or killed. Always get out mud — the deeper the mud, the on the uphill (high) side of the lower the gear. In really deep mud, vehicle and stay well clear of the { CAUTION keep the vehicle moving so it rollover path. does not get stuck. Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can be dangerous. If the vehicle stalls when crossing When driving on sand, wheel Underwater springs, currents an incline, be sure you, and traction changes. On loosely packed any passengers, get out on the sand, such as on beaches or under the ice, or sudden thaws uphill side, even if the door there is sand dunes, the tires will tend to can weaken the ice. Your vehicle harder to open. If you get out on sink into the sand. This affects could fall through the ice and you the downhill side and the vehicle steering, accelerating, and braking. and your passengers could starts to roll over, you will be right in Drive at a reduced speed and drown. Drive your vehicle on safe its path. avoid sharp turns or abrupt surfaces only. maneuvers. If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over. Driving Your Vehicle 4-27

Driving in Water Find out how deep the water is After Off-Road Driving before driving through it. Do not Remove any brush or debris that try it if it is deep enough to cover { CAUTION has collected on the underbody, the wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust chassis, or under the hood. These pipe — you probably will not get Driving through rushing water can accumulations can be a fire hazard. be dangerous. Deep water can through. Deep water can damage the axle and other vehicle parts. The After operation in mud or sand, sweep your vehicle downstream vehicle is capable of depths up to have the brake linings cleaned and and you and your passengers 20 inches (50 cm). Know how to checked. These substances can could drown. If it is only shallow judge whether the water is deeper cause glazing and uneven braking. water, it can still wash away the than this before proceeding into it. Check the engine and oil coolers ground from under your tires, and for mud accumulation. Thoroughly If the water is not too deep, drive you could lose traction and roll and carefully clean these devices to slowly through it. At faster speeds, the vehicle over. Do not drive allow proper cooling. Check the water splashes on the ignition through rushing water. body structure, steering, suspension, system and the vehicle can stall. wheels, tires, and exhaust system Stalling can also occur if you get the Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, for damage and check the fuel lines tailpipe under water. If the tailpipe and flood waters demand extreme and cooling system for any is under water, you will never caution. leakage. be able to start the engine. When going through water, remember that The vehicle requires more frequent when the brakes get wet, it might service due to off-road use. take longer to stop. See Driving Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Rain and on Wet Roads on for additional information. page 4-29. 4-28 Driving Your Vehicle

Assist Steps Driving at Night • When tired, pull off the road. If your vehicle has removable side Night driving is more dangerous • Do not wear sunglasses. steps, remove the steps prior to than day driving because • Avoid staring directly into off-roading to give your vehicle more some drivers are likely to be approaching headlamps. ground clearance and to prevent impaired — by alcohol or drugs, damage to the vehicle from the side with night vision problems, or • Keep the windshield and all glass steps dragging and/or catching by fatigue. on your vehicle clean — inside on obstacles. and out. Night driving tips include: • Keep your eyes moving, Notice: Do not drive off-road • Drive defensively. especially during turns or curves. with the side steps attached to your vehicle. You can damage • Do not drink and drive. No one can see as well at night as the side steps and/or your • Reduce headlamp glare by in the daytime. But, as we get vehicle’s frame if they get caught adjusting the inside rearview older, these differences increase. A or drag against an obstacle. mirror. 50-year-old driver might need at This damage would not be least twice as much light to see the • Slow down and keep more space covered by your vehicle’s same thing at night as a 20-year-old. between you and other vehicles warranty. Always remove the because headlamps can only side steps prior to any off-road light up so much road ahead. driving. • Watch for animals. Driving Your Vehicle 4-29

Driving in Rain and on Other Rainy Weather Tips CAUTION (Continued) Wet Roads Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips include: Rain and wet roads can reduce Flowing or rushing water creates vehicle traction and affect your strong forces. Driving through • Allow extra following distance. ability to stop and accelerate. flowing water could cause your • Pass with caution. Always drive slower in these types vehicle to be carried away. If this of driving conditions and avoid • Keep windshield wiping happens, you and other vehicle equipment in good shape. driving through large puddles and occupants could drown. Do not deep-standing or flowing water. ignore police warnings and be • Keep the windshield washer fluid very cautious about trying to drive reservoir filled. { CAUTION through flowing water. • Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires on page 5-44. Wet brakes can cause crashes. • Turn off cruise control. They might not work as well in a Hydroplaning quick stop and could cause Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water pulling to one side. You could can build up under your vehicle’s lose control of the vehicle. tires so they actually ride on the water. This can happen if the After driving through a large road is wet enough and you puddle of water or a car/vehicle are going fast enough. When your wash, lightly apply the brake vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or pedal until the brakes work no contact with the road. normally. There is no hard and fast rule about (Continued) hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet. 4-30 Driving Your Vehicle

Before Leaving on a Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Long Trip Always be alert and pay attention Driving on steep hills or through To prepare your vehicle for a long to your surroundings while driving. If mountains is different than driving trip, consider having it serviced you become tired or sleepy, find on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for by your dealer/retailer before a safe place to park your vehicle driving in these conditions include: departing. and rest. • Keep the vehicle serviced Things to check on your own Other driving tips include: and in good shape. include: • Keep the vehicle well ventilated. • Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling system, and • Windshield Washer Fluid: • Keep interior temperature cool. Reservoir full? Windows transmission. • Keep your eyes moving — scan clean — inside and outside? • Going down steep or long hills, the road ahead and to the sides. • Wiper Blades: In good shape? shift to a lower gear. • Check the rearview mirror and • Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All vehicle instruments often. { levels checked? CAUTION • Lamps: Do they all work and are If you do not shift down, the lenses clean? brakes could get so hot that they • Tires: Are treads good? Are tires would not work well. You would inflated to recommended then have poor braking or even pressure? none going down a hill. You could • Weather and Maps: Safe to crash. Shift down to let the engine travel? Have up-to-date maps? assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope. Driving Your Vehicle 4-31

• Pay attention to special road to spin and makes the surface { CAUTION signs (falling rocks area, winding under the tires slick, so there is even roads, long grades, passing or less traction. Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) no-passing zones) and take Try not to break the fragile traction. If or with the ignition off is appropriate action. dangerous. The brakes will have you accelerate too fast, the drive to do all the work of slowing down See Off-Road Driving on page 4-13 wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more. and they could get so hot that for information about driving they would not work well. You off-road. The Traction Control System (TCS) would then have poor braking or on page 4-7 improves the ability even none going down a hill. You Winter Driving to accelerate on slippery roads, but slow down and adjust your driving could crash. Always have the Driving on Snow or Ice engine running and the vehicle in to the road conditions. When driving gear when going downhill. Drive carefully when there is snow through deep snow, turn off the or ice between the tires and the traction control system to help • Stay in your own lane. Do not road, creating less traction or grip. maintain vehicle motion at lower swing wide or cut across the Wet ice can occur at about 32°F speeds. (0°C) when freezing rain begins to center of the road. Drive at The Antilock Brake System (ABS) fall, resulting in even less traction. speeds that let you stay in your on page 4-5 improves vehicle Avoid driving on wet ice or in own lane. stability during hard stops on a freezing rain until roads can be slippery roads, but apply the brakes • Top of hills: Be alert — something treated with salt or sand. could be in your lane (stalled car, sooner than when on dry pavement. accident). Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly causes the wheels 4-32 Driving Your Vehicle

Allow greater following distance on any slippery road and watch for { CAUTION CAUTION (Continued) slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on otherwise clear roads Snow can trap engine exhaust • Adjust the Climate Control in shaded areas. The surface of under the vehicle. This may cause system to a setting that a curve or an overpass can remain exhaust gases to get inside. circulates the air inside the icy when the surrounding roads Engine exhaust contains carbon vehicle and set the fan speed are clear. Avoid sudden steering monoxide (CO) which cannot be to the highest setting. See maneuvers and braking while on ice. seen or smelled. It can cause Climate Control System in the unconsciousness and even death. Index. Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces. If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: For more information about • Clear away snow from carbon monoxide, see Engine Blizzard Conditions around the base of your Exhaust on page 2-31. Being stuck in snow can be in a vehicle, especially any that is Snow can trap exhaust gases serious situation. Stay with the blocking the exhaust pipe. under your vehicle. This can vehicle unless there is help nearby. • Check again from time to cause deadly CO (carbon If possible, use the Roadside time to be sure snow does monoxide) gas to get inside. CO Service on page 7-6. To get help not collect there. could overcome you and kill you. and keep everyone in the vehicle • Open a window about two You cannot see it or smell it, so safe: inches (5 cm) on the side of you might not know it is in your • Turn on the Hazard Warning the vehicle that is away from vehicle. Clear away snow from Flashers on page 3-5. the wind to bring in fresh air. around the base of your vehicle, • Fully open the air outlets on especially any that is blocking the • Tie a red cloth to an outside exhaust. mirror. or under the instrument panel. (Continued) Driving Your Vehicle 4-33

Run the engine for short periods If Your Vehicle is { only as needed to keep warm, Stuck in Sand, Mud, CAUTION but be careful. Ice, or Snow If you let your vehicle’s tires spin To save fuel, run the engine for at high speed, they can explode, only short periods as needed to Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the vehicle when and you or others could be warm the vehicle and then shut the injured. The vehicle can overheat, engine off and close the window stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. causing an engine compartment most of the way to save heat. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It ﬁre or other damage. Spin the Repeat this until help arrives Out on page 4-34. wheels as little as possible and but only when you feel really If the vehicle has a traction system, uncomfortable from the cold. Moving avoid going above 35 mph it can often help to free a stuck (55 km/h) as shown on the about to keep warm also helps. vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s speedometer. If it takes some time for help to traction system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction arrive, now and then when you run For information about using tire the engine, push the accelerator system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off and use the chains on the vehicle, see Tire pedal slightly so the engine Chains on page 5-65. runs faster than the idle speed. This rocking method. keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as little as possible to save fuel. 4-34 Driving Your Vehicle

Rocking Your Vehicle to used. If the vehicle does need to be towed out, see Towing Your Get It Out Vehicle on page 4-40. Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area around Recovery Loops the front wheels. The traction control system activates when the system { senses that the wheels are spinning. CAUTION Turn off any traction or stability system. With the wheels straight These loops, when used, are ahead, shift back and forth between under a lot of force. Keep people R (Reverse) and a forward gear, away from the vicinity of the loops or with a manual transmission, and any chains or cables during between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) and use. Always pull the vehicle The vehicle has two recovery loops R (Reverse), spinning the wheels straight out. Never pull on the at the front of the vehicle and as little as possible. To prevent loops at a sideways angle. The one at the rear of the vehicle. transmission wear, wait until loops could break off and you or Use them if the vehicle is stuck the wheels stop spinning before others could be injured from the off-road and needs to be pulled to shifting gears. Release the chain or cable snapping back. some place where the driver accelerator pedal while shifting, and can continue driving. press lightly on the accelerator Notice: Never use the recovery pedal when the transmission is in loops to tow the vehicle. Your gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in vehicle could be damaged and it the forward and reverse directions would not be covered by causes a rocking motion that warranty. could free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be towed out. The recovery loops can be Driving Your Vehicle 4-35

Two labels on the vehicle show Tire and Loading Information how much weight it may Label properly carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certiﬁcation/Tire label.

{ CAUTION Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or If the vehicle has a brush guard, either the maximum front or never tow or apply any loads rear Gross Axle Weight Rating onto the brush guard. (GAWR). If you do, parts on Label Example the vehicle can break, and it Loading the Vehicle A vehicle speciﬁc Tire and can change the way your Loading Information label It is very important to know how vehicle handles. These could is attached to the vehicle’s much weight the vehicle can cause you to lose control and center pillar (B-pillar). With the carry. This weight is called the crash. Also, overloading can driver’s door open, you will vehicle capacity weight and shorten the life of the vehicle. ﬁnd the label attached below the includes the weight of all door latch post. occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. 4-36 Driving Your Vehicle

The Tire and Loading Steps for Determining Correct 5. Determine the combined Information label shows the Load Limit weight of luggage and number of occupant seating 1. Locate the statement “The cargo being loaded on the positions (A), and the maximum combined weight of occupants vehicle. That weight may not vehicle capacity weight (B) in and cargo should never safely exceed the available kilograms and pounds. exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on cargo and luggage load The Tire and Loading Information your vehicle’s placard. capacity calculated in Step 4. label also shows the size of the 2. Determine the combined 6. If your vehicle will be towing a vehicle’s original equipment weight of the driver and trailer, the load from your tires (C) and the recommended passengers that will be riding trailer will be transferred to cold tire inflation pressures (D). in your vehicle. your vehicle. Consult For more information on tires and this manual to determine how inflation see Tires on page 5-44 3. Subtract the combined weight this reduces the available and Inflation - Tire Pressure on of the driver and passengers cargo and luggage load page 5-51. from XXX kg or XXX lbs. capacity of your vehicle. 4. The resulting figure equals the See Towing a Trailer There is also important available amount of cargo and information on the on page 4-42 for important luggage load capacity. For information on towing a Certification/Tire label. It tells example, if the “XXX” amount Gross Vehicle Weight Rating trailer, towing safety, and equals 1400 lbs and there will trailering tips. (GVWR) and the Gross be five 150 lb passengers in Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) your vehicle, the amount for the front and rear axles. See of available cargo and “Certification/Tire Label” later luggage load capacity is in this section. 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). Driving Your Vehicle 4-37

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 = 1,000 lbs Example 2 = 1,000 lbs Example 3 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg). (453 kg). (453 kg). B. Subtract Occupant Weight B. Subtract Occupant Weight B. Subtract Occupant Weight 150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 = 300 lbs 150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = 750 lbs 200 lbs (136 kg). (340 kg). (91 kg) × 5 = 1,000 lbs C. Available Occupant and C. Available Cargo (453 kg). Cargo Weight = 700 lbs Weight = 250 lbs (113 kg). C. Available Cargo (317 kg). Weight = 0 lbs (0 kg).

Refer to the vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information label for speciﬁc information about the vehicle’s capacity weight and seating positions. 4-38 Driving Your Vehicle

The combined weight of the occupants, fuel, cargo and trailer driver, passengers, cargo tongue weight, if pulling a { CAUTION and any accessories or trailer. equipment added to the vehicle Do not load the vehicle any after it left the factory should The Certification/Tire label also heavier than the Gross Vehicle never exceed the vehicle’s tells the maximum weights Weight Rating (GVWR), or capacity weight. for the front and rear axles, either the maximum front or called Gross Axle Weight Rating rear Gross Axle Weight Rating Certification/Tire Label (GAWR). To find out the (GAWR). If you do, parts on actual loads on the front and the vehicle can break, and it rear axles, go to a weigh station can change the way your and weigh the vehicle. Your vehicle handles. These could dealer/retailer can help with this. cause you to lose control and Be sure to spread out the crash. Also, overloading can load equally on both sides of the shorten the life of the vehicle. centerline. Never exceed the GVWR for the Using heavier suspension Label Example vehicle, or the GAWR for components to get added either the front or rear axle. durability might not change the A vehicle specific weight ratings. Ask your Certification/Tire label is If the load is heavy, it should be spread out. dealer to help you load the attached to the bottom section vehicle the right way. of the center pillar (B-pillar), Similar appearing vehicles may on the driver’s side of the have different GVWRs and vehicle. The label shows the capacity weights. Please note Gross Vehicle Weight Rating the vehicle’s Certification/Tire (GVWR). The GVWR includes label or consult your the weight of the vehicle, all dealer/retailer for additional details. Driving Your Vehicle 4-39

Notice: Overloading your There is also important loading vehicle may cause damage. CAUTION (Continued) information for off-road driving Repairs would not be covered in this manual. See “Loading Your by your warranty. Do not • Never stack heavier Vehicle for Off-Road Driving” overload your vehicle. things, like suitcases, under Off-Road Driving on inside the vehicle so that page 4-13. If you put things inside your some of them are above vehicle – like suitcases, tools, the tops of the seats. Truck-Camper Loading packages, or anything • Do not leave an else – they will go as fast as the Information vehicle goes. If you have to unsecured child restraint in your vehicle. Your vehicle was not designed stop or turn quickly, or if there is to carry a slide-in camper. a crash, they will keep going. • When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can. { CAUTION • Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to. Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash. • Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly. (Continued) 4-40 Driving Your Vehicle

Towing “dolly towing” — towing the vehicle • Is the vehicle ready to be towed? with two wheels on the ground Just as preparing the vehicle for and two wheels up on a device a long trip, make sure the Towing Your Vehicle known as a “dolly”. vehicle is prepared to be towed. To avoid damage, the disabled Here are some important things to See Before Leaving on a vehicle should be towed with all four consider before recreational Long Trip on page 4-30. wheels off the ground. Consult vehicle towing: your dealer/retailer or a professional Dinghy Towing towing service if the disabled • What is the towing capacity of vehicle must be towed. See the tow vehicle? Be sure to Roadside Service on page 7-6 read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s To tow the vehicle behind another recommendations. vehicle for recreational purposes — such as behind a • What is the distance that will be motorhome, see “Recreational travelled? Some vehicles have Vehicle Towing” following. restrictions on how far and how long they can tow. Recreational Vehicle • Is the proper towing equipment Towing going to be used? See your dealer/retailer or trailering Recreational vehicle towing means professional for additional advice towing the vehicle behind another and equipment This full-time four-wheel-drive vehicle – such as behind a recommendations. vehicle can be dinghy towed from motorhome. The two most common the front. These vehicles can also be types of recreational vehicle towed by placing them on a towing are known as “dinghy platform trailer with all four wheels towing” — towing the vehicle with all off the ground. These vehicles four wheels on the ground, and cannot be towed using a dolly. Driving Your Vehicle 4-41

Use the following procedure to tow 5. Shift the transfer case to Dolly Towing the vehicle: N (Neutral). See Full-Time 1. Put the transmission in P (Park) Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-24 for an automatic transmission or for the proper procedure to in 1 (First) for a manual select the N (Neutral) position for transmission. the vehicle. 2. Turn the engine off, but leave the 6. Release the parking brake only ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY. after the vehicle being towed is ﬁrmly attached to the tow vehicle. 3. Firmly set the parking brake. 7. Make sure the ignition is in 4. Securely attach the vehicle being ACC/ACCESSORY. towed to the tow vehicle. When towing the vehicle for { extended periods of time, start the CAUTION vehicle as often as possible to Notice: Dolly towing the vehicle prevent battery drain. This should Shifting a full-time will damage drivetrain only be done when the tow components. Do not dolly tow the four-wheel-drive vehicle’s vehicle is parked. vehicle. transfer case into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll After towing, see “Shifting Out of The vehicle cannot be dolly towed. even if the automatic transmission NEUTRAL” under Full-Time If the vehicle must be towed is in P (Park) or the manual Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-24. behind another vehicle, use the transmission is in any gear. You dinghy towing procedure explained or others could be injured. Make previously. sure the parking brake is ﬁrmly set before the transfer case is shifted to N (Neutral). 4-42 Driving Your Vehicle

Towing a Trailer Notice: Pulling a trailer The following information has many improperly can damage the time-tested, important trailering { vehicle and result in costly tips and safety rules. Many of these CAUTION repairs not covered by the are important for your safety and vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer that of your passengers. So please The driver can lose control when correctly, follow the advice in read this section carefully before pulling a trailer if the correct this section and see your pulling a trailer. equipment is not used or the dealer/retailer for important vehicle is not driven properly. For information about towing a trailer Pulling A Trailer example, if the trailer is too with the vehicle. Here are some important points: heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even at all. The driver To identify the trailering capacity of • There are many different and passengers could be the vehicle, read the information laws, including speed limit seriously injured. The vehicle may in “Weight of the Trailer” that restrictions, having to do with appears later in this section. also be damaged; the resulting trailering. Make sure the rig will repairs would not be covered by Trailering is different than just be legal, not only where you the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer driving the vehicle by itself. live but also where you will be driving. A good source for only if all the steps in this section Trailering means changes in this information can be state or have been followed. Ask your handling, acceleration, braking, provincial police. dealer/retailer for advice and durability and fuel economy. information about towing a trailer Successful, safe trailering takes • Consider using a sway control. with the vehicle. correct equipment, and it has to be See “Hitches” later in this used properly. section. Driving Your Vehicle 4-43

• Do not tow a trailer at all during • Vehicles with an automatic Weight of the Trailer the ﬁrst 500 miles (800 km) the transmissions can tow in How heavy can a trailer safely be? new vehicle is driven. The D (Drive). Shift the transmission engine, axle or other parts could to a lower gear if the It depends on how the rig is be damaged. transmission shifts too often used. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature • Then, during the ﬁrst 500 miles under heavy loads and/or hilly and how much the vehicle is used to (800 km) that a trailer is towed, conditions. For vehicles with pull a trailer are all important. It do not drive over 50 mph a manual transmission, it is better can depend on any special (80 km/h) and do not make starts not to use the highest gear. equipment on the vehicle, and the at full throttle. This helps the • This vehicle has a Hill Start amount of tongue weight the vehicle engine and other parts of Assist feature, which may can carry. See “Weight of the the vehicle wear in at the be useful when the vehicle is Trailer Tongue” later in this section heavier loads. stopped on a grade. See Braking for more information. on page 4-3 for more information. Three important considerations have to do with weight: • The weight of the trailer • The weight of the trailer tongue • The weight on the vehicle’s tires 4-44 Driving Your Vehicle

Maximum trailer weight is calculated weight of additional optional Use the following chart to determine assuming only the driver is in the equipment, passengers and cargo in how much the vehicle can weigh, tow vehicle and it has all the the tow vehicle must be subtracted based upon the vehicle model required trailering equipment. The from the maximum trailer weight. and options.

Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR H3 3.7L L5 Engine, Automatic Transmission 4.56 4,500 lbs (2 041 kg) 9,500 lbs (4 309 kg) 3.7L L5 Engine, Manual 4.56 3,000 lbs (1 361 kg) 8,000 lbs (3 629 kg) Transmission 5.3L V8 Engine, Automatic Transmission 4.10 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg) 11,400 lbs (5 171 kg) H3T 3.7L L5 Engine, Automatic 4.56 4,400 lbs (1 996 kg) 9,500 lbs (4 309 kg) Transmission 3.7L L5 Engine, Manual Transmission 4.56 2,900 lbs (1 315 kg) 8,000 lbs (3 629 kg) 5.3L V8 Engine, Automatic Transmission 4.10 5,900 lbs (2 676 kg) 11,400 lbs (5 171 kg) *The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) in the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceeded.

Ask your dealer/retailer for our Offices. See Customer Assistance trailering information or advice, or Offices on page 7-4 for more write us at our Customer Assistance information. Driving Your Vehicle 4-45

Weight of the Trailer Tongue If the spare tire carrier is mounted on the back of the vehicle and The tongue load (A) of any trailer is the hitch extension is too short, an important weight to measure the spare tire may interfere because it affects the total gross with trailer coupling or trailer tongue weight of the vehicle. The Gross jack operation on some types of Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the trailers. curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and the people After loading the trailer, weigh the who will be riding in the vehicle.If trailer and then the tongue, there are a lot of options, equipment, separately, to see if the weights are passengers or cargo in the vehicle, proper. If they aren’t, adjustments it will reduce the tongue weight The trailer tongue weight (A) should might be made by moving some the vehicle can carry, which will also be 10 percent to 15 percent of items around in the trailer. reduce the trailer weight the the total loaded trailer weight (B), up vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, to a maximum of 500 lbs (227 kg) the tongue load must be added with a weight carrying hitch or to the GVW because the vehicle will a weight distributing hitch. be carrying that weight, too. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-35 Do not exceed the maximum for more information about the allowable tongue weight for the vehicle’s maximum load capacity. vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the rear axle. 4-46 Driving Your Vehicle

Total Weight on the Vehicle’s Weight-Distributing Hitches and (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or Tires Weight Carrying Hitches the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect of Be sure the vehicle’s tires are additional weight can reduce the inﬂated to the upper limit for cold trailering capacity more than tires. These numbers can be found the total of the additional weight. on the Certiﬁcation/Tire Label located on the B-pillar below the Consider the following example: door latch or see Loading the A vehicle model base weight Vehicle on page 4-35. Make sure is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs not to go over the GVW limit for the (1 270 kg) at the front axle and vehicle, or the GAWR, including 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle. the weight of the trailer tongue. If It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs using a weight distributing hitch, (3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs make sure not to go over the rear (1 814 kg) and a GCWR (Gross axle limit before applying the weight (A) Body-to-Ground Distance (B) Combination Weight Rating) distribution spring bars. Front of Vehicle of 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be: Hitches When using a weight-distributing It is important to have the correct hitch, the hitch must be adjusted so hitch equipment. Crosswinds, that the distance (A) remains the large trucks going by and rough same both before and after coupling roads are a few reasons why the trailer to the tow vehicle. the right hitch is needed. Trailering may also be limited by the vehicle’s ability to carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause Expect tongue weight to be at least the vehicle to exceed the GVWR 10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the weight is applied well behind the Driving Your Vehicle 4-47 rear axle, the effect on the If the vehicle has many options and to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to rear axle is greater than just the there is a front seat passenger avoid exceeding GVWR. But weight itself, as much as 1.5 times and two rear seat passengers with the effect on the rear axle must still as much. The weight at the rear some luggage and gear in the be considered. Because the rear axle could be 850 lbs (386 kg) vehicle as well, 300 lbs (136 kg) axle now weighs 3,100 lbs X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since could be added to the front (1 406 kg), 900 lbs (408 kg) can be the rear axle already weighs axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to put on the rear axle without 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding the rear axle weight. The vehicle exceeding RGAWR. The effect of 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to now weighs: tongue weight is about 1.5 times the 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very actual weight. Dividing the 900 lbs close to, but within the limit for (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves only RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight to trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg). that can be handled. Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of total loaded trailer weight, expect that the largest trailer Weight is still below 7,200 lbs the vehicle can properly handle is (3 266 kg) and you might think 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg). 700 additional pounds (318 kg) should be subtracted from the It is important that the vehicle trailering capacity to stay within does not exceed any of its GCWR limits. The maximum trailer ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, would only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). Maximum Trailer Rating or You may go further and think Tongue Weight. The only way the tongue weight should be limited to be sure it is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh the vehicle and trailer. 4-48 Driving Your Vehicle

Safety Chains Driving with a Trailer Following Distance Always attach chains between the Towing a trailer requires a certain Stay at least twice as far behind vehicle and the trailer. Cross amount of experience. Get to the vehicle ahead as you would the safety chains under the tongue know the rig before setting out for when driving the vehicle without a of the trailer to help prevent the the open road. Get acquainted trailer. This can help to avoid tongue from contacting the road if it with the feel of handling and braking situations that require heavy braking becomes separated from the with the added weight of the and sudden turns. hitch. Always leave just enough trailer. And always keep in mind that slack so the rig can turn. Never the vehicle you are driving is now Passing allow safety chains to drag on the longer and not as responsive as the More passing distance is needed ground. vehicle is by itself. when towing a trailer. Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to Trailer Brakes Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and attachments, safety go much farther beyond the A loaded trailer that weighs more chains, electrical connectors, lamps, passed vehicle before returning to than 1,500 lbs (680 kg) needs tires and mirror adjustments. If the lane. to have its own brake system that is the trailer has electric brakes, start Backing Up adequate for the weight of the the vehicle and trailer moving trailer. Be sure to read and follow and then apply the trailer brake Hold the bottom of the steering the instructions for the trailer brakes controller by hand to be sure wheel with one hand. Then, to move so they are installed, adjusted the brakes are working. This checks the trailer to the left, move that and maintained properly. the electrical connection at the hand to the left. To move the trailer same time. to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly During the trip, check occasionally and, if possible, have someone to be sure that the load is secure, guide you. and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working. Driving Your Vehicle 4-49

Making Turns When towing a trailer, the arrows When towing at high altitude on on the instrument panel flash steep uphill grades, consider Notice: Making very sharp turns for turns even if the bulbs on the the following: Engine coolant will while trailering could cause trailer are burned out. For this boil at a lower temperature than at the trailer to come in contact with reason you may think other drivers normal altitudes. If the engine is the vehicle. The vehicle could are seeing the signal when they turned off immediately after towing be damaged. Avoid making very are not. It is important to check at high altitude on steep uphill sharp turns while trailering. occasionally to be sure the trailer grades, the vehicle may show signs When turning with a trailer, make bulbs are still working. similar to engine overheating. To wider turns than normal. Do this avoid this, let the engine run so the trailer won’t strike soft Driving On Grades while parked, preferably on level shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees Reduce speed and shift to a lower ground, with the automatic or other objects. Avoid jerky or gear before starting down a long transmission in P (Park) for a sudden maneuvers. Signal well in or steep downgrade. If the few minutes before turning the advance. transmission is not shifted down, the engine off. For vehicles with manual brakes might have to be used so transmissions, let the engine run Turn Signals When Towing a much that they would get hot and no while parked, preferably on Trailer longer work well. level ground, with the transmission The arrows on the instrument panel out of gear and the parking Vehicles with an automatic brake applied, for a few minutes flash whenever signaling a turn transmission can tow in D (Drive). or lane change. Properly hooked up, before turning the engine off. If the Shift the transmission to a lower overheat warning comes on, the trailer lamps also flash, telling gear if the transmission shifts other drivers the vehicle is turning, see Engine Overheating on too often under heavy loads and/or page 5-27. changing lanes or stopping. hilly conditions. For vehicles with a manual transmission, it is better not to use the highest gear. 4-50 Driving Your Vehicle

Parking on Hills 2. Have someone place chocks Leaving After Parking on under the trailer wheels. a Hill { CAUTION 3. When the wheel chocks are in The vehicle has a Hill Start Assist place, release the brake pedal feature, which may be useful Parking the vehicle on a hill with until the chocks absorb the load. when stopped on a grade. See the trailer attached can be 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Braking on page 4-3 for more dangerous. If something goes Then apply the parking brake and information. wrong, the rig could start to move. shift into P (Park) for vehicles 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal People can be injured, and both with an automatic transmission or while you: the vehicle and the trailer can be into gear for vehicles with a damaged. When possible, always manual transmission. • start the engine, park the rig on a ﬂat surface. 5. Release the brake pedal. • shift into a gear, and • release the parking brake. If parking the rig on a hill: 2. Let up on the brake pedal. 1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park) yet for 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is vehicles with an automatic clear of the chocks. transmission, or into gear for 4. Stop and have someone pick up vehicles with a manual and store the chocks. transmission. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill. Driving Your Vehicle 4-51

Maintenance When Trailer Trailer Wiring Harness Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Towing Light-Duty Trailer Wiring Package Package The vehicle needs service more If the vehicle does not have a often when pulling a trailer. See this trailer towing package, the chassis manual’s Maintenance Schedule harness will contain the following or Index for more information. blunt cut circuits: Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic • Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal transmission ﬂuid, engine oil, • Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn axle lubricant, belts, cooling system Signal and brake system. It is a good • White: Ground idea to inspect these before and during the trip. • Brown: Tail Lamps If the vehicle has a trailer towing package, the rear bumper harness Check periodically to see that all To add a trailer towing wiring will have a seven-pin universal hitch nuts and bolts are tight. package, have it installed by your heavy-duty trailer connector dealer/retailer or a qualiﬁed attached to a bracket on the hitch service center. Also, see Add-On platform. Electrical Equipment on page 5-91 for more information. 4-52 Driving Your Vehicle

The trailer towing harness contains Four-Wire Harness Adapter the following seven trailer circuits: If towing a light-duty trailer with a • Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal standard four-way, ﬂat pin • Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn connector, an adapter is available Signal from your dealer/retailer. • Brown: Taillamps • White: Ground • Light Green: Back-up Lamps • Red: Battery Feed Connect the adapter to the seven-pin universal heavy-duty • Dark Blue: Trailer Brake trailer connector attached to If charging a remote (non-vehicle) the bracket on the hitch platform. battery, turn on the headlamps The ﬂip cap on the vehicle’s harness to boost the vehicle system voltage locks onto the tab and helps hold to properly charge the battery. the adapter in place. Plug the four-way pin connector onto the Hold the adapter with the tab adapter. pointing up. Driving Your Vehicle 4-53

Trailer Brake Control Wiring Trailer Recommendations Harness Subtract the hitch loads from the The trailer brake control wiring Cargo Weight Rating (CWR). CWR harness is located under the is the maximum weight of the instrument panel to the right of the load the vehicle can carry. It does steering column. The wires are not include the weight of the people taped to the harness that goes to inside, but you can ﬁgure about the courtesy light under the 150 lbs. (68 kg) for each passenger. instrument panel. The harness has The total cargo load must not be the following wires: more than the vehicles CWR. • Red Wire: AUX B+ Weigh the vehicle with the trailer • Black Wire: Ground attached, so the GVWR or GAWR • Light Blue Wire: Brake Signal are not exceeded. If using a weight-distributing hitch, weigh the • Dark Blue Wire: Trailer Brakes vehicle without the spring bars in place. The best performance is obtained by correctly spreading out the weight of the load and choosing the correct hitch and trailer brakes. For more information see Towing a Trailer on page 4-42. 4-54 Driving Your Vehicle

✍ NOTES Service and Appearance Care 5-1

Fuels in Foreign Brakes ...... 5-30 Service and Countries ...... 5-7 Battery ...... 5-33 Appearance Care Filling the Tank ...... 5-7 Jump Starting ...... 5-34 Filling a Portable Fuel Container ...... 5-8 Rear Axle Rear Axle ...... 5-38 Checking Things Under Service the Hood Four-Wheel Drive Service ...... 5-3 Four-Wheel Drive ...... 5-38 Accessories and Checking Things Under Modiﬁcations ...... 5-3 the Hood ...... 5-9 Front Axle California Proposition Hood Release ...... 5-9 Front Axle ...... 5-39 65 Warning ...... 5-4 Engine Compartment California Perchlorate Overview ...... 5-10 Headlamp Aiming Materials Requirements .....5-4 Engine Oil ...... 5-13 Headlamp Aiming ...... 5-39 Doing Your Own Engine Oil Life System .....5-15 Service Work ...... 5-4 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ...5-17 Bulb Replacement Adding Equipment to the Automatic Transmission Bulb Replacement ...... 5-41 Outside of the Vehicle ...... 5-5 Fluid ...... 5-18 Halogen Bulbs ...... 5-41 Manual Transmission Headlamps ...... 5-41 Fuel Fluid ...... 5-20 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Fuel ...... 5-5 Hydraulic Clutch ...... 5-21 Stoplamps and Back-up Gasoline Octane ...... 5-5 Cooling System ...... 5-22 Lamps (H3) ...... 5-42 Gasoline Speciﬁcations ...... 5-5 Engine Coolant ...... 5-23 Taillamps, Turn Signal, California Fuel ...... 5-5 Engine Overheating ...... 5-27 Stoplamps and Back-up Additives ...... 5-6 Engine Fan Noise ...... 5-28 Lamps (H3T) ...... 5-42 Power Steering Fluid ...... 5-29 License Plate Lamp ...... 5-43 Windshield Washer Fluid ...5-30 Replacement Bulbs ...... 5-43 5-2 Service and Appearance Care

Windshield Wiper Blade Wheel Alignment and Tire Instrument Panel, Vinyl, Replacement Balance ...... 5-63 and Other Plastic Windshield Wiper Blade Wheel Replacement ...... 5-64 Surfaces ...... 5-85 Replacement ...... 5-44 Tire Chains ...... 5-65 Care of Safety Belts ...... 5-85 If a Tire Goes Flat ...... 5-66 Weatherstrips ...... 5-86 Tires Changing a Flat Tire ...... 5-66 Washing Your Vehicle ...... 5-86 Tires ...... 5-44 Removing the Spare Tire Cleaning Exterior Lamps/ Tire Sidewall Labeling ...... 5-45 and Tools (H3) ...... 5-68 Lenses ...... 5-86 Tire Terminology and Removing the Spare Tire Finish Care ...... 5-86 Definitions ...... 5-48 and Tools (H3T) ...... 5-69 Windshield, Backglass, Inflation - Tire Pressure ....5-51 Removing the Flat Tire and Wiper Blades ...... 5-87 Tire Pressure Monitor and Installing the Aluminum or System ...... 5-52 Spare Tire ...... 5-72 Chrome-Plated Wheels Tire Pressure Monitor Secondary Latch and Trim ...... 5-88 Operation ...... 5-54 System (H3T) ...... 5-76 Tires ...... 5-89 Tire Inspection and Storing a Flat or Spare Sheet Metal Damage ...... 5-89 Rotation ...... 5-57 Tire and Tools (H3) ...... 5-78 Finish Damage ...... 5-89 When It Is Time for Storing a Flat or Spare Underbody Maintenance ....5-89 New Tires ...... 5-58 Tire and Tools (H3T) ...... 5-80 Chemical Paint Spotting ....5-90 Buying New Tires ...... 5-59 Spare Tire ...... 5-82 Different Size Tires and Vehicle Identification Wheels ...... 5-61 Appearance Care Vehicle Identification Uniform Tire Quality Interior Cleaning ...... 5-83 Number (VIN) ...... 5-90 Grading ...... 5-62 Fabric/Carpet ...... 5-84 Service Parts Leather ...... 5-85 Identification Label ...... 5-90 Service and Appearance Care 5-3

Electrical System Service Accessories and Add-On Electrical Modifications Equipment ...... 5-91 For service and parts needs, visit Windshield Wiper Fuses ....5-91 your dealer/retailer. You will receive When non-dealer/non-retailer Power Windows and genuine GM parts and GM-trained accessories are added to the Other Power Options ...... 5-91 and supported service people. vehicle, they can affect vehicle Fuses and Circuit Genuine GM parts have one performance and safety, including Breakers ...... 5-91 of these marks: such things as airbags, braking, Engine Compartment stability, ride and handling, Fuse Block ...... 5-92 emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems Capacities and like antilock brakes, traction control, Specifications and stability control. Some of Capacities and these accessories could even cause Specifications ...... 5-96 malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Damage to vehicle components resulting from the installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including control module modifications, are not covered under the terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining warranty coverage for affected parts. 5-4 Service and Appearance Care

GM Accessories are designed to Engine exhaust, many parts and Doing Your Own complement and function with other systems (including some inside the systems on the vehicle. Your GM vehicle), many ﬂuids, and some Service Work dealer/retailer can accessorize the component wear by-products vehicle using genuine GM contain and/or emit these chemicals. { CAUTION Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM California Perchlorate You can be injured and the Accessories, you will know that Materials Requirements vehicle could be damaged if you GM-trained and supported service try to do service work on a vehicle technicians will perform the work Certain types of automotive without knowing enough about it. using genuine GM Accessories. applications, such as airbag • Be sure you have sufficient initiators, seat belt pretensioners, Also, see Adding Equipment to knowledge, experience, the and lithium batteries contained proper replacement parts, and Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on in remote keyless transmitters, may page 1-58. tools before attempting any contain perchlorate materials. vehicle maintenance task. Special handling may be necessary. • Be sure to use the proper California Proposition 65 For additional information, see Warning www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ nuts, bolts, and other perchlorate. fasteners. English and metric Most motor vehicles, including this fasteners can be easily one, contain and/or emit chemicals confused. If the wrong known to the State of California fasteners are used, parts can to cause cancer and birth defects later break or fall off. You or other reproductive harm. could be hurt. Service and Appearance Care 5-5

If doing some of your own service Fuel Gasoline Specifications work, use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to Use of the recommended fuel is At a minimum, gasoline should service the vehicle than this manual an important part of the proper meet ASTM specification can. To order the proper service maintenance of this vehicle. D 4814 in the United States or manual, see Service Publications To help keep the engine clean CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Ordering Information on page 7-15. and maintain optimum vehicle Some gasolines contain an performance, we recommend the octane-enhancing additive called This vehicle has an airbag system. methylcyclopentadienyl manganese Before attempting to do your own use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend service work, see Servicing Your against the use of gasolines Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on Gasoline Octane containing MMT. See Additives on page 1-58. page 5-6 for additional information. Keep a record with all parts receipts Use regular unleaded gasoline with and list the mileage and the date a posted octane rating of 87 or California Fuel of any service work performed. See higher. If the octane rating is less Maintenance Record on page 6-16. than 87, you might notice an audible If the vehicle is certified to meet knocking noise when you drive, California Emissions Standards, it is Adding Equipment to the commonly referred to as spark designed to operate on fuels that Outside of the Vehicle knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline meet California specifications. rated at 87 octane or higher as See the underhood emission control Things added to the outside of the soon as possible. If you are using label. If this fuel is not available vehicle can affect the airflow gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher in states adopting California around it. This can cause wind and you hear heavy knocking, the emissions standards, the vehicle noise and can affect fuel economy engine needs service. will operate satisfactorily on and windshield washer performance. fuels meeting federal specifications, Check with your dealer/retailer but emission control system before adding equipment to performance might be affected. the outside of the vehicle. 5-6 Service and Appearance Care

The malfunction indicator lamp if the vehicle experiences problems However, E85 (85% ethanol) and could turn on and the vehicle due to dirty injectors or valves, other fuels containing more than might fail a smog-check test. look for gasoline that is advertised 10% ethanol must not be used See Malfunction Indicator Lamp as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. in vehicles that were not designed on page 3-30. If this occurs, return for those fuels. For customers who do not use to your authorized dealer/retailer TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline for diagnosis. If it is determined Notice: This vehicle was not regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel that the condition is caused by the designed for fuel that contains System Treatment PLUS, added to type of fuel used, repairs might methanol. Do not use fuel the fuel tank at every engine oil not be covered by the vehicle containing methanol. It can change, can help clean deposits warranty. corrode metal parts in the fuel from fuel injectors and intake valves. system and also damage plastic GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS and rubber parts. That damage Additives is the only gasoline additive would not be covered under To provide cleaner air, all gasolines recommended by General Motors. the vehicle warranty. in the United States are now Also, your dealer/retailer has Some gasolines that are required to contain additives that additives that will help correct and not reformulated for low help prevent engine and fuel system prevent most deposit-related emissions can contain an deposits from forming, allowing problems. octane-enhancing additive called the emission control system to work Gasolines containing oxygenates, methylcyclopentadienyl manganese properly. In most cases, you tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the should not have to add anything to such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines attendant where you buy gasoline the fuel. However, some gasolines whether the fuel contains MMT. contain only the minimum amount of might be available in your area. We recommend that you use these We recommend against the use of additive required to meet U.S. such gasolines. Fuels containing Environmental Protection Agency gasolines, if they comply with the specifications described earlier. MMT can reduce the life of regulations. To help keep fuel spark plugs and the performance injectors and intake valves clean, or Service and Appearance Care 5-7 of the emission control system could Filling the Tank be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this { occurs, return to your dealer/retailer CAUTION for service. Fuel vapor burns violently and a Fuels in Foreign fuel fire can cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and Countries others, read and follow all the If you plan on driving in another instructions on the pump island. country outside the United States or Turn off the engine when you are Canada, the proper fuel might be refueling. Do not smoke if you are hard to find. Never use leaded near fuel or refueling the vehicle. gasoline or any other fuel not Do not use cellular phones. Keep The fuel cap is located on the driver recommended in the previous text sparks, flames, and smoking side of the vehicle. on fuel. Costly repairs caused materials away from fuel. Do not To remove the fuel cap, turn it by use of improper fuel would not leave the fuel pump unattended be covered by the vehicle warranty. slowly counterclockwise. While when refueling the vehicle. This is refueling, let the fuel cap hang by To check the fuel availability, ask an against the law in some places. the tether, if it has one. auto club, or contact a major oil Do not re-enter the vehicle while company that does business in the pumping fuel. Keep children away country where you will be driving. from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel. 5-8 Service and Appearance Care

When replacing the fuel cap, Notice: If you need a new fuel { CAUTION turn it clockwise until it clicks. cap, be sure to get the right type. Make sure the cap is fully Your dealer/retailer can get one Fuel can spray out on you if you installed. The diagnostic system for you. If you get the wrong type, open the fuel cap too quickly. can determine if the fuel cap it may not fit properly. This may If you spill fuel and then has been left off or improperly cause the malfunction indicator something ignites it, you could installed. This would allow fuel to lamp to light and may damage the be badly burned. This spray can evaporate into the atmosphere. fuel tank and emissions system. happen if the tank is nearly full, See Malfunction Indicator Lamp See Malfunction Indicator and is more likely in hot weather. on page 3-30. Lamp on page 3-30. Open the fuel cap slowly and wait The FUEL CAP message displays for any hiss noise to stop. Then on the Driver Information Center Filling a Portable Fuel unscrew the cap all the way. (DIC) if the fuel cap is not properly Container installed. See DIC Warnings Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not and Messages on page 3-37 for { CAUTION top off or overfill the tank and wait more information. a few seconds after you have Never fill a portable fuel container finished pumping before removing { CAUTION while it is in the vehicle. Static the nozzle. Clean fuel from electricity discharge from the painted surfaces as soon as If a fire starts while you are container can ignite the fuel possible. See Washing Your refueling, do not remove the Vehicle on page 5-86. (Continued) nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant. Leave the area immediately. Service and Appearance Care 5-9

Hood Release CAUTION (Continued) Checking Things Under the Hood To open the hood: vapor. You can be badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this { CAUTION occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others: An electric fan under the hood • Dispense fuel only into can start up and injure you even approved containers. when the engine is not running. 1. Pull the handle with this symbol • Do not fill a container while Keep hands, clothing, and tools on it. It is located inside the it is inside a vehicle, in a away from any underhood vehicle on the lower left side of vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, electric fan. the instrument panel. or on any surface other than 2. Release the secondary latch on the ground. the hood. It is located below the • Bring the fill nozzle in contact { CAUTION front center of the hood. with the inside of the fill 3. Lift the hood. opening before operating the Things that burn can get on hot nozzle. Contact should be engine parts and start a fire. Before closing the hood, be sure maintained until the filling is These include liquids like fuel, oil, all the filler caps are on properly. complete. coolant, brake fluid, windshield Then pull the hood down and close • Do not smoke while washer and other fluids, and it firmly. pumping fuel. plastic or rubber. You or others • Do not use a cellular phone could be burned. Be careful not to while pumping fuel. drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine. 5-10 Service and Appearance Care

Engine Compartment Overview When you open the hood on the 3.7L engine, this is what you will see: Service and Appearance Care 5-11

A. Windshield Washer Fluid G. Radiator Pressure Cap. Reservoir. See “Adding Washer See Cooling System on Fluid” under Windshield page 5-22. Washer Fluid on page 5-30. H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal B. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. (GND). See Jump Starting on See Engine Coolant on page 5-34. page 5-23. I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See C. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on “Checking Engine Oil” under page 5-17. Engine Oil on page 5-13. D. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. J. Positive (+) Battery Terminal. See Power Steering Fluid on See Jump Starting on page 5-29. page 5-34. E. Automatic Transmission Fluid K. Brake Fluid Reservoir. Dipstick (If Equipped). See See “Brake Fluid” under “Checking the Fluid Level” Brakes on page 5-30. under Automatic Transmission L. Engine Compartment Fuse Block Fluid on page 5-18. on page 5-92. F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When M. Battery on page 5-33. to Add Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-13. N. Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Reservoir (If Equipped). See Hydraulic Clutch on page 5-21. 5-12 Service and Appearance Care

When you open the hood on the 5.3L engine, this is what you will see: Service and Appearance Care 5-13

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When Engine Oil page 5-17. to Add Engine Oil” under Engine B. Air Filter Restriction Indicator Oil on page 5-13. Checking Engine Oil (If Equipped). See Engine Air H. Brake Fluid Reservoir. It is a good idea to check the Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17. See “Brake Fluid” under Brakes engine oil every time you get fuel. C. Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-30. In order to get an accurate reading, Reservoir. See “Adding Washer I. Battery on page 5-33. the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground. Fluid” under Windshield J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. Washer Fluid on page 5-30. See Power Steering Fluid on The engine oil dipstick handle D. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. page 5-29. is a yellow loop. See Engine See Engine Coolant on K. Engine Compartment Fuse Block Compartment Overview on page 5-23. on page 5-92. page 5-10 for the location of the engine oil dipstick. E. Automatic Transmission L. Radiator Pressure Cap. Fluid Dipstick (If Equipped). See Cooling System on 1. Turn off the engine and give the See “Checking the Fluid Level” page 5-22. oil several minutes to drain back under Automatic Transmission into the oil pan. If you do not Fluid on page 5-18. do this, the oil dipstick might not F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See show the actual level. “Checking Engine Oil” under 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it Engine Oil on page 5-13. with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level. 5-14 Service and Appearance Care

When to Add Engine Oil What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Look for three things:

If the oil is below the cross-hatched See Engine Compartment Overview area (L), add at least one quart/liter on page 5-10 for the location of of the recommended oil. This the engine oil ﬁll cap. section explains what kind of oil to Add enough oil to put the level use. For engine oil crankcase somewhere in the proper operating capacity, see Capacities and range. Push the dipstick all the Speciﬁcations on page 5-96. way back in when you are through. Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating range, the engine could be damaged. Service and Appearance Care 5-15

• GM6094M Notice: Use only engine oil Engine Oil Additives / Engine Use only an oil that meets identified as meeting GM Oil Flushes GM Standard GM6094M. Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Do not add anything to the oil. • SAE 5W-30 Institute Certified For Gasoline The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet SAE 5W-30 is best for the Engines starburst symbol. Failure GM Standard GM6094M are all that vehicle. These numbers on an to use the recommended oil is needed for good performance oil container show its viscosity, can result in engine damage not and engine protection. or thickness. Do not use covered by the vehicle warranty. other viscosity oils such as Engine oil system flushes are not SAE 20W-50. Cold Temperature Operation recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the • American Petroleum Institute If in an area of extreme cold, where − vehicle warranty. (API) starburst symbol the temperature falls below 20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 Engine Oil Life System engine oil. Both provide easier cold starting for the engine at extremely When to Change Engine Oil low temperatures. Always use This vehicle has a computer system an oil that meets the required that indicates when to change the specification, GM6094M. See “What engine oil and filter. This is based on Oils meeting these requirements Kind of Engine Oil to Use” for engine revolutions and engine should have the starburst symbol more information. temperature, and not on mileage. on the container. This symbol Based on driving conditions, indicates that the oil has been the mileage at which an oil change certified by the American is indicated can vary considerably. Petroleum Institute (API). For the oil life system to work properly, the system must be reset every time the oil is changed. 5-16 Service and Appearance Care

When the system has calculated How to Reset the Engine Oil If the CHANGE OIL message that oil life has been diminished, Life System comes back on when the vehicle is it indicates that an oil change started, the engine oil life system is necessary. A CHANGE OIL The Engine Oil Life System has not reset. Repeat the procedure. message comes on. See DIC calculates when to change the See DIC Warnings and Messages Warnings and Messages on engine oil and filter based on vehicle on page 3-37. page 3-37. Change the oil as soon use. Whenever the oil is changed, as possible within the next reset the system so it can calculate What to Do with Used Oil 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible when the next oil change is required. Used engine oil contains certain that, if driving under the best If a situation occurs where the oil is elements that can be unhealthy for conditions, the oil life system might changed prior to a CHANGE OIL your skin and could even cause not indicate that an oil change is message being turned on, reset the cancer. Do not let used oil stay on necessary for over a year. However, system. your skin for very long. Clean your the engine oil and filter must be To reset the Engine Oil Life system: skin and nails with soap and water, changed at least once a year and 1. With the engine off, turn the or a good hand cleaner. Wash or at this time the system must be ignition to ON/RUN. properly dispose of clothing or rags reset. Your dealer/retailer has containing used engine oil. See the 2. Press and release the stem in trained people who will perform this manufacturer’s warnings about the the lower center of the work using genuine parts and reset use and disposal of oil products. instrument cluster until the OIL the system. It is also important LIFE message is displayed. Used oil can be a threat to the to check the oil regularly and keep it environment. If you change your own at the proper level. 3. Once the alternating OIL LIFE and RESET messages appear, oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the If the system is ever reset press and hold the stem until filter before disposal. Never dispose accidentally, the oil must be several beeps sound. This of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) confirms that the oil life system it on the ground, into sewers, or into since the last oil change. has been reset. streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a place that collects Remember to reset the oil life 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. system whenever the oil is changed. used oil. Service and Appearance Care 5-17

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If you { CAUTION are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each engine Operating the engine with the oil change. air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air How to Inspect the Engine Air cleaner not only cleans the air; Cleaner/Filter it helps to stop flames if the To inspect or replace the engine air engine backfires. If it is not there cleaner/filter: and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive 1. Unfasten the clips that hold the with it off, and be careful cover on and remove the cover. 3.7 L shown (5.3 L similar) working on the engine with the 2. Lift out the engine air The engine air cleaner/filter is air cleaner/filter off. cleaner/filter. located in the engine compartment on the passenger side of the 3. Inspect or replace the air filter. Notice: If the air cleaner/filter vehicle. See Engine Compartment See Maintenance Replacement is off, a backfire can cause a Overview on page 5-10 for more Parts on page 6-14 to damaging engine fire. And, dirt information on location. determine which filter to use. can easily get into the engine, 4. Reinstall the engine air which will damage it. Always have When to Inspect the Engine the air cleaner/filter in place when Air Cleaner/Filter cleaner/filter cover. Fasten the clips to hold the cover in place. you are driving. Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. 5-18 Service and Appearance Care

Automatic Transmission Notice: Too much or too little Get the vehicle warmed up by fluid can damage your driving about 15 miles (24 km) when Fluid transmission. Too much can outside temperatures are above When to Check and Change mean that some of the fluid could 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than Automatic Transmission Fluid come out and fall on hot engine 50°F (10°C), drive the vehicle parts or exhaust system parts, in 3 (Third) until the engine A good time to check the automatic starting a fire. Too little fluid temperature gage moves and then transmission fluid level is when could cause the transmission to remains steady for 10 minutes. the engine oil is changed. overheat. Be sure to get an A cold fluid check can be made after accurate reading if you check Change the fluid and filter at the the vehicle has been sitting for your transmission fluid. intervals listed in Additional eight hours or more with the engine Required Services on page 6-6, and Wait at least 30 minutes before off, but this is used only as a be sure to use the transmission checking the transmission fluid level reference. Let the engine run at fluid listed in Recommended Fluids if you have been driving: idle for five minutes if outside and Lubricants on page 6-12. • When outside temperatures are temperatures are 50°F (10°C) or How to Check Automatic above 90°F (32°C). more. If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), Transmission Fluid the engine might have to idle • At high speed for quite a while. longer. Should the fluid level Because this operation can be a • In heavy traffic — especially be low during this cold check, little difficult, you may choose in hot weather. check the fluid hot before adding to have this done at the fluid. Checking the fluid hot gives dealer/retailer service department. • While pulling a trailer. a more accurate reading of the If adding it yourself, be sure to follow To get the right reading, the fluid fluid level. all the instructions here, or there should be at normal operating could be a false reading on the temperature, which is 180°F to dipstick. 200°F (82°C to 93°C). Service and Appearance Care 5-19

Checking the Fluid Level cross-hatched area, for a To prepare the vehicle: cold check or in the HOT or cross-hatched area for a 1. Park the vehicle on a level place. hot check. Be sure to keep the Keep the engine running. dipstick pointed down to get 2. With the parking brake applied, an accurate reading. place the shift lever in P (Park). 4. If the fluid level is in the 3. With your foot on the brake The automatic transmission acceptable range, push pedal, move the shift lever dipstick handle with this symbol the dipstick back in all the way; through each gear range, on it is located in the engine then flip the handle down to pausing for about three seconds compartment on the passenger lock the dipstick in place. in each range. Then, position side of the vehicle. How to Add Automatic the shift lever in P (Park). See Engine Compartment Transmission Fluid 4. Let the engine run at idle for Overview on page 5-10 for more Refer to the Maintenance three minutes or more. information on location. Schedule to determine what kind Then, without shutting off the 2. Push it back in all the way, wait of transmission fluid to use. engine: three seconds, and pull it back See Recommended Fluids and 1. Flip the handle up and then pull out again. Lubricants on page 6-12. out the dipstick and wipe it with Add fluid only after checking the a clean rag or paper towel. transmission fluid while it is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If the fluid level is low, 3. Check both sides of the dipstick, add only enough of the proper and read the lower level. fluid to bring the level up to the The fluid level must be in HOT area for a hot check. the COLD area, below the 5-20 Service and Appearance Care

It does not take much fluid, Manual Transmission Notice: Too much or too little generally less than one pint (0.5 L). fluid can damage your Do not overfill. Fluid transmission. Too little fluid When to Check could cause the transmission to Notice: Use of the incorrect overheat. Be sure to get an automatic transmission fluid may A good time to check the manual accurate reading if you check damage the vehicle, and the transmission fluid is when the your transmission fluid. damages may not be covered engine oil is changed. However, by the vehicle’s warranty. Always the fluid in the manual transmission To check the fluid: use the automatic transmission does not require changing. 1. Park the vehicle on a level fluid listed in Recommended surface, then shut the engine off. Fluids and Lubricants on How to Check Let the vehicle sit until the page 6-12. Because this operation can be a transmission case is cool enough • After adding fluid, recheck the little difficult, you may choose to touch. fluid level as described under to have this done at your GM “How to Check Automatic dealer/retailer service department. Transmission Fluid,” earlier If doing it yourself, be sure to follow in this section. all the instructions here, or there • When the correct fluid level is could be a false reading. obtained, push the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place.

2. Remove the ﬁller plug. Service and Appearance Care 5-21

3. Check that the lubricant level Hydraulic Clutch When to Check and What is up to the bottom of the filler to Use plug hole. The hydraulic clutch linkage in the vehicle is self-adjusting. 4. If the fluid level is good, install The clutch master cylinder reservoir the plug and be sure it is fully is filled with hydraulic clutch fluid. seated. If the fluid level is low, add more fluid as described in the next steps. How to Add Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See Recommended Fluids and The hydraulic clutch fluid reservoir Lubricants on page 6-12. cap has this symbol on it. See 1. Remove the filler plug. Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-10 for reservoir location. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule 2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. to determine how often to check Add only enough fluid to bring It is not necessary to regularly check the fluid level in the clutch master the fluid level up to the bottom of clutch fluid unless a leak in the cylinder reservoir and for the proper the filler plug hole. system is suspected. Adding fluid fluid. See Recommended Fluids 3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the will not correct a leak. and Lubricants on page 6-12. plug is fully seated. A fluid loss in this system could How to Check and Add Fluid indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired. The proper fluid should be added if the level does not reach the bottom of the diaphragm when it is in place in the reservoir. See the instructions on the reservoir cap. 5-22 Service and Appearance Care

Cooling System { CAUTION The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the correct Heater and radiator hoses, and working temperature. other engine parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you can be burned. Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you 5.3L Engine could be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle. A. Coolant Recovery Tank B. Radiator Pressure Cap Notice: Using coolant other C. Engine Cooling Fan than DEX-COOL® can cause 3.7L Engine premature engine, heater core, or radiator corrosion. In addition, A. Coolant Recovery Tank { CAUTION the engine coolant could require B. Engine Cooling Fan changing sooner, at 30,000 miles C. Radiator Pressure Cap An electric engine cooling fan (50 000 km) or 24 months, under the hood can start up even whichever occurs first. Any when the engine is not running and repairs would not be covered by can cause injury. Keep hands, the vehicle warranty. Always ® clothing, and tools away from any use DEX-COOL (silicate-free) underhood electric fan. coolant in the vehicle. Service and Appearance Care 5-23

Engine Coolant • Protects against rust and CAUTION (Continued) corrosion. The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL® engine The vehicle’s coolant warning • Will not damage aluminum parts. coolant. This coolant is designed to system is set for the proper • Helps keep the proper engine remain in the vehicle for five years coolant mixture. With plain water temperature. or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), or the wrong mixture, the engine Notice: If an improper coolant whichever occurs first. could get too hot but you would mixture is used, the engine could not get the overheat warning. The following explains the cooling overheat and be badly damaged. The engine could catch fire and system and how to check and The repair cost would not be add coolant when it is low. you or others could be burned. covered by the vehicle warranty. If there is a problem with engine Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, ® Too much water in the mixture overheating, see Engine drinkable water and DEX-COOL can freeze and crack the engine, Overheating on page 5-27. coolant. radiator, heater core, and What to Use other parts. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL Notice: If extra inhibitors { CAUTION coolant. If using this mixture, and/or additives are used in the nothing else needs to be added. vehicle’s cooling system, the Adding only plain water to the This mixture: vehicle could be damaged. cooling system can be dangerous. Use only the proper mixture of • Gives freezing protection down Plain water, or some other liquid the engine coolant listed in to −34°F (−37°C), outside this manual for the cooling such as alcohol, can boil before temperature. the proper coolant mixture will. system. See Recommended • Gives boiling protection up to Fluids and Lubricants on (Continued) 265°F (129°C), engine page 6-12 for more information. temperature. 5-24 Service and Appearance Care

Checking Coolant else until it cools down. If coolant is How to Add Coolant to the visible but the coolant level is not The vehicle must be on a level Recovery Tank at or above the FULL COLD surface when checking the mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, coolant level. { drinkable water and DEX-COOL CAUTION coolant at the coolant recovery tank, You can be burned if you spill but be sure the cooling system is coolant on hot engine parts. cool before this is done. Coolant contains ethylene glycol The vehicle must be on a level and it will burn if the engine parts surface. When the engine is cold, are hot enough. Do not spill the coolant level should be at FULL coolant on a hot engine. The coolant recovery tank cap has COLD, or a little higher. When this symbol on it. the engine is warm, the level could be above the FULL COLD level. Notice: This vehicle has a It is located toward the rear of speciﬁc coolant ﬁll procedure. the engine compartment on When the engine is cold, the coolant Failure to follow this procedure the passenger side of the vehicle. level should be at least up to the could cause the engine to See Engine Compartment Overview FULL COLD mark. If it is not, there overheat and be severely on page 5-10 for more information could be a leak in the cooling damaged. system. on location. When the coolant in the coolant Check to see if coolant is visible in recovery tank is at the FULL COLD the coolant recovery tank. If the mark, start the vehicle. coolant inside the coolant recovery If coolant is needed, add the proper tank is boiling, do not do anything DEX-COOL coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank. Service and Appearance Care 5-25

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator CAUTION (Continued) They are under pressure, and if { CAUTION you turn the surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they can An electric engine cooling fan come out at high speed. under the hood can start up even Never turn the cap when the when the engine is not running and cooling system, including the can cause injury. Keep hands, surge tank pressure cap, is hot. clothing, and tools away from any Wait for the cooling system and underhood electric fan. surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap. 1. Remove the radiator pressure { CAUTION cap when the cooling system, including the upper radiator Steam and scalding liquids If coolant is needed, add the proper hose, is no longer hot. from a hot cooling system can mixture directly to the radiator, Turn the pressure cap slowly blow out and burn you badly. but be sure the cooling system is counterclockwise about cool before this is done. one full turn. (Continued) If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left. 2. Keep turning the cap to remove it. 5-26 Service and Appearance Care

3. Fill the radiator with the proper 5. Reinstall the cap on the coolant 7. By this time, the coolant level DEX-COOL coolant mixture, up recovery tank, but leave the inside the radiator filler neck to the base of the filler neck. radiator pressure cap off. might be lower. If the level See Engine Coolant on is lower, add more of the proper page 5-23 for more information DEX-COOL coolant mixture about the proper coolant mixture. through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck. 8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed, coolant loss 6. Start the engine and let it run and possible engine damage until you can feel the upper may occur. Be sure the cap is radiator hose getting hot. Watch properly and tightly secured. 4. Fill the coolant recovery tank to out for the engine cooling fan. the FULL COLD mark. Service and Appearance Care 5-27

Engine Overheating The air conditioning might stop If Steam Is Coming From The working if the engine is too hot. Engine Compartment The vehicle has an indicator to warn This is normal and helps cool the of engine overheating. engine. { CAUTION A coolant temperature gage is Notice: Engine damage from displayed on the instrument panel. running the engine without Steam from an overheated engine See Engine Coolant Temperature coolant is not covered by the can burn you badly, even if you Gage on page 3-29. warranty. just open the hood. Stay away You may decide not to lift the hood from the engine if you see or hear Notice: If the engine catches ﬁre when this warning appears, but steam coming from it. Just turn it because of being driven with instead get service help right away. off and get everyone away from no coolant, your vehicle can be See Roadside Service on page 7-6. the vehicle until it cools down. badly damaged. The costly If you do decide to lift the hood, repairs would not be covered by Wait until there is no sign of make sure the vehicle is parked on the vehicle warranty. steam or coolant before you a level surface. open the hood. Then check to see if the engine If you keep driving when your cooling fans are running. If the engine is overheated, the liquids engine is overheating, both fans in it can catch ﬁre. You or others should be running. If they are not, do could be badly burned. Stop your not continue to run the engine and engine if it overheats, and get have the vehicle serviced. out of the vehicle until the engine is cool. 5-28 Service and Appearance Care

If No Steam Is Coming From 3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle Engine Fan Noise The Engine Compartment in N (Neutral) while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road, This vehicle has a clutched engine If an engine overheat warning is shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and cooling fan. When the clutch is displayed but no steam can be seen let the engine idle. engaged, the fan spins faster or heard, the problem may not be to provide more air to cool the too serious. Sometimes the engine If the temperature overheat gage is engine. In most everyday driving can get a little too hot when the no longer in the overheat zone conditions, the clutch is not vehicle: or an overheat warning no longer engaged. This improves fuel displays, the vehicle can be driven. • Climbs a long hill on a hot day. economy and reduces fan noise. Continue to drive the vehicle Under heavy vehicle loading, • Stops after high-speed driving. slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a trailer towing and/or high outside • Idles for long periods in traffic. safe vehicle distance from the temperatures, the fan speed car in front of you. If the warning increases when the clutch engages. • Tows a trailer. See “Driving does not come back on, continue to So you may hear an increase in on Grades” under Towing a drive normally. fan noise. This is normal and should Trailer on page 4-42. If the warning continues, pull over, not be mistaken as the transmission If the overheat warning is displayed stop, and park the vehicle right away. slipping or making extra shifts. with no sign of steam: It is merely the cooling system If there is no sign of steam, idle the 1. Turn the air conditioning off. functioning properly. The fan will engine for three minutes while slow down when additional cooling 2. Turn the heater on to the highest parked. If the warning is still is not required and the clutch temperature and to the highest displayed, turn off the engine until disengages. fan speed. Open the windows as it cools down. necessary. You may also hear this fan noise when you start the engine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages. Service and Appearance Care 5-29

Power Steering Fluid How to Check Power What to Use Steering Fluid To determine what kind of fluid to 1. Turn the key off and let the use, see Recommended Fluids and engine compartment cool down. Lubricants on page 6-12. Always 2. Wipe the cap and the top of the use the proper fluid. reservoir clean. Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid 3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the may damage the vehicle and dipstick with a clean rag. the damages may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty. 4. Replace the cap and completely Always use the correct fluid tighten it. listed in Recommended Fluids 5. Then remove the cap again and and Lubricants on page 6-12. See Engine Compartment Overview look at the fluid level on the on page 5-10 for reservoir location. dipstick. When to Check Power The level should be between the Steering Fluid ADD and FULL marks. If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the It is not necessary to regularly level up to the proper range. check power steering fluid unless a leak in the system is suspected or an unusual noise is heard. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired. 5-30 Service and Appearance Care

Windshield Washer Fluid Notice: Brakes • When using concentrated What to Use washer fluid, follow the Brake Fluid When windshield washer fluid is manufacturer’s instructions needed, be sure to read the for adding water. manufacturer’s instructions before • Do not mix water with use. If operating the vehicle in ready-to-use washer fluid. an area where the temperature may Water can cause the solution fall below freezing, use a fluid that The brake master cylinder reservoir to freeze and damage your is filled with DOT-3 brake fluid. has sufficient protection against washer fluid tank and other freezing. See Engine Compartment Overview parts of the washer system. on page 5-10 for the location of Adding Washer Fluid Also, water does not clean as the reservoir. well as washer fluid. There are only two reasons why the • Fill the washer fluid tank only brake fluid level in the reservoir three-quarters full when it is might go down: very cold. This allows for fluid expansion if freezing occurs, • The brake fluid level goes down which could damage the tank if because of normal brake lining it is completely full. wear. When new linings are installed, the fluid level goes Open the cap with the washer • Do not use engine coolant back up. symbol on it. Add washer fluid until (antifreeze) in your windshield the tank is full. See Engine washer. It can damage the • A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic Compartment Overview on vehicle’s windshield washer system can also cause a low fluid page 5-10 for reservoir location. system and paint. level. Have the brake hydraulic system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not work well. Service and Appearance Care 5-31

Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding Checking Brake Fluid fluid does not correct a leak. If fluid is { CAUTION Check brake fluid by looking at the added when the linings are worn, brake fluid reservoir. See Engine there will be too much fluid when new With the wrong kind of fluid in the Compartment Overview on brake linings are installed. Add or brake hydraulic system, the brakes page 5-10. remove brake fluid, as necessary, might not work well. This could only when work is done on the brake The fluid level should be above cause a crash. Always use the hydraulic system. MIN. If it is not, have the brake proper brake fluid. hydraulic system checked to see { CAUTION if there is a leak. Notice: After work is done on the brake • Using the wrong fluid can badly If too much brake fluid is added, hydraulic system, make sure the damage brake hydraulic system it can spill on the engine and level is above the MIN but not over parts. For example, just a few burn, if the engine is hot enough. the MAX mark. drops of mineral-based oil, You or others could be burned, such as engine oil, in the brake What to Add and the vehicle could be hydraulic system can damage damaged. Add brake fluid only Use only new DOT-3 brake fluid brake hydraulic system parts so when work is done on the brake from a sealed container. See badly that they will have to be hydraulic system. See “Checking Recommended Fluids and replaced. Do not let someone Brake Fluid” in this section. Lubricants on page 6-12. put in the wrong kind of fluid. Always clean the brake fluid • If brake fluid is spilled on the Refer to the Maintenance Schedule reservoir cap and the area around vehicle’s painted surfaces, the to determine when to check the the cap before removing it. This paint finish can be damaged. brake fluid. See Scheduled helps keep dirt from entering Be careful not to spill brake fluid Maintenance on page 6-4. the reservoir. on the vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-86. 5-32 Service and Appearance Care

Brake Wear Notice: Continuing to drive with Brake Pedal Travel worn-out brake pads could This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc See your dealer/retailer if the brake result in costly brake repair. brake pads have built-in wear pedal does not return to normal indicators that make a high-pitched Some driving conditions or climates height, or if there is a rapid increase warning sound when the brake can cause a brake squeal when in pedal travel. This could be a pads are worn and new pads are the brakes are first applied or lightly sign that brake service might needed. The sound can come applied. This does not mean be required. and go or be heard all the time the something is wrong with the brakes. vehicle is moving, except when Brake Adjustment Properly torqued wheel nuts are applying the brake pedal firmly. necessary to help prevent Every brake stop, the disc brakes { brake pulsation. When tires are adjust for wear. CAUTION rotated, inspect brake pads for wear Replacing Brake System Parts and evenly tighten wheel nuts in The brake wear warning sound the proper sequence to torque The braking system on a vehicle means that soon the brakes will specifications in Capacities and is complex. Its many parts have not work well. That could lead to Specifications on page 5-96. to be of top quality and work an accident. When the brake wear well together if the vehicle is Brake linings should always be to have really good braking. warning sound is heard, have the replaced as complete axle sets. vehicle serviced. The vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts. Service and Appearance Care 5-33

When parts of the braking system Battery Vehicle Storage are replaced — for example, This vehicle has a maintenance free when the brake linings wear down { CAUTION and new ones are installed — be battery. When it is time for a new sure to get new approved battery, see your dealer/retailer for one that has the replacement Batteries have acid that can burn replacement parts. If this is not you and gas that can explode. done, the brakes might not work number shown on the original You can be badly hurt if you properly. For example, if someone battery’s label. See Engine are not careful. See Jump puts in brake linings that are Compartment Overview on wrong for the vehicle, the balance page 5-10 for battery location. Starting on page 5-34 for tips between the front and rear brakes on working around a battery Warning: Battery posts, terminals, without getting hurt. can change — for the worse. and related accessories contain The braking performance expected lead and lead compounds, can change in many other ways chemicals known to the State of Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is if the wrong replacement brake parts California to cause cancer and driven infrequently, remove the − are installed. reproductive harm. Wash hands black, negative ( ) cable from the after handling. battery. This helps keep the battery from running down. Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle, remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain the charge of the battery over an extended period of time. 5-34 Service and Appearance Care

Jump Starting Notice: Ignoring these steps 2. Get the vehicles close enough so could result in costly damage to the jumper cables can reach, If the vehicle’s battery has run the vehicle that would not be but be sure the vehicles are not down, you may want to use another covered by the warranty. touching each other. If they vehicle and some jumper cables Trying to start the vehicle by are, it could cause a ground to start your vehicle. Be sure to use connection you do not want. the following steps to do it safely. pushing or pulling it will not work, and it could damage the vehicle. You would not be able to start your vehicle, and the bad { CAUTION 1. Check the other vehicle. grounding could damage the It must have a 12-volt battery electrical systems. with a negative ground system. Batteries can hurt you. They can To avoid the possibility of the be dangerous because: Notice: If the other vehicle’s vehicles rolling, set the parking • They contain acid that can system is not a 12-volt system brake ﬁrmly on both vehicles burn you. with a negative ground, both involved in the jump start • They contain gas that can vehicles can be damaged. Only procedure. Put an automatic explode or ignite. use vehicles with 12-volt systems transmission in P (Park) or • They contain enough with negative grounds to jump a manual transmission in Neutral before setting the electricity to burn you. start your vehicle. parking brake. If you have a If you do not follow these steps four-wheel-drive vehicle, exactly, some or all of these be sure the transfer case is things can hurt you. not in Neutral. Service and Appearance Care 5-35

Notice: If you leave the radio or 4. Open the hoods and locate other accessories on during the batteries on both vehicles. CAUTION (Continued) the jump starting procedure, they You will use the positive (+) could be damaged. The repairs battery terminal and the remote Be sure the batteries have would not be covered by the negative (−) jump starting enough water. You do not need warranty. Always turn off the terminal to jump start your to add water to the ACDelco® radio and other accessories when vehicle. To access the battery (or batteries) installed in jump starting the vehicle. positive (+) battery terminal, your new vehicle. But if a battery 3. Turn off the ignition on both open the terminal cover. has filler caps, be sure the right vehicles. Unplug unnecessary See Engine Compartment amount of fluid is there. If it is accessories plugged into Overview on page 5-10 for low, add water to take care of that the cigarette lighter or the more information on the first. If you do not, explosive gas accessory power outlets. Turn off terminal locations. could be present. the radio and all lamps that Battery fluid contains acid that are not needed. This will avoid { CAUTION can burn you. Do not get it on sparks and help save both you. If you accidentally get it in batteries. And it could save Using a match near a battery can your eyes or on your skin, flush the radio! cause battery gas to explode. the place with water and get People have been hurt doing this, medical help immediately. and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light. (Continued) 5-36 Service and Appearance Care

Do not connect positive (+) to 8. Now connect the black { CAUTION negative (−) or you will get negative (−) cable to the a short that would damage the negative (−) terminal of the Fans or other moving engine battery and maybe other good battery. Use a remote parts can injure you badly. Keep parts too. And do not connect negative (−) terminal if the your hands away from moving the negative (−) cable to vehicle has one. − parts once the engine is running. the negative ( ) terminal on the Do not let the other end touch dead battery because this anything until the next step. 5. Check that the jumper cables can cause sparks. The other end of the negative (−) do not have loose or missing 6. Connect the red positive (+) cable does not go to the dead insulation. If they do, you could cable to the positive (+) terminal battery. It goes to a heavy, get a shock. The vehicles of the dead battery. Use a unpainted metal engine part, could be damaged too. remote positive (+) terminal if the or to a remote negative (−) Before you connect the cables, vehicle has one. terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery. here are some basic things 7. Do not let the other end touch you should know. Positive (+) will metal. Connect it to the 9. Connect the other end of the go to positive (+) or to a positive (+) terminal of the negative (−) cable at least remote positive (+) terminal if the 18 inches (45 cm) away from − good battery. Use a remote vehicle has one. Negative ( ) positive (+) terminal if the the dead battery, but not will go to a heavy, unpainted vehicle has one. near engine parts that move. metal engine part or to a remote The electrical connection is just − negative ( ) terminal if the as good there, and the chance vehicle has one. of sparks getting back to the battery is much less. Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) terminal, marked GND (Ground), for this purpose. Service and Appearance Care 5-37

10. Now start the vehicle with the To disconnect the jumper cables good battery and run the from both vehicles, do the following: engine for a while. 1. Disconnect the black negative (−) 11. Try to start the vehicle that had cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery. If it will not the dead battery. start after a few tries, it probably 2. Disconnect the black negative (−) needs service. cable from the vehicle with the Notice: If the jumper cables are good battery. connected or removed in the 3. Disconnect the red positive (+) wrong order, electrical shorting cable from the vehicle with the may occur and damage the good battery. vehicle. The repairs would not Jumper Cable Removal be covered by your warranty. 4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other vehicle. Always connect and remove the A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine jumper cables in the correct Part or Remote Negative (−) 5. Return the positive (+) battery order, making sure that the cables Terminal terminal cover to its original do not touch each other or position. B. Good Battery or Remote other metal. Positive (+) and Remote Negative (−) Terminals C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal 5-38 Service and Appearance Care

Rear Axle Four-Wheel Drive When to Check and Change It is recommended that the Lubricant four-wheel drive transfer case fluid be checked and filled by the It is not necessary to regularly dealer/retailer. check rear axle fluid unless a leak is suspected or an unusual noise is heard. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected and repaired.

How to Check Lubricant A. Rear Axle To get an accurate reading, the B. Filler Plug vehicle should be on a level surface. The proper level for the rear axle ﬂuid is 0 to 3/8 inch (0 mm to 10 mm) below the bottom of the ﬁller plug hole, located on the rear axle. What to Use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12 to determine which kind of lubricant to use. Service and Appearance Care 5-39

Front Axle Headlamp Aiming The vehicle should be: • Placed so the headlamps are It is not necessary to regularly The vehicle may have a visual 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light check front axle fluid unless a leak optical headlamp aiming system. colored wall or other flat surface. is suspected or an unusual noise The aim has been preset at is heard. A fluid loss could indicate the factory and should need no • On a level surface which is level a problem. further adjustment. all the way to a wall. It is recommended that the front However, if the vehicle is damaged • Placed so it is at a right angle to axle fluid be checked and filled by in a crash, the headlamp aim the wall or other flat surface. your dealer/retailer. may be affected and adjustment • Clear of any snow, ice, or may be necessary. mudonit. If oncoming vehicles flash their • Fully assembled, the tires high beams at you, this may also properly inflated, and all other mean the vertical aim needs to work stopped while headlamp be adjusted. aiming is being performed. It is recommended that the vehicle • Normally loaded with the spare is taken to your dealer/retailer tire in its original location and a for service if the headlamps need to full tank of fuel and one person or be re-aimed. It is possible however, 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on the to re-aim the headlamps as driver seat. described. 5-40 Service and Appearance Care

To adjust the vertical aim: This should allow only the beam 1. Open the hood. See Hood of light from the headlamp being Release on page 5-9. aimed to be seen on the wall.

3. At a wall, measure from the ground upward the recorded distance from Step 2 and mark it. 4. Draw or tape a horizontal line the Passenger Side Shown 2. Record the distance from the width of the vehicle at the wall 6. Locate the vertical headlamp ground to the aim dot on the where it was marked it Step 4. aiming screws, which are headlamp. Notice: Do not cover a headlamp under the hood near each to improve beam cut-off when headlamp assembly. aiming. Covering a headlamp may The adjustment screw can be cause excessive heat build-up turned with an E8 Torx® socket which may cause damage to the or T15 Torx® screwdriver. headlamp. 5. Turn on the headlamps and place a piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the headlamp not being aimed. Service and Appearance Care 5-41

Bulb Replacement Headlamps For the proper type of replacement To replace a headlamp bulb: bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs 1. Open the hood. See Hood on page 5-43. Release on page 5-9 for more information. For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer/retailer. Halogen Bulbs 7. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal tape { CAUTION line. Turn it clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or Halogen bulbs have pressurized lower the beam. gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or The top edge of the cut-off others could be injured. Be sure should be positioned at the to read and follow the instructions 2. Turn the bulb socket bottom edge of the horizontal on the bulb package. counterclockwise to remove it tape line. from the headlamp assembly 8. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for the and pull it straight out. opposite headlamp. 3. Unplug the electrical connector by pushing the release tab and pulling the bulb socket out. 4. Replace with a new bulb socket. 5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall. 5-42 Service and Appearance Care

Taillamps, Turn Signal, To replace one of these bulbs in the 5. Pull the old bulb to release it Stoplamps and Back-up taillamp assembly: from the socket. Lamps (H3) 1. Open the swing-gate. 6. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to See Swing-gate on page 2-9. reinstall. Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps (H3T)

A. Stoplamp, Taillamp and Turn Passenger Side Shown Signal Lamp B. Back-up Lamp 2. Remove the two screws from the taillamp assembly. 3. Pull the taillamp assembly away from the vehicle. A. Stoplamp and Taillamp 4. Turn the bulb socket B. Turn Signal Lamp counterclockwise to remove it C. Back-up Lamp from the taillamp assembly. Service and Appearance Care 5-43

To replace one of these bulbs in the 6. Turn the bulb socket clockwise to 4. Install the new bulb into the taillamp assembly: reinstall in the taillamp assembly. socket. 1. Open the tailgate. See Tailgate 7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly 5. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to on page 2-7. making sure to line up the pins reinstall. with the vehicle. 8. Reinstall the two screws. Replacement Bulbs License Plate Lamp Bulb Exterior Lamp Number To replace one of these bulbs: Back-up Lamp (H3T) W16W Back-up (H3), Stoplamp, 3157K Taillamp and Turn Signal Lamp License Plate Lamp 194 1. Remove the two screws holding Low-Beam and 2. Remove the two screws from the the license plate lamp. High-Beam H13 taillamp assembly. Headlamp 2. Pull the license plate lamp away 3. Pull the taillamp assembly away from the fascia. from the vehicle. For replacement bulbs not listed 3. Turn the bulb socket here, contact your dealer/retailer. 4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the counterclockwise to remove it bulb straight out of the license from the taillamp assembly. plate lamp assembly. 5. Pull the old bulb to release it from the socket. 5-44 Service and Appearance Care

Windshield Wiper Tires Blade Replacement Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by Windshield wiper blades should be a leading tire manufacturer. inspected for wear and cracking. If you ever have questions about See Scheduled Maintenance your tire warranty and where on page 6-4 for more information. to obtain service, see your Replacement blades come in vehicle Warranty booklet different types and are removed in for details. For additional different ways. For proper type information refer to the tire and length, see Maintenance 2. Push the release lever (B) to manufacturer. Replacement Parts on page 6-14. disengage the hook and push To replace the windshield wiper the wiper arm (A) out of the { CAUTION blade: blade (C). 3. Push the new wiper blade Poorly maintained and securely on the wiper arm improperly used tires are until you hear the release lever dangerous. click into place. • Overloading your vehicle’s tires can To replace the rear wiper blade, cause overheating as a lift the rear wiper arm from the result of too much ﬂexing. window and pull the blade. You could have an air-out and a serious accident. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-35. 1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield. (Continued) Service and Appearance Care 5-45

Tire Sidewall Labeling aspect ratio, construction type, CAUTION (Continued) and service description. Useful information about a tire See the “Tire Size” illustration • Underinflated tires pose is molded into the sidewall. later in this section for more the same danger as The following illustrations are detail. overloaded tires. The examples of a typical P-Metric resulting accident could and a LT-Metric tire sidewall. (B) TPC Spec (Tire cause serious injury. Performance Criteria Check all tires frequently to Specification): Original maintain the recommended equipment tires designed to pressure. Tire pressure GM’s specific tire performance should be checked when criteria have a TPC specification your vehicle’s tires are code molded onto the sidewall. cold. See Inflation - Tire GM’s TPC specifications meet Pressure on page 5-51. or exceed all federal safety guidelines. • Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured, (C) DOT (Department of or broken by a sudden Transportation): The impact — such as when Department of Transportation you hit a pothole. Keep Passenger (P-Metric) Tire (DOT) code indicates that tires at the recommended the tire is in compliance pressure. (A) Tire Size: The tire size code with the U.S. Department of • Worn, old tires can cause is a combination of letters and Transportation Motor Vehicle accidents. If the tire’s tread numbers used to define a Safety Standards. is badly worn, or if your particular tire’s width, height, vehicle’s tires have been damaged, replace them. 5-46 Service and Appearance Care

(D) Tire Identification Number (G) Maximum Cold Inflation aspect ratio, construction type, (TIN): The letters and numbers Load Limit: Maximum load that and service description. following DOT code are the can be carried and the maximum See the “Tire Size” illustration Tire Identification Number (TIN). pressure needed to support that later in this section for more The TIN shows the manufacturer load. For information on detail. and plant code, tire size, and recommended tire pressure see date the tire was manufactured. Inflation - Tire Pressure on (B) TPC Spec (Tire The TIN is molded onto both page 5-51 and Loading the Performance Criteria sides of the tire, although only Vehicle on page 4-35. Specification): Original one side may have the date equipment tires designed to of manufacture. GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification (E) Tire Ply Material: The type code molded onto the sidewall. of cord and number of plies in the GM’s TPC specifications meet sidewall and under the tread. or exceed all federal safety guidelines. (F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire (C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: manufacturers are required to Maximum load that can be grade tires based on three carried and the maximum performance factors: treadwear, pressure needed to support traction, and temperature that load when used in a dual resistance. For more information, configuration. For information on see Uniform Tire Quality Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire recommended tire pressure see Grading on page 5-62. Inflation - Tire Pressure on (A) Tire Size: The tire size code page 5-51 and Loading the is a combination of letters and Vehicle on page 4-35. numbers used to define a particular tire’s width, height, Service and Appearance Care 5-47

(D) DOT (Department of For information on recommended (A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Transportation): The tire pressure see Inflation - Tire The United States version of Department of Transportation Pressure on page 5-51 and a metric tire sizing system. (DOT) code indicates that Loading the Vehicle on The letter P as the first the tire is in compliance page 4-35. character in the tire size with the U.S. Department of means a passenger vehicle Transportation Motor Vehicle Tire Size tire engineered to standards Safety Standards. The following examples show set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association. (E) Tire Identification Number the different parts of a tire size. (TIN): The letters and numbers (A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) following DOT code are the Tire: The United States version Tire Identification Number (TIN). of a metric tire sizing system. The TIN shows the manufacturer The letters LT as the first and plant code, tire size, and two characters in the tire date the tire was manufactured. size means a light truck tire The TIN is molded onto both engineered to standards set sides of the tire, although Passenger (P-Metric) Tire by the U.S. Tire and Rim only one side may have the date Association. of manufacture. (B) Tire Width: The three-digit (F) Tire Ply Material: The type number indicates the tire section of cord and number of plies in the width in millimeters from sidewall sidewall and under the tread. to sidewall. (G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that can be Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used as a single. 5-48 Service and Appearance Care

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit Tire Terminology and Bead: The tire bead contains number that indicates the tire Deﬁnitions steel wires wrapped by steel height-to-width measurements. cords that hold the tire onto For example, if the tire size Air Pressure: The amount of the rim. aspect ratio is 75, as shown air inside the tire pressing in item C of the light truck Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire outward on each square inch in which the plies are laid at (LT-Metric) tire illustration, of the tire. Air pressure is it would mean that the tire’s alternate angles less than expressed in pounds per square 90 degrees to the centerline sidewall is 75 percent as high inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa). as it is wide. of the tread. Accessory Weight: This means (D) Construction Code: the combined weight of optional Cold Tire Pressure: The A letter code is used to indicate accessories. Some examples amount of air pressure in a tire, the type of ply construction in of optional accessories are, measured in pounds per the tire. The letter R means automatic transmission, power square inch (psi) or kilopascals radial ply construction; the steering, power brakes, power (kPa) before a tire has built letter D means diagonal or windows, power seats, and air up heat from driving. See bias ply construction; and the conditioning. Inﬂation - Tire Pressure on letter B means belted-bias page 5-51. ply construction. Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to its width. Curb Weight: The weight of a (E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of motor vehicle with standard the wheel in inches. Belt: A rubber coated layer of and optional equipment including cords that is located between the the maximum capacity of fuel, (F) Service Description: plies and the tread. Cords may oil, and coolant, but without The service description indicates be made from steel or other passengers and cargo. the load range and speed reinforcing materials. rating of a tire. The load index can range from 1 to 279. Speed ratings range from A to Z. Service and Appearance Care 5-49

DOT Markings: A code molded Intended Outboard Sidewall: Maximum Loaded Vehicle into the sidewall of a tire The side of an asymmetrical tire, Weight: The sum of curb signifying that the tire is in that must always face outward weight, accessory weight, compliance with the U.S. when mounted on a vehicle. vehicle capacity weight, and Department of Transportation production options weight. (DOT) motor vehicle safety Kilopascal (kPa): The metric standards. The DOT code unit for air pressure. Normal Occupant Weight: includes the Tire Identification The number of occupants Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: a vehicle is designed to seat Number (TIN), an alphanumeric A tire used on light duty trucks designator which can also multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg). and some multipurpose See Loading the Vehicle identify the tire manufacturer, passenger vehicles. production plant, brand, and date on page 4-35. of production. Load Index: An assigned Occupant Distribution: number ranging from 1 to 279 Designated seating positions. GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight that corresponds to the load Rating. See Loading the Vehicle carrying capacity of a tire. Outward Facing Sidewall: on page 4-35. The side of an asymmetrical tire Maximum Inflation Pressure: that has a particular side that GAWR FRT: Gross Axle The maximum air pressure Weight Rating for the front axle. faces outward when mounted on to which a cold tire can be a vehicle. The side of the tire See Loading the Vehicle on inflated. The maximum air page 4-35. that contains a whitewall, pressure is molded onto the bears white lettering, or bears GAWR RR: Gross Axle sidewall. manufacturer, brand, and/or Weight Rating for the rear axle. Maximum Load Rating: model name molding that See Loading the Vehicle on The load rating for a tire at the is higher or deeper than the page 4-35. maximum permissible inflation same moldings on the pressure for that tire. other sidewall of the tire. 5-50 Service and Appearance Care

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Traction: The friction between Vehicle Capacity Weight: A tire used on passenger cars the tire and the road surface. The number of designated and some light duty trucks The amount of grip provided. seating positions multiplied and multipurpose vehicles. by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated Tread: The portion of a tire that cargo load. See Loading the Recommended Inflation comes into contact with the road. Pressure: Vehicle Vehicle on page 4-35. manufacturer’s recommended Treadwear Indicators: Narrow Vehicle Maximum Load on tire inflation pressure as bands, sometimes called wear the Tire: Load on an individual shown on the tire placard. bars, that show across the tread tire due to curb weight, See Inflation - Tire Pressure on of a tire when only 1/16 inch accessory weight, occupant page 5-51 and Loading the (1.6 mm) of tread remains. weight, and cargo weight. Vehicle on page 4-35. See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-58. Vehicle Placard: A label Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic permanently attached to a tire in which the ply cords that UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality vehicle showing the vehicle’s extend to the beads are laid Grading Standards): A tire capacity weight and the at 90 degrees to the centerline information system that provides original equipment tire size of the tread. consumers with ratings for a and recommended inflation tire’s traction, temperature, Rim: A metal support for a tire pressure. See “Tire and and treadwear. Ratings are Loading Information Label” and upon which the tire beads determined by tire manufacturers are seated. under Loading the Vehicle using government testing on page 4-35. Sidewall: The portion of a tire procedures. The ratings are between the tread and the bead. molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality Speed Rating: An alphanumeric Grading on page 5-62. code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate. Service and Appearance Care 5-51

Inflation - Tire Pressure A vehicle specific Tire and When to Check Loading Information label is Tires need the correct amount of attached to your vehicle. Check your tires once a month air pressure to operate effectively. or more. Also check the tire This label shows your vehicle’s pressure of the spare tire. If your Notice: Do not let anyone tell original equipment tires and vehicle has a compact spare you that under-inflation or the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they are cold. tire, it should be at 60 psi over-inflation is all right. It is (420 kPa). See Spare Tire on not. If your tires do not have The recommended cold tire inflation pressure, shown on the page 5-82 for additional enough air (under-inflation), information. you can get the following: label, is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to How to Check • Too much flexing support your vehicle’s maximum • Too much heat load carrying capacity. Use a good quality pocket-type • Tire overloading gage to check tire pressure. For additional information You cannot tell if your tires are • Premature or irregular wear regarding how much weight your properly inflated simply by • Poor handling vehicle can carry, and an looking at them. Radial tires may example of the Tire and Loading • Reduced fuel economy look properly inflated even Information label, see Loading when they are underinflated. If your tires have too much air the Vehicle on page 4-35. Check the tire’s inflation (over-inflation), you can get How you load your vehicle pressure when the tires are the following: affects vehicle handling and ride cold. Cold means your vehicle • Unusual wear comfort. Never load your vehicle has been sitting for at least with more weight than it was • Poor handling three hours or driven no more designed to carry. than 1 mile (1.6 km). • Rough ride • Needless damage from road hazards 5-52 Service and Appearance Care

Remove the valve cap from Tire Pressure Monitor As an added safety feature, your the tire valve stem. Press the tire System vehicle has been equipped with gage firmly onto the valve to a tire pressure monitoring system get a pressure measurement. The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) that illuminates a low If the cold tire inflation pressure (TPMS) uses radio and sensor tire pressure telltale when one or matches the recommended technology to check tire pressure more of your tires is significantly pressure on the Tire and levels. The TPMS sensors monitor under-inflated. Loading Information label, no the air pressure in your vehicle’s Accordingly, when the low tire further adjustment is necessary. tires and transmit tire pressure pressure telltale illuminates, you If the inflation pressure is low, readings to a receiver located in should stop and check your tires as add air until you reach the the vehicle. soon as possible, and inflate them recommended amount. Each tire, including the spare to the proper pressure. Driving on a If you overfill the tire, release air (if provided), should be checked significantly under-inflated tire by pushing on the metal stem monthly when cold and inflated to causes the tire to overheat and can in the center of the tire valve. the inflation pressure recommended lead to tire failure. Under-inflation Recheck the tire pressure by the vehicle manufacturer on also reduces fuel efficiency and tire with the tire gage. the vehicle placard or tire inflation tread life, and may affect the pressure label. (If your vehicle vehicle’s handling and stopping Be sure to put the valve caps has tires of a different size than ability. back on the valve stems. the size indicated on the vehicle Please note that the TPMS is They help prevent leaks by placard or tire inflation pressure keeping out dirt and moisture. not a substitute for proper tire label, you should determine the maintenance, and it is the driver’s proper tire inflation pressure responsibility to maintain correct tire for those tires.) pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Service and Appearance Care 5-53

Your vehicle has also been vehicle to ensure that the The TPMS operates on a radio equipped with a TPMS malfunction replacement or alternate tires and frequency and complies with indicator to indicate when the wheels allow the TPMS to continue RSS-210 of Industry and Science system is not operating properly. to function properly. Canada. Operation is subject to the The TPMS malfunction indicator following two conditions: See Tire Pressure Monitor is combined with the low tire Operation on page 5-54 for 1. This device may not cause pressure telltale. When the system additional information. interference. detects a malfunction, the telltale will ﬂash for approximately Federal Communications 2. This device must accept any one minute and then remain Commission (FCC) and interference received, including continuously illuminated. This Industry and Science Canada interference that may cause sequence will continue upon undesired operation of the subsequent vehicle start-ups as The Tire Pressure Monitor System device. long as the malfunction exists. (TPMS) operates on a radio frequency and complies with Changes or modiﬁcations to this When the malfunction indicator is Part 15 of the FCC Rules. system by other than an authorized illuminated, the system may Operation is subject to the service facility could void not be able to detect or signal low following two conditions: authorization to use this equipment. tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety 1. This device may not cause of reasons, including the installation harmful interference. of replacement or alternate tires 2. This device must accept any or wheels on the vehicle that interference received, including prevent the TPMS from functioning interference that may cause properly. Always check the TPMS undesired operation. malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your 5-54 Service and Appearance Care

Tire Pressure Monitor At the same time, a Driver A Tire and Loading Information Information Center (DIC) message label, attached to the vehicle, shows Operation is displayed on the DIC display the size of the vehicle’s original This vehicle may have a Tire screen. The low tire pressure equipment tires and the correct Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). warning light and the DIC warning inflation pressure for the vehicle’s The TPMS is designed to warn message come on at each tires when they are cold. See the driver when a low tire pressure ignition cycle until the tires are Loading the Vehicle on page 4-35, condition exists. TPMS sensors inflated to the correct inflation for an example of the Tire and are mounted onto each tire and pressure. For additional information Loading Information label and its wheel assembly on the vehicle, and details about the DIC operation location on the vehicle. Also see excluding the spare tire. The TPMS and displays see DIC Operation and Inflation - Tire Pressure on sensors monitor the air pressure Displays on page 3-34 and DIC page 5-51. in the vehicle’s tires and transmit the Warnings and Messages on The vehicle’s TPMS can warn you tire pressure readings to a receiver page 3-37. about a low tire pressure condition located in the vehicle. The low tire pressure warning light but it does not replace normal may come on in cool weather tire maintenance. See Tire when the vehicle is first started, and Inspection and Rotation on then turn off as you start to drive. page 5-57 and Tires on page 5-44. This could be an early indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are Notice: Liquid tire sealants When a low tire pressure condition getting low and need to be inflated could damage the Tire Pressure is detected, the TPMS illuminates to the proper pressure. Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. the low tire pressure warning light Sensor damage caused by using located on the instrument panel a tire sealant is not covered cluster. by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire sealants. Service and Appearance Care 5-55

TPMS Malfunction Light • The TPMS sensor matching • Replacement tires or wheels do and Message process was started but not not match the vehicle’s original completed or not completed equipment tires or wheels. Tires The TPMS will not function properly successfully after rotating the and wheels other than those if one or more of the TPMS vehicle’s tires. The DIC message recommended for the vehicle sensors are missing or inoperable. and TPMS malfunction light could prevent the TPMS from When the system detects a should go off once the TPMS functioning properly. See Buying malfunction, the low tire warning sensor matching process is New Tires on page 5-59. light ﬂashes for about one minute performed successfully. and then stays on for the remainder • Operating electronic devices or See “TPMS Sensor Matching of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning being near facilities using radio Process” later in this section. message is also displayed. The low wave frequencies similar to the tire warning light and DIC warning • One or more TPMS sensors are TPMS could cause the TPMS message come on at each ignition missing or damaged. The DIC sensors to malfunction. message and the TPMS cycle until the problem is corrected. If the TPMS is not functioning it malfunction light should go off Some of the conditions that can cannot detect or signal a low when the TPMS sensors are cause the malfunction light and tire condition. See your installed and the sensor DIC message to come on are: dealer/retailer for service if the matching process is performed • One of the road tires has been TPMS malfunction light and successfully. See your replaced with the spare tire. DIC message comes on and dealer/retailer for service. The spare tire does not have a stays on. TPMS sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC message should go off once you re-install the road tire containing the TPMS sensor. 5-56 Service and Appearance Care

TPMS Sensor Matching You have one minute to match throughout the matching Process the first tire/wheel position, procedure. The LOW TIRE and five minutes overall, to match message displays on the Driver Each TPMS sensor has a unique all four tire/wheel positions. If it Information Center (DIC). identification code. Any time takes longer than one minute, to 4. Start with the driver side front tire. you replace one or more of the match the first tire and wheel, TPMS sensors or rotate the or more than five minutes to match 5. Remove the valve cap from the vehicle’s tires, the identification all four tire and wheel positions, valve cap stem. Activate the codes need to be matched to the the matching process stops and you TPMS sensor by increasing or new tire/wheel position. The sensors need to start over. decreasing the tire’s air pressure are matched to the tire/wheel for 10 seconds, then stop and positions in the following order: The TPMS sensor matching listen for a single horn chirp. driver side front tire, passenger side procedure is outlined below: The single horn chirp should front tire, passenger side rear 1. Set the parking brake. sound within 15 seconds, tire, and driver side rear tire using a confirming that the sensor TPMS diagnostic tool. See your 2. Turn the ignition switch to identification code has been dealer/retailer for service. ON/RUN with the engine off. matched to this tire and wheel position. If you do not hear The TPMS sensors can also be 3. Turn the exterior lamp switch the confirming single horn chirp, matched to each tire/wheel position from AUTO to OFF four times turn the ignition switch to by increasing or decreasing the within three seconds. A double LOCK and start over beginning tire’s air pressure. If increasing the horn chirp will sound and with Step 2. tire’s air pressure, do not exceed the TPMS low tire warning light the maximum inflation pressure starts flashing. The double 6. Proceed to the passenger side indicated on the tire’s sidewall. horn chirp and flashing TPMS front tire, and repeat the To let air-pressure out of a tire you warning light indicates the procedure in Step 5. TPMS matching process has can use the pointed end of the 7. Proceed to the passenger side started. The TPMS warning valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure rear tire, and repeat the light should continue flashing gage, or a key. procedure in Step 5. Service and Appearance Care 5-57

8. Proceed to the driver side rear Tire Inspection and Any time you notice unusual tire, and repeat the procedure Rotation wear, rotate the tires as soon in Step 5. as possible and check wheel 9. After hearing the conﬁrming horn We recommend that you alignment. Also check for chirp for the driver side rear tire, regularly inspect the vehicle’s damaged tires or wheels. check to see if the TPMS low tire tires, including the spare tire, See When It Is Time for warning light and the DIC LOW for signs of wear or damage. New Tires on page 5-58 and TIRE messages have turned off. See When It Is Time for Wheel Replacement on If yes, the TPMS sensors have New Tires on page 5-58 for page 5-64. more information. been relearned. Turn the ignition Make sure the spare tire is switch to LOCK/OFF. Tires should be rotated stored securely. Push, pull and If the low tire warning light and every 5,000 to 8,000 miles then try to rotate or turn the the SERV TPM message on the (8 000 to 13 000 km). tire. If it moves, use the wheel DIC are on after completing See Scheduled Maintenance wrench/hoist shaft to tighten Step 5 for the driver side rear tire, on page 6-4. the cable. See Changing a the sensor relearn process has The purpose of a regular tire Flat Tire on page 5-66. not been successful. Turn the rotation is to achieve a uniform ignition switch to LOCK/OFF and wear for all tires on the vehicle. repeat the matching process This will ensure that the beginning with Step 2. vehicle continues to perform 10. Set all four tires to the most like it did when the recommended air pressure level tires were new. as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. 11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems. 5-58 Service and Appearance Care

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor When It Is Time for System. See Tire Pressure New Tires Monitor Operation on page 5-54. Make certain that all wheel Various factors, such as nuts are properly tightened. maintenance, temperatures, See “Wheel Nut Torque” under driving speeds, vehicle loading, Capacities and Speciﬁcations and road conditions inﬂuence on page 5-96. when you need new tires.

{ CAUTION Rust or dirt on a wheel, or When rotating the vehicle’s tires, on the parts to which it is always use the correct rotation fastened, can make wheel pattern shown here. Do not nuts become loose after time. include the spare tire in the tire The wheel could come off and rotation. cause an accident. When you After the tires have been rotated, change a wheel, remove any adjust the front and rear inﬂation rust or dirt from places where pressures as shown on the Tire the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you and Loading Information label. One way to tell when it is time for See Inﬂation - Tire Pressure on can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to new tires is to check the treadwear page 5-51 and Loading the indicators, which will appear when Vehicle on page 4-35. use a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the the tires have only 1/16 inch rust or dirt off. See Changing (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining. a Flat Tire on page 5-66. Service and Appearance Care 5-59

You need new tires if any of the The rubber in tires degrades over Buying New Tires following statements are true: time, even if they are not being GM has developed and matched • You can see the indicators at used. This is also true for the spare tire, if the vehicle has one. Multiple specific tires for your vehicle. three or more places around The original equipment tires the tire. conditions affect how fast this aging takes place, including installed on your vehicle, • You can see cord or fabric temperatures, loading conditions, when it was new, were designed showing through the tire’s rubber. and inflation pressure maintenance. to meet General Motors • The tread or sidewall is cracked, With proper care and maintenance Tire Performance Criteria cut, or snagged deep enough to tires typically wear out before Specification (TPC spec) system show cord or fabric. they degrade due to age. If you are rating. If you need replacement unsure about the need to replace tires, GM strongly recommends • The tire has a bump, bulge, the tires as they get older, consult that you get tires with the or split. the tire manufacturer for more same TPC Spec rating. This • The tire has a puncture, cut, or information. way, your vehicle will continue to other damage that cannot be have tires that are designed to repaired well because of the size give the same performance or location of the damage. and vehicle safety, during normal use, as the original tires. 5-60 Service and Appearance Care

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec Replacing less than a full set of system considers over a dozen tires can affect the braking and { CAUTION critical speciﬁcations that handling performance of your impact the overall performance vehicle. See Tire Inspection If you use bias-ply tires on the of your vehicle, including brake and Rotation on page 5-57 vehicle, the wheel rim ﬂanges system performance, ride for information on proper tire could develop cracks after and handling, traction control, rotation. many miles of driving. A tire and tire pressure monitoring and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash. performance. GM’s TPC { CAUTION Spec number is molded onto Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle. the tire’s sidewall near the Mixing tires could cause you tire size. If the tires have an to lose control while driving. all-season tread design, the TPC If you mix tires of different If you must replace your vehicle’s spec number will be followed sizes, brands, or types tires with those that do not have a by a MS, for mud and snow. (radial and bias-belted tires) TPC Spec number, make sure See Tire Sidewall Labeling the vehicle may not handle they are the same size, load on page 5-45 for additional properly, and you could have range, speed rating, and information. a crash. Using tires of different construction type (radial and GM recommends replacing tires sizes, brands, or types may bias-belted tires) as your in sets of four. This is because also cause damage to your vehicle’s original tires. uniform tread depth on all vehicle. Be sure to use the tires will help keep your vehicle correct size, brand, and type performing most like it did of tires on your vehicle’s when the tires were new. wheels. Service and Appearance Care 5-61

Vehicles equipped with a tire Different Size Tires and { pressure monitoring system may Wheels CAUTION give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if non-TPC spec rated If you add wheels or tires that are a If you add different sized tires are installed on your different size than your original wheels, your vehicle may not vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated equipment wheels and tires, provide an acceptable level of tires may give a low-pressure this could affect the way your vehicle performance and safety if tires not warning that is higher or lower performs, including its braking, recommended for those wheels than the proper warning level ride and handling characteristics, are selected. You may increase you would get with TPC stability, and resistance to rollover. the chance that you will crash and Spec rated tires. See Tire Additionally, if your vehicle has suffer serious injury. Only use GM Pressure Monitor System on electronic systems such as anti-lock specific wheel and tire systems page 5-52. brakes, rollover airbags, traction developed for your vehicle, and control, and electronic stability Your vehicle’s original equipment have them properly installed by a control, the performance of these GM certified technician. tires are listed on the Tire and systems can be affected. Loading Information Label. See Loading the Vehicle See Buying New Tires on page 5-59 on page 4-35, for more and Accessories and Modifications information about the Tire and on page 5-3 for additional Loading Information Label information. and its location on your vehicle. 5-62 Service and Appearance Care

Uniform Tire Quality The Uniform Tire Quality For example, a tire graded Grading Grading (UTQG) system 150 would wear one and a half does not apply to deep tread, (1.5) times as well on the Quality grades can be found winter-type snow tires, government course as a tire where applicable on the space-saver, or temporary use graded 100. The relative tire sidewall between tread spare tires, tires with nominal rim performance of tires depends shoulder and maximum section diameters of 10 to 12 inches upon the actual conditions width. For example: (25 to 30 cm), or to some of their use, however, and may limited-production tires. depart significantly from the Treadwear 200 Traction AA norm due to variations in Temperature A While the tires available on driving habits, service practices, General Motors passenger cars The following information relates and differences in road and light trucks may vary characteristics and climate. to the system developed by with respect to these grades, the United States National they must also conform to Traction – AA, A, B, C Highway Traffic Safety federal safety requirements and Administration (NHTSA), which additional General Motors The traction grades, from highest grades tires by treadwear, Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. traction, and temperature standards. Those grades represent the performance. This applies tire’s ability to stop on wet only to vehicles sold in the Treadwear pavement as measured under United States. The grades are controlled conditions on The treadwear grade is a specified government test molded on the sidewalls of comparative rating based on most passenger car tires. surfaces of asphalt and the wear rate of the tire concrete. A tire marked C may when tested under controlled have poor traction performance. conditions on a specified government test course. Service and Appearance Care 5-63

{ The grade C corresponds to a Wheel Alignment and WARNING level of performance which Tire Balance all passenger car tires must The traction grade assigned meet under the Federal The tires and wheels on your to this tire is based on Motor Vehicle Safety Standard vehicle were aligned and balanced straight-ahead braking traction No. 109. Grades B and A carefully at the factory to give tests, and does not include represent higher levels of you the longest tire life and best acceleration, cornering, performance on the laboratory overall performance. Adjustments to hydroplaning, or peak traction test wheel than the minimum wheel alignment and tire balancing characteristics. required by law. will not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if you notice Temperature – A, B, C { WARNING unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, The temperature grades are The temperature grade for this the alignment might need to A (the highest), B, and C, tire is established for a tire be checked. If you notice your representing the tire’s resistance that is properly inflated and vehicle vibrating when driving on a to the generation of heat and not overloaded. Excessive smooth road, the tires and wheels its ability to dissipate heat speed, underinflation, or might need to be rebalanced. when tested under controlled excessive loading, either See your dealer/retailer for conditions on a specified indoor separately or in combination, proper diagnosis. laboratory test wheel. Sustained can cause heat buildup and high temperature can cause possible tire failure. the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. 5-64 Service and Appearance Care

Wheel Replacement If you need to replace any of your Notice: The wrong wheel can wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, also cause problems with bearing Replace any wheel that is bent, or Tire Pressure Monitor System life, brake cooling, speedometer cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. (TPMS) sensors, replace them only or odometer calibration, headlamp If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the with new GM original equipment aim, bumper height, vehicle wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts parts. This way, you will be sure ground clearance, and tire or tire should be replaced. If the wheel to have the right wheel, wheel bolts, chain clearance to the body and leaks air, replace it (except some wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors chassis. aluminum wheels, which can for your vehicle. sometimes be repaired). See your See Changing a Flat Tire on dealer/retailer if any of these page 5-66 for more information. conditions exist. { CAUTION Used Replacement Wheels Your dealer/retailer will know the Using the wrong replacement kind of wheel you need. wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts { CAUTION Each new wheel should have the on your vehicle can be dangerous. same load-carrying capacity, It could affect the braking and Putting a used wheel on the diameter, width, offset, and be handling of your vehicle, make vehicle is dangerous. You cannot mounted the same way as the one your tires lose air and make you know how it has been used or how it replaces. lose control. You could have a far it has been driven. It could fail collision in which you or others suddenly and cause a crash. If you could be injured. Always use the have to replace a wheel, use a correct wheel, wheel bolts, and new GM original equipment wheel. wheel nuts for replacement. Service and Appearance Care 5-65

Tire Chains Notice: If your vehicle has a CAUTION (Continued) tire size other than LT285/75R16 { or P265/65R18 use tire chains CAUTION Use another type of traction only where legal and only when device only if its manufacturer you must. Use chains that are If your vehicle has LT285/75R16 recommends it for use on your the proper size for your tires. or P265/65R18 size tires, do not vehicle and tire size combination Install them on the tires of use tire chains. They can damage and road conditions. Follow that the rear axle. Do not use chains your vehicle because there is not manufacturer’s instructions. on the tires of the front axle. enough clearance. Tire chains To help avoid damage to your Tighten them as tightly as used on a vehicle without the vehicle, drive slowly, readjust, possible with the ends securely proper amount of clearance can or remove the device if it is fastened. Drive slowly and cause damage to the brakes, contacting your vehicle, and do follow the chain manufacturer’s suspension, or other vehicle parts. not spin your vehicle’s wheels. instructions. If you can hear The area damaged by the tire the chains contacting your chains could cause you to lose If you do ﬁnd traction devices vehicle, stop and retighten them. control of your vehicle and you or that will ﬁt, install them on the If the contact continues, slow others may be injured in a crash. rear tires. down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels (Continued) with chains on will damage your vehicle. 5-66 Service and Appearance Care

If a Tire Goes Flat It may be very bumpy and noisy, but Changing a Flat Tire you can still steer. Gently brake to a It is unusual for a tire to blowout stop, well off the road if possible. If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire while you are driving, especially if and wheel damage by driving you maintain your vehicle’s tires slowly to a level place. Turn on properly. If air goes out of a tire, { CAUTION your hazard warning flashers. it is much more likely to leak out See Hazard Warning Flashers slowly. But if you should ever have a Lifting a vehicle and getting under on page 3-5. blowout, here are a few tips about it to do maintenance or repairs is what to expect and what to do: dangerous without the appropriate { safety equipment and training. CAUTION If a front tire fails, the flat tire If a jack is provided with the Changing a tire can be dangerous. creates a drag that pulls the vehicle vehicle, it is designed only for The vehicle can slip off the jack toward that side. Take your foot changing a flat tire. If it is used for off the accelerator pedal and grip and roll over or fall on you or other anything else, you or others could the steering wheel firmly. Steer to people. You and they could be be badly injured or killed if the maintain lane position, and then badly injured or even killed. vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack gently brake to a stop well out of Find a level place to change your is provided with the vehicle, only the traffic lane. tire. To help prevent the vehicle use it for changing a flat tire. A rear blowout, particularly on a from moving: curve, acts much like a skid and If a tire goes flat, the next part 1. Set the parking brake firmly. may require the same correction you shows how to use the jacking 2. Put the shift lever in would use in a skid. In any rear equipment to change a flat tire P (Park). blowout remove your foot from the safely. accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle (Continued) under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. Service and Appearance Care 5-67

When the vehicle has a ﬂat tire, Use the following example as a CAUTION (Continued) the wheel blocks need to be set up guide to assist in the placement of before changing it. The wheel the wheel blocks (A) when the 3. If you have a blocks are located in the tool bag in vehicle has a ﬂat tire (B). four-wheel-drive vehicle, the swing-gate for H3 models or be sure the transfer case below the rear seat for H3T models. is in a drive gear – not in See Removing the Spare Tire N (Neutral). and Tools (H3) on page 5-68 or Removing the Spare Tire and 4. Turn off the engine and do Tools (H3T) on page 5-69 for not restart while the vehicle more information. is raised. 5. Do not allow passengers to A. Wheel Block remain in the vehicle. B. Flat Tire To be even more certain the vehicle will not move, put blocks The following information explains at the front and rear of the tire how to use the jack and change farthest away from the one being a tire. changed. That would be the tire on the other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.

To use the wheel blocks, lift the wheel block and lock it into place. 5-68 Service and Appearance Care

Removing the Spare Tire 4. Undo the straps that secure the The spare tire is attached to the and Tools (H3) jack tool bag to the jack. outside of the swing-gate. 5. Open the tool bag to ﬁnd the To remove the spare tire: The equipment needed is located in following tools, which are the swing-gate, behind a cover. used to remove the spare tire To remove the equipment: and ﬂat tire: 1. Open the swing-gate. See Swing-gate on page 2-9. 2. Remove the cover, located on the inside of the swing-gate, by lifting the two latches.

1. If the vehicle has a spare tire cover release the latch by pulling the latch straight back and turning it away from A. Wheel Wrench the cover at the same time. B. Jack Handle Extensions Notice: Opening the endgate 3. Turn the wing nut C. Jack Handle before completely closing and counterclockwise to release D. Jack latching the spare tire cover may the jack tool bag and jack E. Wheel Blocks result in damage to your vehicle. and remove them. Close and latch the spare tire cover before opening the endgate to avoid possible damage. Service and Appearance Care 5-69

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools (H3T) To access the jack and tools located under the rear seat:

Remove the center cap, if 2. Use the wheel wrench to remove equipped, by placing the ﬂat the wheel nuts securing the end of the wheel wrench in the spare tire. slot on the wheel and gently pry the center cap out. If the vehicle has locking lug nuts, the key is supplied in the tool bag. Use the key along 1. Turn the wing nut (A) with the wheel wrench to remove counterclockwise to release the wheel nuts from the tire. the jack and tools. 3. You may need assistance to 2. Remove the jack and tool kit remove the spare tire. Pull from the bracket. off and gently lower the spare 3. Release the straps (B) that tire to the ground. Set it next to secure the tool bag to the jack. the ﬂat tire. 5-70 Service and Appearance Care

The following tools are used to To access the spare tire: remove the spare tire and ﬂat tire.

1. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (F) and wheel wrench (G).

A. Spare Tire/Flat Tire A. Wheel Wrench (Valve Stem Pointed Down) B. Jack Handle Extensions B. Tire/Wheel Retainer C. Jack Handle C. Hoist Cable D. Jack D. Hoist Assembly E. Wheel Blocks E. Hoist Shaft F. Jack Handle Extension(s) G. Wheel Wrench H. Hoist Shaft Access Ramp 2. Insert the hoist end of the I. Hoist End of the Extension Tool extension tool (I) through the hoist shaft access ramp (H). Service and Appearance Care 5-71

3. The hoist end of the extension 5. Pull the spare tire towards you. tool (I) must connect to the hoist shaft (E). The hoist end of the extension tool is used to lower the spare tire. Do not use the chiseled end of the wheel wrench. 4. Turn the wheel wrench (G) counterclockwise to lower the spare tire (A) to the ground. 7. Separate the retainer from the Continue to turn the wheel guide pin by sliding the retainer wrench (G) until the spare tire (A) 6. Tilt the tire, with slack in the up the pin while pressing down can be pulled from under the cable, to access the tire/wheel on the latch. When the retainer is vehicle. retainer (B). separated from the guide pin, tilt the retainer and pull it through If the spare tire does not lower the center of the wheel along to the ground, the secondary with the cable and guide pin. latch is engaged. See Secondary Latch System (H3T) on 8. Put the spare tire near the page 5-76. ﬂat tire. 5-72 Service and Appearance Care

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-66 for more information. Jacking Locations (Overall View) A. Front Position - Lower Control Arm B. Rear Position - Lower Axle 3. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen the 4. Locate the vehicle’s jacking wheel nuts. Do not remove positions (A and B). them yet. If the vehicle has locking lug nuts, the key is supplied in the tool bag. Use the key along with the wheel wrench to remove 2. Remove the center cap by the wheel nuts from the tire. placing the ﬂat end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel Now jack up the vehicle. and gently pry the center cap out. Service and Appearance Care 5-73

5. Assemble the jack and tools as along the bar that runs front to follows: back. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to clear the ground.

Rear Tire Flat: Use the jack handle and both jack handle Front Position extensions. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extensions. Front Tire Flat: If the ﬂat tire is Attach the jack handle to on a front tire of the vehicle, the jack. From the rear of the use the jack handle and both jack vehicle align the jack under the handle extensions. Attach the Rear Positions rear axle. Turn the wheel wheel wrench to the jack handle wrench clockwise to raise the extensions. Attach the jack Refer to the graphic above to vehicle. Raise the vehicle handle to the jack. From the front locate the placement of the jack far enough off the ground so of the vehicle position the jack if the ﬂat tire is on the rear of there is enough room for the on the front lower control arm the vehicle. spare tire to clear the ground. 5-74 Service and Appearance Care

6. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise 7. Remove all the wheel nuts and 8. Remove any rust or dirt from the to raise the jack head to the take off the ﬂat tire. wheel bolts, mounting surfaces lifting point. and spare wheel. { CAUTION { CAUTION { CAUTION Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the Getting under a vehicle when it is parts to which it is fastened, can Never use oil or grease on bolts jacked up is dangerous. If the make wheel nuts become loose or nuts because the nuts might vehicle slips off the jack, you after time. The wheel could come come loose. The vehicle’s wheel could be badly injured or killed. off and cause an accident. When could fall off, causing a crash. Never get under a vehicle when it changing a wheel, remove any is supported only by a jack. rust or dirt from places where the 9. Put the spare tire on the wheel attaches to the vehicle. mounting surface. In an emergency, use a cloth or a 10. Put the wheel nuts back on { CAUTION paper towel to do this; but be sure with the rounded end of the to use a scraper or wire brush nuts toward the wheel Raising your vehicle with the jack later, if needed, to get all the rust after mounting the spare. improperly positioned can damage or dirt off. See Changing a Flat the vehicle and even make the Tire on page 5-66. vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to ﬁt the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle. Service and Appearance Care 5-75

11. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then use the wheel CAUTION (Continued) wrench to tighten the nuts until the wheel is held tightened with a torque wrench to against the hub. the proper torque specification. See Capacities and Specifications 12. Turn the wheel wrench on page 5-96 for wheel nut torque counterclockwise to lower the vehicle. Lower the jack specification. completely. Notice: Improperly tightened { wheel nuts can lead to brake CAUTION pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, 13. Tighten the nuts firmly in a Incorrect or improperly tightened evenly tighten the wheel nuts crisscross sequence as wheel nuts can cause the wheel in the proper sequence and to shown by turning the wheel to come loose and even come off. the proper torque specification. wrench clockwise. This could lead to a crash. If you See Capacities and Specifications have to replace them, be sure to 14. After installing the wheel and on page 5-96 for the wheel nut tire, reinstall the center cap. get new original equipment wheel torque specification. nuts. Stop somewhere as soon Place the cap on the wheel and as you can and have the nuts tap it into place until it sits flush with the wheel. (Continued) 5-76 Service and Appearance Care

Secondary Latch { 1. If the cable is not visible, start System (H3T) CAUTION this procedure at Step 3. This vehicle has an underbody Before beginning this procedure mounted tire hoist assembly that has read all the instructions. Failure to a secondary latch system. It is read and follow the instructions designed to stop the spare tire from could damage the hoist assembly suddenly falling off the vehicle if and you and others could get the cable holding the spare tire is hurt. Read and follow the damaged. For the secondary latch to instructions listed next. work, the tire must be stowed with the valve stem pointing down. To release the spare tire from the See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire secondary latch: and Tools (H3) on page 5-78 2. Turn the lug wrench or Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and { CAUTION counterclockwise until Tools (H3T) on page 5-80 for approximately 6 inches (15 cm) instructions on storing the spare tire of cable is exposed. correctly. Someone standing too close during the procedure could be 3. Attach the lug wrench to the injured by the jack. If the spare jack and raise the jack at tire does not slide off the jack least 10 turns. completely, make sure no one is 4. Place the jack under the vehicle, behind you or on either side of ahead of the rear bumper. you as you pull the jack out from Position the center lift point of the under spare. the jack under the center of the spare tire. Service and Appearance Care 5-77

5. Turn the lug wrench clockwise to 9. Tilt the retainer and slip it raise the jack until it lifts the through the wheel opening when secondary latch spring. the spare tire has been 6. Keep raising the jack until the completely lowered. spare tire stops moving upward 10. Turn the lug wrench clockwise and is held ﬁrmly in place. to raise the cable back up if the This lets you know that the cable is hanging. secondary latch has released Have the hoist shaft assembly and the spare tire is balancing on inspected as soon as you can. the jack. You will not be able to store a spare tire using the hoist assembly until 8. Disconnect the lug wrench from it has been repaired or replaced. the jack and carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push against the spare tire while ﬁrmly pulling the jack out from under the spare tire with the other hand.

7. Lower the jack by turning the lug wrench counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides off the jack. 5-78 Service and Appearance Care

Storing a Flat or Spare To store the flat or spare tire on the { Tire and Tools (H3) spare tire mount: CAUTION 1. Slide the flat or spare tire onto Incorrect or improperly tightened the swing-gate. { CAUTION wheel nuts can cause the wheel You may need assistance to come loose and even come off. Storing a jack, a tire, or other to do this. This could lead to a crash. If you equipment in the passenger 2. Reinstall the nuts to retain the have to replace them, be sure to compartment of the vehicle could flat or spare tire. get new original equipment wheel cause injury. In a sudden stop or nuts. Stop somewhere as soon as 3. Tighten the nuts by hand. collision, loose equipment could you can and have the nuts strike someone. Store all these in tightened with a torque wrench to the proper place. the proper torque specification. See Capacities and Specifications on page 5-96 for wheel nut torque specification. Service and Appearance Care 5-79

To store the jack tool bag and jack: 1. Return the tools to the jack tool bag.

4. Reinstall the wing nut retainer to fasten the jack and tool bag in 2. Secure the tool bag to the jack the storage compartment. by securely wrapping the straps 4. Use the wheel wrench to tighten around the jack. Then, slide Make sure that the wing nut the nuts ﬁrmly. Try to move the the straps through the rings on passes through the tool bag and tire back and forth slightly to the bag and secure. the jack before tightening it. be sure it is secure. 3. Position the jack and jack tool 5. Turn the wing nut retainer 5. Reinstall the center tire cover bag in the swing-gate. clockwise to secure. onto the spare or ﬂat tire. When reinstalling the jack and 6. Reinstall the compartment cover 6. If the vehicle has a spare tire jack tool bag, make sure the jack by inserting the locator tabs in cover close the cover and base is securely seated behind the holes in the swing-gate. latch the side latch. the tabs in the swing-gate. Push the latches down to secure. 5-80 Service and Appearance Care

Storing a Flat or Spare To store the ﬂat or spare tire on the Tire and Tools (H3T) spare tire mount: 1. Place the ﬂat or spare tire (A) on { the ground at the rear of the CAUTION vehicle with the valve stem pointed down and to the rear. Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place. A. Spare Tire/Flat Tire (Valve Stem Pointed Down) B. Tire/Wheel Retainer C. Hoist Cable D. Hoist Assembly E. Hoist Shaft F. Jack Handle Extension(s) G. Wheel Wrench H. Hoist Shaft Access Ramp I. Hoist End of the Extension Tool 2. Tilt the tire. Separate the tire/wheel retainer (B) from the guide pin. Pull the pin through Service and Appearance Care 5-81

the center of the wheel. Tilt the 7. Raise the tire fully against the tire/wheel retainer (B) down underside of the vehicle by through the center wheel opening. turning the wheel wrench 3. Make sure the tire/wheel clockwise until you hear retainer (B) is fully seated across two clicks or feel it skip twice. the underside of the wheel. You cannot overtighten the cable.

5. Insert the hoist end of the extension tool (I) through the hoist shaft access ramp (H). 6. Raise the tire part upward. Make sure the tire/wheel retainer (B) is seated in the wheel opening. 8. Push, pull (A) and then try to 4. Assembly the two jack handle turn (B) the tire. If the tire extensions (F) and wheel moves, use the wheel wrench wrench (G). to tighten the cable. 5-82 Service and Appearance Care

To store the jack tool bag and jack: Spare Tire The spare tire does not have a Tire Pressure Monitor System sensor. 1. Return the tools to the jack The vehicle, when new, had a tool bag. You may get a low pressure warning fully-inflated spare tire. A spare tire light. See Tire Pressure Monitor 2. Secure the tool bag to the jack may lose air over time, so check Operation on page 5-54. Have the by securely wrapping the straps its inflation pressure regularly. damaged or flat road tire repaired or around the jack. Then, slide See Inflation - Tire Pressure on replaced as soon as you can. the straps through the rings on page 5-51 and Loading the Vehicle the bag and secure. on page 4-35 for information Do not mix tires and wheels of regarding proper tire inflation and different sizes, because they will not loading your vehicle. For instruction fit. Keep your spare tire and its on how to remove, install or store wheel together. a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-72 and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools (H3) on page 5-78 or Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools (H3T) on page 5-80. After installing the spare tire on 3. Reinstall the wing nut retainer to your vehicle, you should stop fasten the jack and tool bag as soon as possible and make sure under the rear seat. the spare is correctly inflated. Make sure that the wing nut passes through the tool bag and the jack before tightening it. 4. Turn the wing nut retainer clockwise to secure. Service and Appearance Care 5-83

Appearance Care When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, interior, maintain adequate only use cleaners speciﬁcally ventilation by opening the vehicle’s designed for the surfaces being doors and windows. Interior Cleaning cleaned. Permanent damage may Dust may be removed from small result from using cleaners on The vehicle’s interior will continue to buttons and knobs using a small surfaces for which they were not look its best if it is cleaned often. brush with soft bristles. Although not always visible, intended. Use glass cleaner only on dust and dirt can accumulate on the glass. Remove any accidental Products that remove odors from upholstery. Dirt can damage over-spray from other surfaces the vehicle’s upholstery and carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic immediately. To prevent over-spray, clean the vehicle’s glass can be surfaces. Regular vacuuming apply cleaner directly to the obtained from your dealer/retailer. cleaning cloth. is recommended to remove particles Do not clean the vehicle using: from the upholstery. It is important Notice: Using abrasive cleaners to keep the upholstery from • A knife or any other sharp object when cleaning glass surfaces becoming and remaining heavily to remove a soil from any interior on the vehicle, could scratch the soiled. Soils should be removed as surface. glass and/or cause damage to quickly as possible. The vehicle’s the rear window defogger. • A stiff brush. It can cause interior may experience extremes of When cleaning the glass on the damage to the vehicle’s interior heat that could cause stains to vehicle, use only a soft cloth surfaces. set rapidly. and glass cleaner. • Heavy pressure or aggressive Lighter colored interiors may require Many cleaners contain solvents that rubbing with a cleaning cloth. more frequent cleaning. Use care may become concentrated in the Use of heavy pressure can because newspapers and garments vehicle’s breathing space. Before damage the interior and does that transfer color to home using cleaners, read and adhere not improve the effectiveness of furnishings may also transfer color to all safety instructions on the label. soil removal. to the vehicle’s interior. While cleaning the vehicle’s 5-84 Service and Appearance Care

• Laundry detergents or club soda. Before cleaning, gently 4. Continue to gently rub the soiled dishwashing soaps with remove as much of the soil as area until the cleaning cloth degreasers can leave residue possible using one of the following remains clean. that streaks and attracts dirt. techniques: 5. If the soil is not completely For liquid cleaners, about • For liquids: gently blot the removed, use a mild soap 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of remaining soil with a paper towel. solution and repeat the cleaning water is a good guide. Use Allow the soil to absorb into process that was used with only mild, neutral-pH soaps. the paper towel until no more plain water. can be removed. • Too much cleaner that saturates If any of the soil remains, a the upholstery. • For solid dry soils: remove as commercial fabric cleaner or spot • Organic solvents such as naptha, much as possible and then lifter may be necessary. When alcohol, etc. that can damage the vacuum. a commercial upholstery cleaner or vehicle’s interior. To clean: spot lifter is to be used, test a small hidden area for colorfastness Fabric/Carpet 1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white first. If the locally cleaned area cloth with water or club soda. gives any impression that a ring Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft 2. Wring the cloth to remove excess formation may result, clean brush attachment frequently to moisture. the entire surface. remove dust and loose dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar 3. Start on the outside edge of the After the cleaning process has been in the nozzle may only be used soil and gently rub toward the completed, a paper towel can be on floor carpet and carpeted floor center. Continue cleaning, using used to blot excess moisture mats. For any soil, always try a clean area of the cloth each from the fabric or carpet. to remove it first with plain water or time it becomes soiled. Service and Appearance Care 5-85

Leather Instrument Panel, Vinyl, Some commercial products may and Other Plastic increase gloss on the instrument A soft cloth dampened with water panel. The increase in gloss can be used to remove dust. Surfaces may cause annoying reﬂections in If a more thorough cleaning is A soft cloth dampened with water the windshield and even make necessary, a soft cloth dampened may be used to remove dust. it difficult to see through the with a mild soap solution can If a more thorough cleaning is windshield under certain conditions. be used. Allow the leather to dry necessary, a clean soft cloth naturally. Do not use heat to dampened with a mild soap solution dry. Never use steam to clean Care of Safety Belts can be used to gently remove leather. Never use spot lifters or Keep belts clean and dry. dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters spot removers on leather. Many or removers on plastic surfaces. commercial leather cleaners Many commercial cleaners { CAUTION and coatings that are sold to and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect leather may preserve and protect soft plastic Do not bleach or dye safety belts. permanently change the appearance surfaces may permanently change It may severely weaken them. and feel of the leather and are the appearance and feel of the In a crash, they might not be able not recommended. Do not use interior and are not recommended. to provide adequate protection. silicone or wax-based products, or Do not use silicone or wax-based those containing organic solvents to Clean safety belts only with mild products, or those containing clean the vehicle’s interior because soap and lukewarm water. organic solvents to clean the they can alter the appearance vehicle’s interior because they can by increasing the gloss in a alter the appearance by increasing non-uniform manner. Never use the gloss in a non-uniform manner. shoe polish on leather. 5-86 Service and Appearance Care

Weatherstrips petroleum based or that contain Cleaning Exterior acid or abrasives, as they can Silicone grease on weatherstrips will damage the paint, metal or plastic Lamps/Lenses make them last longer, seal better, on the vehicle. Approved cleaning Use only lukewarm or cold water, and not stick or squeak. Apply products can be obtained from a soft cloth and a car washing soap silicone grease with a clean cloth. your dealer/retailer. Follow all to clean exterior lamps and lenses. During very cold, damp weather manufacturers’ directions regarding Follow instructions under Washing frequent application may be correct product usage, necessary Your Vehicle on page 5-86. required. See Recommended Fluids safety precautions and appropriate and Lubricants on page 6-12. disposal of any vehicle care product. Finish Care Washing Your Vehicle Rinse the vehicle well, before Occasional waxing or mild polishing washing and after to remove all of the vehicle by hand may be The best way to preserve the cleaning agents completely. If they necessary to remove residue from vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by are allowed to dry on the surface, the paint finish. Approved cleaning washing it often. they could stain. products can be obtained from Notice: Certain cleaners contain Dry the finish with a soft, clean your dealer/retailer. chemicals that can damage the chamois or an all-cotton towel to If the vehicle has a basecoat/ emblems or nameplates on the avoid surface scratches and clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat vehicle. Check the cleaning water spotting. gives more depth and gloss to product label. If it states that it the colored basecoat. Always use High pressure car washes may should not be used on plastic waxes and polishes that are cause water to enter the vehicle. parts, do not use it on the vehicle non-abrasive and made for a Avoid using high pressure washes or damage may occur and it would basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. not be covered by the warranty. closer than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of Do not wash the vehicle in direct power washers exceeding 1,200 psi sunlight. Use a car washing soap. (8 274 kPa) can result in damage Do not use cleaning agents that are or removal of paint and decals. Service and Appearance Care 5-87

Notice: Machine compounding To help keep the paint finish looking Windshield, Backglass, or aggressive polishing on a new, keep the vehicle garaged or basecoat/clearcoat paint finish covered whenever possible. and Wiper Blades may damage it. Use only Clean the outside of the windshield non-abrasive waxes and Protecting Exterior Bright and backglass with glass cleaner. polishes that are made for a Metal Parts Clean the rubber blades using a lint basecoat/clearcoat paint finish Bright metal parts should be free cloth or paper towel soaked with on the vehicle. cleaned regularly to keep their windshield washer fluid or a mild luster. Washing with water is all Foreign materials such as calcium detergent. Wash the windshield that is usually needed. However, chloride and other salts, ice melting thoroughly when you clean the chrome polish may be used agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and on chrome or stainless steel trim, bird droppings, chemicals from a buildup of vehicle wash/wax if necessary. industrial chimneys, etc., can treatments may cause wiper damage the vehicle’s finish if Use special care with aluminum streaking. Replace the wiper blades they remain on painted surfaces. trim. To avoid damaging protective if they are worn or damaged. Wash the vehicle as soon as trim, never use auto or chrome Wipers can be damaged by: possible. If necessary, use polish, steam or caustic soap non-abrasive cleaners that are to clean aluminum. A coating of • Extreme dusty conditions marked safe for painted surfaces wax, rubbed to high polish, is • Sand and salt to remove foreign matter. recommended for all bright metal parts. • Heat and sun Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather and • Snow and ice, without proper chemical fallout that can take removal their toll over a period of years. 5-88 Service and Appearance Care

Aluminum or Notice: Using strong soaps, Notice: Using chrome polish on Chrome-Plated Wheels chemicals, abrasive polishes, aluminum wheels could damage cleaners, brushes, or cleaners the wheels. The repairs would not and Trim that contain acid on aluminum or be covered by the warranty. The vehicle may have either chrome-plated wheels, could Use chrome polish on chrome aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. damage the surface of the wheels only. wheel(s). The repairs would not Keep the wheels clean using a soft Use chrome polish only on be covered by the warranty. chrome-plated wheels, but avoid clean cloth with mild soap and water. Use only approved cleaners on Rinse with clean water. After rinsing any painted surface of the wheel, aluminum or chrome-plated and buff off immediately after thoroughly, dry with a soft clean wheels. towel. A wax may then be applied. application. The surface of these wheels is Notice: Driving the vehicle Notice: Chrome wheels and similar to the painted surface of the through an automatic car wash other chrome trim may be vehicle. Do not use strong soaps, that has silicone carbide tire damaged if the vehicle is not chemicals, abrasive polishes, cleaning brushes, could damage washed after driving on roads abrasive cleaners, cleaners with the aluminum or chrome-plated that have been sprayed with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes wheels. The repairs would not be magnesium, calcium or sodium on them because they could covered by the warranty. Never chloride. These chlorides are damage the surface. Do not use drive a vehicle equipped with used on roads for conditions chrome polish on aluminum wheels. such as ice and dust. Always aluminum or chrome-plated wash the vehicle’s chrome with wheels through an automatic car soap and water after exposure. wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. Service and Appearance Care 5-89

Tires Original manufacturer replacement Underbody Maintenance parts will provide the corrosion To clean the tires, use a stiff brush protection while maintaining Chemicals used for ice and with tire cleaner. the vehicle warranty. snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody. If these Notice: Using petroleum-based are not removed, corrosion and rust tire dressing products on the Finish Damage can develop on the underbody vehicle may damage the paint Any stone chips, fractures or deep parts such as fuel lines, frame, finish and/or tires. When applying scratches in the finish should be floor pan, and exhaust system a tire dressing, always wipe off repaired right away. Bare metal will even though they have corrosion any overspray from all painted corrode quickly and may develop protection. surfaces on the vehicle. into major repair expense. At least every spring, flush these Sheet Metal Damage Minor chips and scratches can be materials from the underbody repaired with touch-up materials with plain water. Clean any areas If the vehicle is damaged and available from your dealer/retailer. where mud and debris can collect. requires sheet metal repair or Larger areas of finish damage can be Dirt packed in close areas of the replacement, make sure the body corrected in your dealer’s/retailer’s frame should be loosened before repair shop applies anti-corrosion body and paint shop. being flushed. Your dealer/retailer or material to parts repaired or an underbody car washing system replaced to restore corrosion can do this. protection. 5-90 Service and Appearance Care

Chemical Paint Spotting Vehicle Identification Service Parts Some weather and atmospheric Identification Label conditions can create a chemical Vehicle Identification This label is on the inside of the fallout. Airborne pollutants can Number (VIN) glove box. It is very helpful if fall upon and attack painted surfaces you ever need to order parts. on the vehicle. This damage can The label has the following take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped information: discolorations, and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint • Vehicle Identification surface. This is the legal identifier for your Number (VIN) vehicle. It appears on a plate in • Model designation Although no defect in the paint job the front corner of the instrument causes this, we will repair, at no panel, on the driver side. It can • Paint information charge to the owner, the surfaces be seen through the windshield from • Production options and special of new vehicles damaged by this outside the vehicle. The VIN also equipment fallout condition within 12 months appears on the Vehicle Certification or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of and Service Parts labels and the Do not remove this label from the purchase, whichever occurs first. certificates of title and registration. vehicle. Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This code helps identify the vehicle’s engine, specifications, and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications” under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-96 for your vehicle’s engine code. Service and Appearance Care 5-91

Electrical System Windshield Wiper Fuses Fuses and Circuit The windshield wiper motor is Breakers Add-On Electrical protected by a circuit breaker and a The wiring circuits in your vehicle Equipment fuse. If the motor overheats due are protected from short circuits by a to heavy snow or ice, the wiper will combination of fuses and circuit Notice: Do not add anything stop until the motor cools. If the electrical to the vehicle unless you breakers. This greatly reduces the overload is caused by some chance of fires caused by electrical check with your dealer/retailer electrical problem, have it fixed. first. Some electrical equipment problems. can damage the vehicle and the Power Windows and Look at the silver-colored band damage would not be covered by inside the fuse. If the band is the vehicle’s warranty. Some Other Power Options broken or melted, replace the fuse. add-on electrical equipment can Circuit breakers protect the Be sure you replace a bad fuse keep other components from power windows and other power with a new one of the identical size working as they should. accessories. When the current load and rating. Add-on equipment can drain the is too heavy, the circuit breaker If you ever have a problem on the vehicle’s battery, even if the vehicle opens and closes, protecting the road and do not have a spare is not operating. circuit until the problem is fixed fuse, you can borrow one that has or goes away. The vehicle has an airbag system. the same amperage. Just pick some Before attempting to add anything Power and Heated Seat feature of your vehicle that you electrical to the vehicle, see Circuit Breakers can get along without — like the radio or cigarette lighter — and use Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped There is a circuit breaker located Vehicle on page 1-58. its fuse, if it is the correct amperage. underneath the driver’s side Replace it as soon as you can. front seat that controls the power and heated seat functions. 5-92 Service and Appearance Care

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

To remove the cover, push in on the tabs at the ends of the cover and lift. To reinstall the cover, line up the The engine compartment fuse block tabs and push down on the cover is located on the driver side of the until the tabs clicks into place. engine compartment. See Engine Compartment Overview on Notice: Spilling liquid on any page 5-10 for more information electrical components on on location. the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical component. Service and Appearance Care 5-93

Fuse Usage Fuse Usage Fuse Usage 1 Heated Seats 5 Battery Ignition Switch 8 Power Locks 2 Grille Guard 6 Front Wiper Sunroof, Front 9 Washer Pump 3 Stop Lamp (H3T Only) 7 Regulated Voltage 4 Roof Rack Lamps Control Power 10 Accessories (SPO) 5-94 Service and Appearance Care

Fuse Usage Fuse Usage Fuse Usage 11 Not Used 23 Injector/V8 Coil 38 Ampliﬁer Transfer Case Control 24 Fog Lamp Daytime Running 12 Module 39 Lamps 25 Powertrain Control 13 Radio Module B 40 Passenger Side 14 Body Control Module Transmission Control Headlamp 26 Rear Wiper Motor Module (TCM) 41 Driver Side Headlamp 15 (H3 Only) 27 Airbags 42 Trailer Back-Up Lamp 16 Rear Wiper Pump 28 Not Used 43 Front Park Lamps Switch (H3 Only) Antilock Brakes, Air Injection Reactor 29 44 Air Injection Reactor StabiliTrak® (AIR) Solenoid (AIR) Pump Relay/ 30 Rear Window Defogger Auxiliary Power 2/ 17 Transmission Control 45 Cigarette Lighter Module (TCM) 31 Canister Vent (V8 Only) Regulated Voltage Electronic Throttle 32 46 Control 18 Rear Vision Camera Control Sensor 47 Oxygen Sensor 19 Cluster 33 Ignition 1 (V8 Only) 48 Air Conditioning Clutch Rear Turn Lamp, 34 Transmission 20 Hazard Lamp 49 Rear Park Lamp 35 Cruise Control, Miscellaneous 50 Stop Lamp 21 Powertrain Control Module 1 36 Horn 51 Auxiliary Power 1/ Mass Air Flow Sensor, Cigarette Lighter 37 Driver Side Rear 22 Canister Vent Purge Park Lamp StabiliTrak®, Antilock Solenoid 52 Brakes Service and Appearance Care 5-95

Fuse Usage Fuse Usage Relay Usage 76 Air Conditioning Clutch 53 Power Heated Seat, 68 Driver Side Power Belt Switch Window 77 Powertrain Control Module (Starter) 54 Fuel System Control 82 Climate Control Fan Module (FSCM) Electronic Brake 78 Run, Crank 55 Trailer Parking Lamps 83 Controller 79 Daytime Running Front Turn Signal, 84 Trailer B+ Fuse Lamps 56 Hazard Signal/ 85 Starter Air Injection Reactor Courtesy Mirror 80 (AIR) Solenoid 91 Generator Megafuse 57 Power Sunroof 81 Powertrain Transfer Case Control 86 Back Up Lamps 58 Module Switch Relay Usage Ignition 3 Heating, Climate Control, 66 Stop Lamp (H3T Only) 59 87 Ventilation, Control Head 69 Fog Lamp Air Conditioning 60 Back-Up Lamp High, Low Beam 70 88 Retained Accessory 61 Power Seats Headlamps Power/Accessory 62 AIR Pump 71 Rear Defogger 89 Park Lamp Windshield Wiper 63 Passenger Side 72 Power Window On/Off Diode Usage Windshield Wiper Antilock Brakes, 73 65 Wiper Diode 64 StabiliTrak® 2 Solenoid High/Low 74 Horn 90 Air Conditioning Clutch 67 Antilock Brakes, Diode StabiliTrak® 1 Motor 75 Headlamp 5-96 Service and Appearance Care

Capacities and Speciﬁcations The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric. Please refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information. Capacities and Speciﬁcations Capacities Application English Metric For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount, see the refrigerant caution label located Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more information. Cooling System 3.7L L5 Engine 10.0 qt 9.5 L 5.3L V8 Engine 14.3 qt 13.5 L Engine Oil with Filter 3.7L L5 and 5.3L V8 Engines 6.0 qt 5.7 L Fuel Tank H3 23.0 gal 87.1 L H3T 27.0 gal 102.2 L Service and Appearance Care 5-97

Capacities and Specifications (cont’d) Capacities Application English Metric Transfer Case 1.6 qt 1.5 L Transmission (Drain and Refill) 3.7L L5 and 5.3L V8, Automatic Transmission 5.0 qt 4.7 L 3.7L L5, Manual Transmission 2.5 qt 2.4 L Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual.

Engine Speciﬁcations Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap Automatic 3.7L L5 E .040 in (1.01 mm) Manual 5.3L V8 L Automatic .040 in (1.01 mm) 5-98 Service and Appearance Care

✍ NOTES Maintenance Schedule 6-1

Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Replacement Parts ...... 6-14 Schedule Engine Drive Belt Routing ...6-15 Schedule Maintenance Record ...... 6-16 Introduction Important: Keep engine oil at Maintenance Schedule the proper level and change as Introduction ...... 6-1 recommended. Maintenance Requirements ...... 6-2 Your Vehicle and the Environment ...... 6-2 Using the Maintenance Schedule ...... 6-2 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 6-4 Additional Required Services ...... 6-6 Have you purchased the Maintenance Footnotes ...... 6-7 GM Protection Plan? The Plan Owner Checks and supplements the vehicle warranties. Services ...... 6-9 See the Warranty and Owner At Each Fuel Fill ...... 6-9 Assistance booklet or your At Least Once a Month ...... 6-9 dealer/retailer for details. At Least Once a Year ...... 6-10 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...... 6-12 6-2 Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance breathe. Improper fluid levels or the Because of all the different ways wrong tire inflation can increase people use their vehicles, Requirements the level of emissions from the maintenance needs vary. You might Notice: Maintenance intervals, vehicle. To help protect the need more frequent checks and checks, inspections, replacement environment, and to keep the replacements. So please read the parts, and recommended fluids vehicle in good condition, be sure to following and note how you drive. and lubricants as prescribed maintain the vehicle properly. If you have any questions on how to in this manual are necessary to keep the vehicle in good condition, keep this vehicle in good working Using the Maintenance see your dealer/retailer. condition. Any damage caused Schedule This schedule is for vehicles that: by failure to follow scheduled maintenance might not be We want to help keep this vehicle in • carry passengers and cargo covered by the vehicle warranty. good working condition. But we within recommended limits on the do not know exactly how you Tire and Loading Information Your Vehicle and the will drive it. You might drive very label. See Loading the Vehicle Environment short distances only a few times a on page 4-35. week. Or you might drive long • are driven on reasonable road Proper vehicle maintenance not only distances all the time in very hot, surfaces within legal driving limits. helps to keep the vehicle in good dusty weather. You might use working condition, but also helps the the vehicle in making deliveries. • are driven off-road in the environment. All recommended Or you might drive it to work, to do recommended manner. See maintenance is important. Improper errands, or in many other ways. Off-Road Driving on page 4-13. vehicle maintenance can even • use the recommended fuel. affect the quality of the air we See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Maintenance Schedule 6-3

The services in Scheduled Some maintenance services can be The proper replacement parts, Maintenance on page 6-4 should complex. So, unless you are fluids, and lubricants to use be performed when indicated. technically qualified and have the are listed in Recommended Fluids See Additional Required Services necessary equipment, have and Lubricants on page 6-12 on page 6-6 and Maintenance your dealer/retailer do these jobs. and Maintenance Replacement Footnotes on page 6-7 for further Parts on page 6-14. When the When you go to your dealer/retailer information. vehicle is serviced, make sure these for service, trained and supported are used. All parts should be service technicians will perform replaced and all necessary repairs { CAUTION the work using genuine parts. done before you or anyone else Performing maintenance work on To purchase service information, drives the vehicle. We recommend a vehicle can be dangerous. In see Service Publications Ordering the use of genuine parts from Information on page 7-15. your dealer/retailer. trying to do some jobs, you can be seriously injured. Do your own Owner Checks and Services on maintenance work only if you page 6-9 tells what should be have the required know-how and checked, when to check it, and what the proper tools and equipment can easily be done to help keep for the job. If you have any doubt, the vehicle in good condition. see your dealer/retailer to have a qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 5-4. 6-4 Maintenance Schedule

Scheduled Maintenance If the engine oil life system is ever Maintenance I —Use reset accidentally, service the Maintenance I if the CHANGE When the CHANGE OIL message vehicle within 3,000 miles OIL message displays within displays in the Driver Information (5 000 km) since the last service. 10 months since the vehicle was Center (DIC), service is required for Remember to reset the oil life purchased or Maintenance II the vehicle. See DIC Warnings system whenever the oil is changed. was performed. and Messages on page 3-37. Have See Engine Oil Life System on Maintenance II —Use the vehicle serviced as soon as page 5-15 for information on Maintenance II if the previous possible within the next 600 miles the Engine Oil Life System and service performed was (1 000 km). It is possible that, if resetting the system. driving under the best conditions, Maintenance I. Always use the engine oil life system may When the CHANGE OIL message Maintenance II whenever the not indicate that vehicle service is appears, certain services, checks, message displays 10 months or necessary for over a year. However, and inspections are required. more since the last service or if the the engine oil and ﬁlter must be Required services are described in message has not come on at all changed at least once a year and the following for “Maintenance I” for one year. at this time the system must be and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it is reset. Your dealer/retailer has recommended that the ﬁrst service trained service technicians who will be Maintenance I, the second perform this work using genuine service be Maintenance II, and then parts and reset the system. alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II may be required more often. Maintenance Schedule 6-5

Scheduled Maintenance Service Maintenance I Maintenance II Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-13. Reset oil life system. •• See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-15. An Emission Control Service. Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #. •• Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). •• Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air • Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17. Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-57 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month •• on page 6-9. Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). •• Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as •• needed. Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” •• in this section. Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). • Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). • Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). • Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). • Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). • Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. • 6-6 Maintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles (kilometers) shown for each item. Additional Required Services 25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000 125,000 150,000 Service and Miles (Kilometers) (40 000) (80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000) Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • ••••• Inspect exhaust system for loose or • ••••• damaged components. Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on ••• page 5-17. Change automatic transmission fluid and filter (severe service). ••• See footnote (h). Change automatic transmission fluid • and filter (normal service). Change transfer case fluid. ••• See footnote (g). Replace spark plugs and inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control • Service. Maintenance Schedule 6-7

Additional Required Services (cont’d) 25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000 125,000 150,000 Service and Miles (Kilometers) (40 000) (80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000) Engine cooling system service (or every ﬁve years, whichever occurs ﬁrst). • An Emission Control Service. See footnote (i). Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission Control Service. • See footnote (k).

Maintenance Footnotes (b) Visually inspect front and rear (c) Visually inspect hoses and have suspension and steering system them replaced if they are cracked, # Lubricate the front suspension, for damaged, loose, or missing swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect steering linkage, and parking brake parts, signs of wear or lack all pipes, fittings, and clamps; cable guides. Control arm ball of lubrication. Inspect power steering replace with genuine parts as joints require lubrication but should lines and hoses for proper hook-up, needed. To help ensure proper not be lubricated unless their binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, operation, a pressure test of temperature is 10¡F (-12¡C) or etc. Visually check constant velocity the cooling system and pressure higher, or they could be damaged. joints, rubber boots and axle cap and cleaning the outside of (a) Visually inspect brake lines seals for leaks. Rotate and inspect the radiator and air conditioning and hoses for proper hook-up, U-joints, retainers, and bolts on condenser is recommended at least binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. rear drive shaft for seizing or once a year. Inspect disc brake pads for wear loosening. and rotors for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers, parking brake, etc. 6-8 Maintenance Schedule

(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, mechanism, endgate handle pivot (i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling cracking, or contamination. points, latch bolt, fuel door hinge, system. This service can be Clean the windshield and wiper locks, and folding seat hardware. complex; you should have your blades, if contaminated. Replace More frequent lubrication may dealer/retailer perform this service. wiper blades that are worn or be required when exposed to a See Engine Coolant on page 5-23 damaged. See Windshield Wiper corrosive environment. Applying for what to use. Inspect hoses. Blade Replacement on page 5-44 silicone grease on weatherstrips Clean radiator, condenser, and Windshield, Backglass, with a clean cloth will make pressure cap, and filler neck. and Wiper Blades on page 5-87 them last longer, seal better, and Pressure test the cooling system for more information. not stick or squeak. and pressure cap. (e) Make sure the safety belt (g) Check vent hose at transfer (j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system reminder light and safety belt case for kinks and proper could indicate a problem. Have the assemblies are working properly. installation. system inspected and repaired Look for any other loose or and the fluid level checked. Add fluid (h) Change automatic transmission damaged safety belt system parts. if needed. fluid and filter if the vehicle is If you see anything that might mainly driven under one or more of (k) Visually inspect belt for fraying, keep a safety belt system from doing these conditions: excessive cracks, or obvious its job, have it repaired. Have any damage. Replace belt if necessary. torn or frayed safety belts replaced. − In heavy city traffic where the Also see Checking the Restraint outside temperature regularly Systems on page 1-60. reaches 90¡F (32¡C) or higher. (f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, − In hilly or mountainous terrain. hood latch assembly, secondary − When doing frequent trailer latch, pivots, spring anchor, release towing. pawl, rear compartment hinges, − Uses such as found in taxi, outer endgate handle pivot points, police, or delivery service. rear door detent link, roller Maintenance Schedule 6-9

Owner Checks and At Each Fuel Fill At Least Once a Month Services It is important to perform these Tire Inflation Check underhood checks at each fuel fill. These owner checks and services Inspect the vehicle’s tires and make should be performed at the Engine Oil Level Check sure they are inflated to the correct intervals specified to help ensure Notice: It is important to check pressures. Do not forget to check vehicle safety, dependability, the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire and emission control performance. the engine oil regularly and keep it at the proper level. Pressure on page 5-51. Check to Your dealer/retailer can assist make sure the spare tire is stored with these checks and services. Failure to keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause securely. See Changing a Flat Tire Be sure any necessary repairs are damage to the engine not covered on page 5-66. completed at once. Whenever by the vehicle warranty. any fluids or lubricants are added Tire Wear Inspection Check the engine oil level and to the vehicle, make sure they Tire rotation may be required for add the proper oil if necessary. are the proper ones, as shown high mileage highway drivers prior to See Engine Oil on page 5-13. in Recommended Fluids and the Engine Oil Life System service Lubricants on page 6-12. Engine Coolant Level Check notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary, rotate the Check the engine coolant level tires. See Tire Inspection and and add DEX-COOL® coolant Rotation on page 5-57. mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant on page 5-23. Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if necessary. 6-10 Maintenance Schedule

At Least Once a Year 3. For automatic transmission Automatic Transmission Shift vehicles, try to start the engine Lock Control System Check Starter Switch Check in each gear. The vehicle should start only in P (Park) or { CAUTION { CAUTION N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact When you are doing this your dealer/retailer for service. When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move inspection, the vehicle could move For manual transmission suddenly. If the vehicle moves, suddenly. If the vehicle moves, vehicles, put the shift lever in you or others could be injured. you or others could be injured. Neutral, push the clutch pedal down halfway, and try to 1. Before starting this check, be 1. Before starting this check, be start the engine. The vehicle sure there is enough room sure there is enough room should start only when the clutch around the vehicle. It should be around the vehicle. pedal is pushed down all the parked on a level surface. way to the ﬂoor. If the vehicle 2. Firmly apply both the parking starts when the clutch pedal 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. brake and the regular brake. is not pushed all the way down, See Parking Brake on page 2-28. See Parking Brake on page 2-28. contact your dealer/retailer Be ready to apply the regular Do not use the accelerator for service. brake immediately if the vehicle pedal, and be ready to turn off begins to move. the engine immediately if it starts. 3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN, but do not start the engine. Without applying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer for service. Maintenance Schedule 6-11

Ignition Transmission Lock Parking Brake and Automatic pressure from the regular brake Check Transmission P (Park) pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only. While parked, and with the parking Mechanism Check brake set, try to turn the ignition • To check the P (Park) to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever { CAUTION mechanism’s holding ability: position. With the engine running, shift to When you are doing this check, P (Park). Then release the • For automatic transmission the vehicle could begin to move. parking brake followed by the vehicles, the ignition should turn regular brake. to LOCK/OFF only when the You or others could be injured shift lever is in P (Park). and property could be damaged. Contact your dealer/retailer if The ignition key should Make sure there is room in front service is required. come out only in LOCK/OFF. of the vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular Underbody Flushing Service • For manual transmission brake at once should the vehicle At least every spring, use plain vehicles, the ignition key should begin to move. come out only in LOCK/OFF. water to ﬂush any corrosive materials from the underbody. Contact your dealer/retailer if service Park on a fairly steep hill, with the Take care to clean thoroughly is required. vehicle facing downhill. Keeping any areas where mud and other your foot on the regular brake, set debris can collect. the parking brake. • To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the engine running and transmission in N (Neutral), slowly remove foot 6-12 Maintenance Schedule

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Fluids and lubricants identiﬁed below by name, part number, or speciﬁcation can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst Engine Oil symbol. To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle’s engine, see Engine Oil on page 5-13. ® Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant. See Engine Coolant on page 5-23. Hydraulic Brake System Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent. GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, Hydraulic Power Steering System in Canada 89021186). Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89021806, Manual Transmission in Canada 89021807). Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12345347, in Canada 10953517) Hydraulic Clutch System or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, Key Lock Cylinders in Canada 10953474). Maintenance Schedule 6-13

Usage Fluid/Lubricant Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or Chassis Lubrication lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB. SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, Front and Rear Axle in Canada 89021678) meeting GM Speciﬁcation 9986115. Transfer Case DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, Front Axle Propshaft Spline in Canada 10953511) or lubricant meeting requirements of GM 9985830. Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, Hood Hinges in Canada 10953474). Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, Outer Endgate Handle Pivot Points in Canada 10953474). Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) Weatherstrip Conditioning or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada 992887). Synthetic Grease with Teﬂon, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12371287, Weatherstrip Squeaks in Canada 10953437). 6-14 Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identiﬁed below by name, part number or speciﬁcation can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 3.7L L5 and 5.3L V8 Engine 15942429 — Engine Oil Filter 3.7L L5 Engine 89017342 PF61 5.3L V8 Engine 89017524 PF48 Spark Plugs 3.7L L5 Engine 12598004 41-103 5.3L V8 Engine 12609877 41-985 Wiper Blades Front Driver Side – 16.7 in (42.5 cm) 10389562 — Front Passenger Side – 15.7 in (40.0 cm) 10389563 — Rear – 11.8 in (30.0 cm) 10389570 — Maintenance Schedule 6-15

Engine Drive Belt Routing

5.3L V8 Engine 3.7L L5 Engine 6-16 Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts. Maintenance Record Odometer Maintenance I or Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Maintenance II Maintenance Schedule 6-17

Maintenance Record (cont’d) Odometer Maintenance I or Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Maintenance II 6-18 Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance Record (cont’d) Odometer Maintenance I or Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Maintenance II Customer Assistance Information 7-1

Customer Reporting Safety Defects Customer Assistance Reporting Safety Defects Assistance to the United States and Information Government ...... 7-14 Information Reporting Safety Defects Customer Satisfaction to the Canadian Procedure Government ...... 7-14 Reporting Safety Defects Your satisfaction and goodwill are to General Motors ...... 7-15 important to your dealer and to Customer Assistance HUMMER. Normally, any concerns and Information Service Publications Ordering Information ...... 7-15 with the sales transaction or the Customer Satisfaction operation of the vehicle will be Procedure ...... 7-1 resolved by the dealer’s sales or ...... 7-3 Vehicle Data Recording Online Owner Center and Privacy service departments. Sometimes, Customer Assistance for however, despite the best intentions Text Telephone (TTY) Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ...... 7-16 of all concerned, misunderstandings Users ...... 7-4 can occur. If your concern has not Customer Assistance Event Data Recorders ...... 7-16 OnStar® ...... 7-17 been resolved to your satisfaction, Offices ...... 7-4 the following steps should be taken: GM Mobility Navigation System ...... 7-17 Reimbursement Program ...7-5 Radio Frequency STEP ONE: Discuss your concern Roadside Service ...... 7-6 Identiﬁcation (RFID) ...... 7-17 with a member of dealership Scheduling Service management. Normally, concerns Appointments ...... 7-9 can be quickly resolved at that level. Courtesy Transportation ...... 7-9 If the matter has already been Collision Damage Repair ...7-11 reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager. 7-2 Customer Assistance Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting HUMMER, please program is free of charge and your member of dealership management, remember that your concern will case will generally be heard within it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer’s 40 days. If you do not agree with the resolved by the dealership without facility. That is why we suggest you decision given in your case, you may further help, call the HUMMER follow Step One first if you have reject it and proceed with any other Consumer Relations Manager at a concern. venue for relief available to you. 1-866-HUMMER6 (486-6376), Customer Assistance prompt. In STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Contact the BBB Auto Line Program Canada, call GM of Canada Both General Motors and your dealer using the toll-free telephone number Customer Communication Centre at are committed to making sure you or write them at: 1-800-263-3777 (English), or are completely satisfied with your BBB Auto Line Program 1-800-263-7854 (French). new vehicle. However, if you Council of Better Business continue to remain unsatisfied after Bureaus, Inc. We encourage you to call the toll-free following the procedure outlined in 4200 Wilson Boulevard number in order to give your inquiry Steps One and Two, you can file with Suite 800 prompt attention. Have the following the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Arlington, VA 22203-1838 information available to give the Auto Line Program to enforce any Telephone: 1-800- 955-5100 Customer Assistance additional rights you may have. dr.bbb.org/goauto Representative: The BBB Auto Line Program is an This program is available in all • Vehicle Identification Number out of court program administered by 50 states and the District of (VIN). This is available from the the Council of Better Business Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle registration or title, or the Bureaus to settle automotive vehicle age, mileage, and other plate at the top left of the disputes regarding vehicle repairs or factors. General Motors reserves the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle right to change eligibility limitations through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may and/or discontinue its participation • Dealership name and location be required to resort to this informal in this program. dispute resolution program prior to • Vehicle delivery date and present filing a court action, use of the mileage Customer Assistance Information 7-3

STEP THREE — Canadian our impartial program offers Online Owner Center Owners: In the event that you do advantages over courts in most not feel your concerns have been jurisdictions because it is informal, Online Owner Center (U.S.) — addressed after following the quick, and free of charge. www.gmownercenter.com/ procedure outlined in Steps One and hummer For further information concerning Two, General Motors of Canada Information and services customized Limited wants you to be aware of eligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), for your specific vehicle — all in its participation in a no-charge one convenient place. Mediation/Arbitration Program. call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call General Motors of Canada Limited the General Motors Customer • Digital owner manual, warranty has committed to binding arbitration Communication Centre, information, and more of owner disputes involving 1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to: • Online service and maintenance factory-related vehicle service records claims. The program provides for Mediation/Arbitration Program c/o the review of the facts involved by Customer Communication Centre • Find HUMMER dealers for an impartial third party arbiter, and General Motors of Canada Limited service nationwide may include an informal hearing Mail Code: CA1-163-005 • Exclusive privileges and offers before the arbiter. The program is 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 • Recall notices for your specific designed so that the entire dispute vehicle settlement process, from the time Your inquiry should be accompanied ® you file your complaint to the final by the Vehicle Identification • OnStar and GM Cardmember decision, should be completed in Number (VIN). Services Earnings summaries approximately 70 days. We believe Other Helpful Links: HUMMER − www.hummer.com HUMMER Merchandise — www.hummerstuff.com 7-4 Customer Assistance Information

My GM Canada (Canada) — • My Preferences: Manage your Customer Assistance www.gm.ca proﬁle and use tools and forms Offices with greater ease. My GM Canada is a HUMMER encourages customers password-protected section of To sign up, visit the My GM Canada to call the toll-free number for www.gm.ca where you can save section within www.gm.ca. assistance. However, if a customer information on GM vehicles, get wishes to write or e-mail HUMMER, personalized offers, and use handy Customer Assistance for refer to the addresses below. tools and forms with greater ease. Text Telephone (TTY) United States – Customer Here are a few of the valuable tools Users and services you will have access to: Assistance To assist customers who are deaf, HUMMER Customer Assistance • My Showroom: Find and save hard of hearing, or speech-impaired information on vehicles and Center and who use Text Telephones P.O. Box 33177 current offers in your area. (TTYs), HUMMER has TTY Detroit, MI 48232-5177 equipment available at its Customer • My Dealers/Retailers: Save www.HUMMER.com details such as address and Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicate 1-866-HUMMER6 (1-866-486-6376) phone number for each of your 1-800-833-6537 (For Text with HUMMER by dialing: preferred GM dealers/retailers. Telephone devices (TTYs)) 1-800-833-6537. (TTY users in Roadside Assistance: • My Driveway: Access quick links Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) to parts and service estimates, 1-866-HUMMER6 (1-866-486-6376) check trade-in values, or schedule From Puerto Rico: a service appointment by adding 1-800-496-9992 (English) the vehicles you own to your 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) driveway proﬁle. From U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994 Customer Assistance Information 7-5

Canada – Customer Mexico, Central America and GM Mobility Assistance Caribbean Islands/Countries Reimbursement Program General Motors of Canada Limited (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Customer Communication Centre, Virgin Islands) – Customer CA1-163-005 Assistance 1908 Colonel Sam Drive General Motors de Mexico, S. de Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 R.L. de C.V. www.gmcanada.com Customer Assistance Center This program, available to qualiﬁed 1-800-263-3777 (English) Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 applicants, can reimburse you up to 1-800-263-7854 (French) Col. Lomas de Bezares $1,000 of the cost of eligible 1-800-263-3830 (For Text C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F. aftermarket adaptive equipment Telephone devices (TTYs)) 01-800-508-0000 required for your vehicle, such as Roadside Assistance: Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800 hand controls or a wheelchair/ 1-800-268-6800 scooter lift. Overseas – Customer The offer is available for a very Assistance limited period of time from the date of Please contact the local General vehicle purchase/lease. For more Motors Business Unit. details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935. 7-6 Customer Assistance Information

General Motors of Canada also Calling for Assistance Coverage has a Mobility Program. Call When calling Roadside Assistance, Services are provided up to 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) have the following information ready: 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km), for details. TTY users call whichever comes first. 1-800-263-3830. • Your name, home address, and home telephone number In the U.S., anyone driving the Roadside Service • Telephone number of your vehicle is covered. In Canada, a location person driving the vehicle without For U.S. purchased vehicles, call permission from the owner is not 1-866-HUMMER6 (486-6376); (Text • Location of the vehicle covered. Telephone (TTY): 1-888-889-2438). • Model, year, color, and license Roadside Assistance is not a part of For Canadian purchased vehicles, plate number of the vehicle the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. call 1-800-268-6800. • Odometer reading, Vehicle HUMMER and General Motors Service is available 24 hours a day, Identification Number (VIN), and of Canada Limited reserve the right 365 days a year. delivery date of the vehicle to make any changes or discontinue • Description of the problem the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification. Customer Assistance Information 7-7

HUMMER and General Motors of • Emergency Tow From a Public • Trip Routing Service: Detailed Canada Limited reserve the right to Road or Highway: Tow to the maps of North America are limit services or payment to an nearest HUMMER dealer for provided when requested either owner or driver if they decide the warranty service, or if the vehicle with the most direct route or the claims are made too often, or was in a crash and cannot be most scenic route. Additional the same type of claim is made driven. travel information is also many times. • Flat Tire Change: Service is available. Allow three weeks for delivery. Services Provided provided to change a flat tire with spare tire. The spare tire, if • Trip Interruption Benefits and • Emergency Fuel Delivery: equipped, must be in good Assistance: If your trip is Delivery of enough fuel for condition and properly inflated. It interrupted due to a warranty the vehicle to get to the nearest is your responsibility for the repair failure, incidental expenses may service station. or replacement of the tire if it is be reimbursed during the 5 year/ • Lock-Out Service: Service is not covered by the warranty. 100,000 miles (160 000 km) provided to unlock the vehicle if • Battery Jump Start: Service is Powertrain warranty period. Items you are locked out. A remote provided to jump start a dead considered are hotel, meals, and unlock may be available if you battery. rental car. have OnStar®. For security reasons, the driver must present identification before this service is given. 7-8 Customer Assistance Information

HUMMER Technician Services Not Included in • Trip Interruption Benefits and Roadside Service (U.S. only) Roadside Assistance Assistance: Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a HUMMER’s exceptional Roadside • Impound towing caused by copy of the repair orders are Service is more than an auto club or violation of any laws. required. Once authorization has towing service. It provides every • Legal fines. been received, the Roadside HUMMER owner in the United Assistance advisor will help you States with the advantage of • Mounting, dismounting or make arrangements and explain contacting a HUMMER advisor and, changing of snow tires, chains, how to receive payment. where available, a HUMMER or other traction devices. trained dealer technician who can • Towing or services for vehicles • Alternative Service: If provide on-site service. driven on a non-public road or assistance cannot be provided highway. right away, the Roadside A dealer technician will travel to your Assistance advisor may give you location within a 30 mile radius of a Services Specific to Canadian permission to get local emergency participating HUMMER dealership. Purchased Vehicles road service. You will receive If beyond this radius, we will arrange payment, up to $100, after to have your vehicle towed to the • Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately $5 Canadian. sending the original receipt to nearest HUMMER dealership. Each Roadside Assistance. Mechanical technician travels with a specially Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted. Propane and other failures may be covered, however equipped service vehicle complete any cost for parts and labor for with the necessary HUMMER parts fuels are not provided through this service. repairs not covered by the and tools required to handle most warranty are the owner roadside repairs. • Lock-Out Service: Vehicle responsibility. registration is required. • Trip Routing Service: Limit of six requests per year. Customer Assistance Information 7-9

Scheduling Service Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options Appointments To enhance your ownership Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. However, When your vehicle requires warranty experience, we and our participating if you are unable to wait, GM helps service, contact your dealer/retailer dealers are proud to offer Courtesy to minimize your inconvenience and request an appointment. By Transportation, a customer by providing several transportation scheduling a service appointment support program for vehicles with options. Depending on the and advising your service consultant the Bumper to Bumper (Base circumstances, your dealer can of your transportation needs, your Warranty Coverage period in offer you one of the following: dealer/retailer can help minimize Canada) and extended powertrain, and hybrid speciﬁc warranties in your inconvenience. Shuttle Service both the U.S. and Canada. If your vehicle cannot be scheduled Participating dealers can provide into the service department Several courtesy transportation shuttle service to get you to immediately, keep driving it until it options are available to assist your destination with minimal can be scheduled for service, in reducing your inconvenience interruption of your daily schedule. unless, of course, the problem is when warranty repairs are required. This includes one-way or round safety-related. If it is, please Courtesy Transportation is not a trip shuttle service to a destination call your dealership/retailer, let them part of the New Vehicle Limited up to 10 miles (16 km) from the know this, and ask for instructions. Warranty. A separate booklet dealership. If the dealer/retailer requests entitled “Warranty and Owner you to bring the vehicle for service, Assistance Information” furnished you are urged to do so as early with each new vehicle provides in the work day as possible to allow detailed warranty coverage for the same day repair. information. 7-10 Customer Assistance Information

Public Transportation or Fuel Courtesy Rental Vehicle Additional Program Reimbursement Your dealer may arrange to provide Information If your vehicle requires warranty you with a courtesy rental vehicle or All program options, such as shuttle repairs, and public transportation is reimburse you for a rental vehicle service, may not be available at used instead of the dealer’s shuttle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept every dealer. Please contact service, the expense must be for a warranty repair. If you obtain a your dealer for speciﬁc information supported by original receipts and rental vehicle on your own, please about availability. All Courtesy can only be up to the maximum see your dealer for the maximum Transportation arrangements will be amount allowed by GM for shuttle number of days allowed and the administered by appropriate service. In addition, for U.S. allowance per rental day. Rental dealer personnel. customers, should you arrange reimbursement must be supported transportation through a friend or by original receipts. This requires General Motors reserves the right to relative, limited reimbursement for that you sign and complete a rental unilaterally modify, change, or reasonable fuel expenses may be agreement and meet state, local, and discontinue Courtesy Transportation available. Claim amounts should rental vehicle provider requirements. at any time and to resolve all reﬂect actual costs and be supported Requirements vary and may include questions of claim eligibility pursuant by original receipts. See your dealer minimum age requirements, to the terms and conditions for information regarding the insurance coverage, credit card, described herein at its sole allowance amounts for etc. You are responsible for fuel discretion. reimbursement of fuel or other usage charges and may also be transportation costs. responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair. It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a courtesy rental. Customer Assistance Information 7-11

Collision Damage Repair vehicles that were total losses in Repair Facility prior crashes. In most cases, the GM also recommends that you If your vehicle is involved in a parts being recycled are from choose a collision repair facility that collision and it is damaged, have undamaged sections of the vehicle. meets your needs before you ever the damage repaired by a qualified A recycled original equipment GM need collision repairs. Your GM technician using the proper part, may be an acceptable choice to dealer/retailer may have a collision equipment and quality replacement maintain your vehicle’s originally repair center with GM-trained parts. Poorly performed collision designed appearance and safety technicians and state of the art repairs will diminish your vehicle’s performance, however, the history of equipment, or be able to recommend resale value, and safety performance these parts is not known. Such parts a collision repair center that has can be compromised in subsequent are not covered by your GM New GM-trained technicians and collisions. Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any comparable equipment. Collision Parts related failures are not covered by that warranty. Insuring Your Vehicle Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials Aftermarket collision parts are also Protect your investment in your GM and construction methods as the available. These are made by vehicle with comprehensive and parts with which your vehicle companies other than GM and may collision insurance coverage. There was originally built. Genuine GM not have been tested for your are significant differences in the Collision parts are your best choice vehicle. As a result, these parts may quality of coverage afforded by to ensure that your vehicle’s fit poorly, exhibit premature various insurance policy terms. designed appearance, durability and durability/corrosion problems, and safety are preserved. The use of may not perform properly in Genuine GM parts can help maintain subsequent collisions. Aftermarket your GM New Vehicle Warranty. parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and Recycled original equipment parts any vehicle failure related to such may also be used for repair. These parts are not covered by that parts are typically removed from warranty. 7-12 Customer Assistance Information

Many insurance policies provide If a Crash Occurs • If you need roadside assistance, reduced protection to your GM Here is what to do if you are call GM Roadside Assistance. vehicle by limiting compensation for involved in a crash. See Roadside Service on damage repairs by using aftermarket page 7-6 for more information. collision parts. Some insurance • Try to relax and then check to • If your vehicle cannot be driven, companies will not specify make sure you are all right. If know where the towing service aftermarket collision parts. When you are uninjured, make sure that will be taking it. Get a card from purchasing insurance, we no one else in your vehicle, or the tow truck operator or write recommend that you assure your the other vehicle, is injured. down the driver’s name, the vehicle will be repaired with GM • If there has been an injury, call service’s name, and the phone original equipment collision parts. If emergency services for help. number. such insurance coverage is not Do not leave the scene of a crash available from your current insurance until all matters have been • Remove any valuables from your carrier, consider switching to another taken care of. Move your vehicle vehicle before it is towed away. insurance carrier. only if its position puts you in Make sure this includes your insurance information and If your vehicle is leased, the leasing danger or you are instructed to move it by a police officer. registration if you keep these company may require you to items in your vehicle. have insurance that assures repairs • Give only the necessary and with Genuine GM Original requested information to Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) police and other parties involved parts or Genuine Manufacturer in the crash. Do not discuss replacement parts. Read your lease your personal condition, mental carefully, as you may be charged frame of mind, or anything at the end of your lease for unrelated to the crash. This will poor quality repairs. help guard against post-crash legal action. Customer Assistance Information 7-13

• Gather the important information • Choose a reputable collision parts, either new Genuine GM parts you will need from the other repair facility for your vehicle. or recycled original GM parts. driver. Things like name, address, Whether you select a GM dealer/ Remember, recycled parts will not phone number, driver’s license retailer or a private collision repair be covered by your GM vehicle number, vehicle license plate, facility to ﬁx the damage, make warranty. vehicle make, model and model sure you are comfortable with Insurance pays the bill for the repair, year, Vehicle Identiﬁcation them. Remember, you will have to but you must live with the repair. Number (VIN), insurance feel comfortable with their work for Depending on your policy limits, your company and policy number, and a long time. insurance company may initially a general description of the • Once you have an estimate, read value the repair using aftermarket damage to the other vehicle. it carefully and make sure you parts. Discuss this with your repair • If possible, call your insurance understand what work will be professional, and insist on Genuine company from the scene of the performed on your vehicle. If you GM parts. Remember if your vehicle crash. They will walk you through have a question, ask for an is leased you may be obligated to the information they will need. If explanation. Reputable shops have the vehicle repaired with they ask for a police report, phone welcome this opportunity. Genuine GM parts, even if your or go to the police department insurance coverage does not pay the headquarters the next day and Managing the Vehicle Damage full cost. you can get a copy of the report Repair Process If another party’s insurance company for a nominal fee. In some In the event that your vehicle is paying for the repairs, you are not states/provinces with “no fault” requires damage repairs, GM obligated to accept a repair valuation insurance laws, a report may not recommends that you take an active based on that insurance company’s be necessary. This is especially role in its repair. If you have a collision policy repair limits, as you true if there are no injuries and pre-determined repair facility of have no contractual limits with that both vehicles are driveable. choice, take your vehicle there, or company. In such cases, you can have it towed there. Specify to the have control of the repair and parts facility that any required replacement choices as long as cost stays within collision parts be original equipment reasonable limits. 7-14 Customer Assistance Information

Reporting Safety vehicles, it may order a recall and Reporting Safety Defects remedy campaign. However, to the Canadian Defects NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between Government Reporting Safety Defects you, your dealer/retailer, or If you live in Canada, and you to the United States General Motors. believe that your vehicle has Government To contact NHTSA, you may a safety defect, notify Transport call the Vehicle Safety Hotline Canada immediately, in addition to If you believe that your vehicle notifying General Motors of has a defect which could cause a toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to Canada Limited. Call them at crash or could cause injury or 1-800-333-0510 or write to: death, you should immediately safercar.gov; or write to: inform the National Highway Administrator, NHTSA Transport Canada Traffic Safety Administration 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Road Safety Branch Washington D.C., 20590 2780 Sheffield Road (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9 General Motors. You can also obtain other If NHTSA receives similar information about motor vehicle complaints, it may open an safety from safercar.gov. investigation, and if it ﬁnds that a safety defect exists in a group of Customer Assistance Information 7-15

Reporting Safety Defects Service Publications Owner Information to General Motors Ordering Information Owner publications are written speciﬁcally for owners and intended In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Service Manuals to provide basic operational Transport Canada) in a situation like information about the vehicle. The this, please notify General Motors. Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines, owner manual includes the Call 1-866-HUMMER6 (486-6376), transmission, axle suspension, Maintenance Schedule for all or write: brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc. models. HUMMER Customer Assistance Service Bulletins In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Center Owner Manual, and Warranty P.O. Box 33177 Service Bulletins give additional Booklet. Detroit, MI 48232-5177 technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General RETAIL SELL PRICE: In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee (English) or 1-800-263-7854 Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin (French), or write: contains instructions to assist in the Without Portfolio: Owner diagnosis and service of your Manual only. General Motors of Canada Limited vehicle. Customer Communication Centre RETAIL SELL PRICE: CA1-163-005 $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Current and Past Model Order Forms Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an order form, specify year and model name of the vehicle. 7-16 Customer Assistance Information

ORDER TOLL FREE: Event Data Recorders 1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday Vehicle Data 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time Recording and This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main For Credit Card Orders Only Privacy purpose of an EDR is to record, in (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Your GM vehicle has a number of certain crash or near crash-like Helm, Inc. on the World Wide sophisticated computers that record situations, such as an airbag Web at: helminc.com information about the vehicle’s deployment or hitting a road Or you can write to: performance and how it is driven. For obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s Helm, Incorporated example, your vehicle uses computer systems performed. The EDR is P.O. Box 07130 modules to monitor and control Detroit, MI 48207 engine and transmission designed to record data related to performance, to monitor the vehicle dynamics and safety Prices are subject to change without conditions for airbag deployment and systems for a short period of time, notice and without incurring deploy airbags in a crash and, if so typically 30 seconds or less. obligation. Allow ample time for equipped, to provide antilock braking The EDR in this vehicle is designed delivery. to help the driver control the vehicle. to record such data as: Note to Canadian Customers: All These modules may store data to • How various systems in your listed prices are quoted in U.S. help your dealer/retailer technician vehicle were operating service your vehicle. Some modules funds. Canadian residents are to • Whether or not the driver and make checks payable in U.S. funds. may also store data about how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of passenger safety belts were fuel consumption or average speed. buckled/fastened These modules may also retain the • How far, if at all, the driver was owner’s personal preferences, such pressing the accelerator and/or as radio pre-sets, seat positions, and brake pedal temperature settings. • How fast the vehicle was traveling Customer Assistance Information 7-17

This data can help provide a better GM will not access this data or Navigation System understanding of the circumstances share it with others except: with the in which crashes and injuries occur. consent of the vehicle owner or, If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the system may Important: EDR data is recorded if the vehicle is leased, with result in the storage of destinations, by your vehicle only if a non-trivial the consent of the lessee; in addresses, telephone numbers, and crash situation occurs; no data response to an official request of other trip information. Refer to the is recorded by the EDR under police or similar government office; navigation system operating manual normal driving conditions and no as part of GM’s defense of for information on stored data and for personal data (e.g., name, gender, litigation through the discovery deletion instructions. age, and crash location) is process; or, as required by law. Data recorded. However, other parties, that GM collects or receives may such as law enforcement, could also be used for GM research needs Radio Frequency combine the EDR data with the type or may be made available to Identiﬁcation (RFID) of personally identifying data others for research purposes, where a need is shown and the data is RFID technology is used in some routinely acquired during a crash vehicles for functions such as investigation. not tied to a speciﬁc vehicle or vehicle owner. tire pressure monitoring and ignition To read data recorded by an EDR, system security, as well as in special equipment is required, ® connection with conveniences such and access to the vehicle or the OnStar as key fobs for remote door EDR is needed. In addition to If your vehicle has OnStar and you locking/unlocking and starting, and the vehicle manufacturer, other subscribe to the OnStar services, in-vehicle transmitters for garage parties, such as law enforcement, please refer to the OnStar Terms and door openers. RFID technology in that have the special equipment, can Conditions for information on data GM vehicles does not use or record read the information if they have collection and use. See also OnStar¨ personal information or link with access to the vehicle or the EDR. System on page 2-39 in this manual any other GM system containing for more information. personal information. 7-18 Customer Assistance Information

✍ NOTES INDEX i-1

A Airbag System (cont.) Appearance Care (cont.) What Makes an Airbag Instrument Panel, Vinyl, Accessories and Inflate? ...... 1-52 and Other Plastic Modifications ...... 5-3 What Will You See After an Surfaces ...... 5-85 Accessory Power Outlets ...... 3-18 Airbag Inflates? ...... 1-52 Interior Cleaning ...... 5-83 Adding Equipment to Your When Should an Airbag Leather ...... 5-85 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 1-58 Inflate? ...... 1-50 Sheet Metal Damage ...... 5-89 Additives, Fuel ...... 5-6 Where Are the Airbags? ..... 1-49 Tires ...... 5-89 Add-On Electrical Antenna, Fixed Mast ...... 3-63 Underbody Maintenance .... 5-89 Equipment ...... 5-91 Antenna, XM™ Satellite Washing Your Vehicle ...... 5-86 Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ...... 5-17 Radio Antenna System ...... 3-63 Weatherstrips ...... 5-86 Air Conditioning ...... 3-19 Antilock Brake Windshield, Backglass, and Airbag System (ABS) ...... 4-5 Wiper Blades ...... 5-87 Passenger Status Antilock Brake, System Appointments, Scheduling Indicator ...... 3-26 Warning Light ...... 3-28 Service ...... 7-9 Readiness Light ...... 3-25 Appearance Care Ashtray ...... 3-18 Airbag System ...... 1-46 Aluminum or Assist Steps ...... 4-28 Adding Equipment to Your Chrome-Plated Wheels ... 5-88 Audio System ...... 3-41 Airbag-Equipped Care of Safety Belts ...... 5-85 Fixed Mast Antenna ...... 3-63 Vehicle ...... 1-58 Chemical Paint Spotting ..... 5-90 Navigation/Radio System, How Does an Airbag Cleaning Exterior Lamps/ see Navigation Manual ... 3-52 Restrain? ...... 1-52 Lenses ...... 5-86 Radio Reception ...... 3-62 Passenger Sensing Fabric/Carpet ...... 5-84 Setting the Clock ...... 3-41 System ...... 1-54 Finish Care ...... 5-86 Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 3-62 Servicing Your Finish Damage ...... 5-89 XM™ Satellite Radio Airbag-Equipped Antenna System ...... 3-63 Vehicle ...... 1-58 i-2 INDEX

Audio System(s) ...... 3-42 Bulb Replacement (cont.) Check Automatic Headlamp License Plate Lamps ...... 5-43 Engine Lamp ...... 3-30 System ...... 3-14 Replacement Bulbs ...... 5-43 Checking Things Under Automatic Transmission Taillamps, Turn Signal, the Hood ...... 5-9 Fluid ...... 5-18 Stoplamps and Back-up Chemical Paint Spotting ...... 5-90 Operation ...... 2-19 Lamps ...... 5-42 Child Restraints Buying New Tires ...... 5-59 Child Restraint Systems ..... 1-31 Infants and Young B Children ...... 1-28 Battery ...... 5-33 C Lower Anchors and Tethers Electric Power Calibration ...... 2-34 for Children ...... 1-34 Management ...... 3-17 California Fuel ...... 5-5 Older Children ...... 1-25 Run-Down Protection ...... 3-17 California Perchlorate Securing a Child Restraint Bench Seat, Materials Requirements ...... 5-4 in a Rear Outside Seat Split (60/40) ...... 1-7, 1-9 California Proposition ® Position ...... 1-41 Bluetooth ...... 3-52 65 Warning ...... 5-4 Securing a Child Restraint Brake Canadian Owners ...... ii in the Center Rear Seat Emergencies ...... 4-6 Capacities and Position ...... 1-43 Brake Fluid ...... 5-30 Speciﬁcations ...... 5-96 Securing a Child Restraint Brakes ...... 5-30 Carbon Monoxide .... 2-7, 2-9, 2-31 in the Right Front Seat System Warning Light ...... 3-27 Care of Position ...... 1-43 Braking ...... 4-3 Safety Belts ...... 5-85 Where to Put the Braking in Emergencies ...... 4-6 Cargo Cover ...... 2-49 Restraint ...... 1-32 Break-In, New Vehicle ...... 2-15 Cargo Management System ... 2-49 Cigarette Lighter ...... 3-18 Bulb Replacement ...... 5-41 Cargo Tie Downs ...... 2-49 Cleaning Halogen Bulbs ...... 5-41 Center Console Aluminum or Headlamp Aiming ...... 5-39 Storage Area ...... 2-47 Chrome-Plated Wheels ... 5-88 Headlamps ...... 5-41 Chains, Tire ...... 5-65 Exterior Lamps/Lenses ...... 5-86 Charging System Light ...... 3-27 Fabric/Carpet ...... 5-84 INDEX i-3

Cleaning (cont.) Cruise Control Light ...... 3-33 D Finish Care ...... 5-86 Cupholders ...... 2-47 Daytime Running Lamp ...... 3-13 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, Customer Assistance Defensive Driving ...... 4-2 and Other Plastic Information Doing Your Own Surfaces ...... 5-85 Courtesy Transportation ...... 7-9 Service Work ...... 5-4 Interior ...... 5-83 Customer Assistance for Dome Lamp ...... 3-16 Leather ...... 5-85 Text Telephone (TTY) Dome Lamp Override ...... 3-16 Tires ...... 5-89 Users ...... 7-4 Door Underbody Maintenance .... 5-89 Customer Assistance Locks ...... 2-5 Washing Your Vehicle ...... 5-86 Offices ...... 7-4 Power Door Locks ...... 2-6 Weatherstrips ...... 5-86 Customer Satisfaction Programmable Automatic Windshield, Backglass, and Procedure ...... 7-1 Door Locks ...... 2-6 Wiper Blades ...... 5-87 GM Mobility Rear Door Security Locks .... 2-6 Climate Control System ...... 3-19 Reimbursement Driver Information Outlet Adjustment ...... 3-21 Program ...... 7-5 Center (DIC) ...... 3-34 Clock, Setting ...... 3-41 Reporting Safety Defects to DIC Operation and Clutch, Hydraulic ...... 5-21 General Motors ...... 7-15 Displays ...... 3-34 Collision Damage Repair ...... 7-11 Reporting Safety Defects to DIC Warnings and Compass ...... 2-34 the Canadian Messages ...... 3-37 Content Theft-Deterrent ...... 2-11 Government ...... 7-14 Driving Control of a Vehicle ...... 4-3 Reporting Safety Defects to At Night ...... 4-28 Convenience Net ...... 2-49 the United States Before a Long Trip ...... 4-30 Coolant Government ...... 7-14 Defensive ...... 4-2 Engine ...... 5-23 Roadside Service ...... 7-6 Drunken ...... 4-2 Engine Temperature Gage ... 3-29 Service Publications Highway Hypnosis ...... 4-30 Cooling System ...... 5-22 Ordering Information ...... 7-15 Cruise Control ...... 3-9 i-4 INDEX

Driving (cont.) Electronic Immobilizer F Hill and Mountain Roads .... 4-30 Operation Filter In Rain and on PASS-Key® III+ ...... 2-14 Engine Air Cleaner ...... 5-17 Wet Roads ...... 4-29 Engine Finish Damage ...... 5-89 Off-Road ...... 4-13 Air Cleaner/Filter ...... 5-17 Fixed Mast Antenna ...... 3-63 Recovery Loops ...... 4-34 Check and Service Engine Flashers, Hazard Warning ...... 3-5 Rocking Your Vehicle to Soon Lamp ...... 3-30 Flash-to-Pass ...... 3-7 Get it Out ...... 4-34 Coolant ...... 5-23 Flat Tire ...... 5-66 Winter ...... 4-31 Coolant Heater ...... 2-19 Flat Tire, Changing ...... 5-66 Driving for Better Fuel Coolant Flat Tire, Storing ...... 5-78, 5-80 Economy ...... 4-1 Temperature Gage ...... 3-29 Fluid Drive Belt Routing ...... 6-15 Automatic Transmission ..... 5-18 Engine Compartment Power Steering ...... 5-29 E Overview ...... 5-10 Windshield Washer ...... 5-30 EDR ...... 7-16 Exhaust ...... 2-31 Fog Lamp Electrical System Fan Noise ...... 5-28 Fog ...... 3-15 Add-On Equipment ...... 5-91 Oil ...... 5-13 Four-Wheel Drive ...... 5-38 Engine Compartment Fuse Oil Life System ...... 5-15 Four-Wheel Drive, Block ...... 5-92 Overheating ...... 5-27 Full-Time ...... 2-24 Fuses and Circuit Starting ...... 2-17 Front Axle ...... 5-39 Breakers ...... 5-91 Event Data Recorders ...... 7-16 Front Seat Storage Net ...... 2-47 Power Windows and Other Exit Lighting ...... 3-16 Fuel ...... 5-5 Power Options ...... 5-91 Extender, Safety Belt ...... 1-25 Additives ...... 5-6 Windshield Wiper Fuses .... 5-91 Exterior Lamps ...... 3-11 Electronic Immobilizer California Fuel ...... 5-5 PASS-Key® III+ ...... 2-13 Driving for Better Economy ...... 4-1 INDEX i-5

Fuel (cont.) Gasoline Highway Hypnosis ...... 4-30 Filling a Portable Fuel Octane ...... 5-5 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 4-30 Container ...... 5-8 Specifications ...... 5-5 Hood Filling the Tank ...... 5-7 Glove Box ...... 2-47 Checking Things Under ...... 5-9 Fuels in Foreign Countries ... 5-7 GM Mobility Reimbursement Release ...... 5-9 Gage ...... 3-33 Program ...... 7-5 Horn ...... 3-5 Gasoline Octane ...... 5-5 How to Wear Safety Belts Gasoline Specifications ...... 5-5 Properly ...... 1-14 Fuses H Hydraulic Clutch ...... 5-21 Engine Compartment Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 3-5 Fuse Block ...... 5-92 Head Restraints ...... 1-2 Fuses and Circuit Headlamp I Breakers ...... 5-91 Aiming ...... 5-39 Ignition Positions ...... 2-16 Windshield Wiper ...... 5-91 Headlamps ...... 5-41 Infants and Young Children, Bulb Replacement ...... 5-41 Restraints ...... 1-28 Daytime Running Lamp ..... 3-13 Inflation - Tire Pressure ...... 5-51 G Exterior Lamps ...... 3-11 Instrument Panel Gage Flash-to-Pass ...... 3-7 Brightness ...... 3-15 Engine Coolant Halogen Bulbs ...... 5-41 Cluster ...... 3-23 Temperature ...... 3-29 High/Low Beam Changer ..... 3-7 Overview ...... 3-4 Fuel ...... 3-33 On Reminder ...... 3-13 Speedometer ...... 3-24 Heated Seats ...... 1-4 Tachometer ...... 3-24 Heater ...... 3-19 Garage Door Opener ...... 2-42 Engine Coolant ...... 2-19 Highbeam On Light ...... 3-33 i-6 INDEX

J Light Loading Your Vehicle ...... 4-35 Airbag Readiness ...... 3-25 Locking Rear Axle ...... 4-8 Jump Starting ...... 5-34 Antilock Brake System Lockout Protection ...... 2-7 (ABS) Warning ...... 3-28 Locks K Brake System Warning ...... 3-27 Door ...... 2-5 Keyless Entry System ...... 2-3 Charging System ...... 3-27 Lockout Protection ...... 2-7 Keys ...... 2-2 Cruise Control ...... 3-33 Power Door ...... 2-6 Highbeam On ...... 3-33 Programmable Automatic Oil Pressure ...... 3-32 Door Locks ...... 2-6 L Passenger Airbag Status Rear Door Security Locks .... 2-6 Labeling, Tire Sidewall ...... 5-45 Indicator ...... 3-26 Loss of Control ...... 4-12 Lamp Safety Belt Reminders ...... 3-24 Lower Anchors and Tethers Malfunction Indicator ...... 3-30 Security ...... 3-33 for Children ...... 1-34 Lamps StabiliTrak® /Traction Luggage Carrier ...... 2-48 Dome ...... 3-16 Control System (TCS) Lumbar Dome Lamp Override ...... 3-16 Warning Light ...... 3-29 Manual Controls ...... 1-4 Off-Road ...... 3-14 Tire Pressure ...... 3-30 Power Controls ...... 1-4 Reading ...... 3-16 Up-Shift ...... 3-27 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 1-20 Lighting LATCH System for Child Exit ...... 3-16 M Restraints ...... 1-34 Lights Maintenance Schedule License Plate Lamps ...... 5-43 Exterior Lamps ...... 3-11 Additional Required Flash-to-Pass ...... 3-7 Services ...... 6-6 High/Low Beam Changer ..... 3-7 At Each Fuel Fill ...... 6-9 On Reminder ...... 3-13 At Least Once a Month ...... 6-9 At Least Once a Year ...... 6-10 INDEX i-7

Maintenance Schedule (cont.) Mirrors Online Owner Center ...... 7-3 Introduction ...... 6-1 Automatic Dimming OnStar, Privacy ...... 7-17 Maintenance Footnotes ...... 6-7 Rearview ...... 2-33 OnStar® System, see Maintenance Record ...... 6-16 Outside Convex Mirror ...... 2-35 OnStar® Manual ...... 2-39 Maintenance Replacement Outside Power Mirrors ...... 2-35 Operation, Universal Home Parts ...... 6-14 MyGMLink.com ...... 7-3 Remote System ...... 2-43 Maintenance Outlet Adjustment ...... 3-21 Requirements ...... 6-2 Outlets Owner Checks and N Accessory Power ...... 3-18 Services ...... 6-9 Navigation System, Privacy ... 7-17 Outside Recommended Fluids and Navigation/Radio System, see Convex Mirror ...... 2-35 Lubricants ...... 6-12 Navigation Manual ...... 3-52 Power Mirrors ...... 2-35 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 6-4 New Vehicle Break-In ...... 2-15 Owner Checks and Services ... 6-9 Using ...... 6-2 Owners, Canadian ...... ii Your Vehicle and the O Environment ...... 6-2 Odometer ...... 3-24 P Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 3-30 Odometer, Trip ...... 3-24 Manual Lumbar Controls ...... 1-4 Paint, Damage ...... 5-89 Off-Road Driving ...... 4-13 Park Manual Seats ...... 1-3 Off-Road Lamps ...... 3-14 Manual Transmission Shifting Into ...... 2-29 Off-Road Recovery ...... 4-11 Shifting Out of ...... 2-30 Fluid ...... 5-20 Oil Operation ...... 2-22 Park Aid ...... 2-36 Engine ...... 5-13 Park Brake ...... 2-28 Message Pressure Light ...... 3-32 DIC Warnings and Oil, Engine Oil Life System .... 5-15 Messages ...... 3-37 Older Children, Restraints ...... 1-25 i-8 INDEX

Parking Privacy ...... 7-16 Rear Windshield Washer/ Over Things That Burn ...... 2-31 Event Data Recorders ...... 7-16 Wiper ...... 3-8 Parking Your Vehicle ...... 2-31 Navigation System ...... 7-17 Rearview Mirror, Automatic Passenger Airbag Status OnStar ...... 7-17 Dimming ...... 2-33 Indicator ...... 3-26 Radio Frequency Reclining Seatbacks ...... 1-5 Passenger Sensing System ... 1-54 Identiﬁcation ...... 7-17 Recommended Fluids and Passing ...... 4-12 Programmable Automatic Lubricants ...... 6-12 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Door Locks ...... 2-6 Recovery Loops ...... 4-34 Immobilizer ...... 2-13 Recreational Vehicle Towing ... 4-40 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Immobilizer Operation ...... 2-14 R System ...... 2-3 Passlock® ...... 2-12 Radio Frequency Identiﬁcation Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Perchlorate Materials (RFID), Privacy ...... 7-17 System, Operation ...... 2-4 Requirements, California ...... 5-4 Radio(s) ...... 3-42 Removing the Flat Tire and Phone Radios Installing the Spare Tire ..... 5-72 Bluetooth® ...... 3-52 Navigation/Radio System, Removing the Spare Tire Power see Navigation Manual ... 3-52 and Tools ...... 5-68, 5-69 Door Locks ...... 2-6 Reception ...... 3-62 Replacement Bulbs ...... 5-43 Electrical System ...... 5-91 Setting the Clock ...... 3-41 Replacement Parts, Lumbar Controls ...... 1-4 Theft-Deterrent ...... 3-62 Maintenance ...... 6-14 Retained Accessory ...... 2-17 Reading Lamps ...... 3-16 Reporting Safety Defects Seat ...... 1-3 Rear Axle ...... 5-38 Canadian Government ...... 7-14 Steering Fluid ...... 5-29 Locking ...... 4-8 General Motors ...... 7-15 Windows ...... 2-10 Rear Door Security Locks ...... 2-6 United States Rear Storage Area ...... 2-49 Government ...... 7-14 Rear Vision Camera ...... 2-36 INDEX i-9

Restraint System Check Safety Warnings and Symbols .... iii Service (cont.) Checking the Restraint Scheduled Maintenance ...... 6-4 Doing Your Own Work ...... 5-4 Systems ...... 1-60 Seats Engine Soon Lamp ...... 3-30 Replacing Restraint System 60/40 Split Publications Ordering Parts After a Crash ...... 1-60 Bench Seat ...... 1-7, 1-9 Information ...... 7-15 Retained Accessory Power .... 2-17 Heated Seats ...... 1-4 Service, Scheduling Roadside Manual Lumbar ...... 1-4 Appointments ...... 7-9 Service ...... 7-6 Power Lumbar ...... 1-4 Servicing Your Rocking Your Vehicle to Power Seats ...... 1-3 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 1-58 Get it Out ...... 4-34 Reclining Seatbacks ...... 1-5 Setting the Clock ...... 3-41 Routing, Engine Drive Belt .... 6-15 Secondary Latch System ...... 5-76 Sheet Metal Damage ...... 5-89 Running the Vehicle While Securing a Child Restraint Shifting Into Park ...... 2-29 Parked ...... 2-32 Center Rear Seat Shifting Out of Park ...... 2-30 Position ...... 1-43 Side Steps ...... 4-28 Rear Outside Seat Signals, Turn and S Position ...... 1-41 Lane-Change ...... 3-6 Safety Belt Reminders ...... 3-24 Right Front Seat Position ... 1-43 Spare Tire ...... 5-82 Safety Belts Security Light ...... 3-33 Installing ...... 5-72 Care of ...... 5-85 Service ...... 5-3 Removing ...... 5-68, 5-69 How to Wear Safety Belts Accessories and Storing ...... 5-78, 5-80 Properly ...... 1-14 Modiﬁcations ...... 5-3 Speciﬁcations, Capacities ...... 5-96 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 1-20 Adding Equipment to the Speedometer ...... 3-24 Safety Belt Extender ...... 1-25 Outside of the Vehicle ..... 5-5 Split Bench Safety Belt Use During California Perchlorate Seat (60/40) ...... 1-7, 1-9 Pregnancy ...... 1-25 Materials Requirements .... 5-4 StabiliTrak® System ...... 4-6 Safety Belts Are for California Proposition StabiliTrak®/TCS Warning Everyone ...... 1-11 65 Warning ...... 5-4 Light ...... 3-29 i-10 INDEX

Starting the Engine ...... 2-17 Taillamps (cont.) Tires (cont.) Steering ...... 4-10 Theft-Deterrent, Radio ...... 3-62 Pressure Monitor Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ...... 3-6 Theft-Deterrent Systems ...... 2-11 Operation ...... 5-54 Storage Areas Content Theft-Deterrent ..... 2-11 Pressure Monitor System ... 5-52 Cargo Management PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Removing the Flat Tire ...... 5-72 System ...... 2-49 Immobilizer ...... 2-13 Removing the Spare Tire Center Console PASS-Key® III+ Electronic and Tools ...... 5-68, 5-69 Storage Area ...... 2-47 Immobilizer Operation .... 2-14 Secondary Latch System ... 5-76 Convenience Net ...... 2-49 Passlock® ...... 2-12 Spare Tire ...... 5-82 Cupholders ...... 2-47 Tilt Wheel ...... 3-6 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire Front Seat Storage Net ..... 2-47 Time, Setting ...... 3-41 and Tools ...... 5-78, 5-80 Glove Box ...... 2-47 Tire Tire Sidewall Labeling ...... 5-45 Luggage Carrier ...... 2-48 Pressure Light ...... 3-30 Tire Terminology and Rear Storage Area ...... 2-49 Tires ...... 5-44 Deﬁnitions ...... 5-48 Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, Aluminum or Uniform Tire Quality or Snow ...... 4-33 Chrome-Plated Wheels, Grading ...... 5-62 Sun Visors ...... 2-11 Cleaning ...... 5-88 Wheel Alignment and Tire Sunroof ...... 2-50 Buying New Tires ...... 5-59 Balance ...... 5-63 Swing-gate ...... 2-9 Chains ...... 5-65 Wheel Replacement ...... 5-64 Changing a Flat Tire ...... 5-66 When It Is Time for New Cleaning ...... 5-89 Tires ...... 5-58 T Different Size ...... 5-61 Towing Tachometer ...... 3-24 If a Tire Goes Flat ...... 5-66 Recreational Vehicle ...... 4-40 Tailgate ...... 2-7 Inﬂation - Tire Pressure ..... 5-51 Towing a Trailer ...... 4-42 Taillamps Inspection and Rotation ..... 5-57 Your Vehicle ...... 4-40 Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Installing the Spare Tire ..... 5-72 Back-up Lamps ...... 5-42 INDEX i-11

Traction U W Control System (TCS) ...... 4-7 Uniform Tire Quality Warning Lights, Gages, and StabiliTrak® System ...... 4-6 Grading ...... 5-62 Indicators ...... 3-22 Trailer Universal Home Remote Warnings Recommendations ...... 4-53 System ...... 2-42 DIC Warnings and Transmission Operation ...... 2-43 Messages ...... 3-37 Fluid, Automatic ...... 5-18 Up-Shift Light ...... 3-27 Hazard Warning Flashers .... 3-5 Fluid, Manual ...... 5-20 Safety and Symbols ...... iii Up-Shift Light ...... 3-27 Wheels Transmission Operation, V Alignment and Tire Automatic ...... 2-19 Vehicle Balance ...... 5-63 Transmission Operation, Control ...... 4-3 Different Size ...... 5-61 Manual ...... 2-22 Loading ...... 4-35 Replacement ...... 5-64 Trip Odometer ...... 3-24 Parking Your ...... 2-31 Where to Put the Restraint .... 1-32 Truck-Camper Loading Running While Parked ...... 2-32 Windows ...... 2-9 Information ...... 4-39 Symbols ...... iii Power ...... 2-10 Turn and Lane-Change Vehicle Data Recording and Windshield Signals ...... 3-6 Privacy ...... 7-16 Backglass, and Wiper Turn Signal/Multifunction Vehicle Identiﬁcation Blades, Cleaning ...... 5-87 Lever ...... 3-6 Number (VIN) ...... 5-90 Washer ...... 3-8 Service Parts Identiﬁcation Washer Fluid ...... 5-30 Label ...... 5-90 Ventilation Adjustment ...... 3-21 Visors ...... 2-11 i-12 INDEX

Windshield (cont.) Wiper Blade Replacement ...... 5-44 Wiper Fuses ...... 5-91 Wipers ...... 3-7 Windshield, Rear Washer/ Wiper ...... 3-8 Winter Driving ...... 4-31 X XM Radio Messages ...... 3-51 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 3-63 Y Your Vehicle and the Environment ...... 6-2